Switching Operator’s Manual (Rev 4)

Distribution Switching

Document Number: 5011675

 Document Control

Document Owner Name: Stuart Smit

(May also be the Process Owner) Position: System Operations and
Switching Coordinator

Name: Neil Streatfield

Approved By Position: System Operations Manager

Date Created/Last Updated September 2020

Review Frequency Two yearly

Next Review Date September 2022

STAKEHOLDERS NOTIFICATION LIST

The following positions must be consulted if an update or The following positions must be notified of any authorised
review is required: change:

Regional Managers Works Delivery Managers

Operational Formal Leaders

CS10#5011675 Page 2 of 3
 RECORD OF REVISIONS

Revision Date Revised By Description

No.

01 17/10/2018 Stuart Smit Section 9. Paragraph 9.6.3 revised to include

additional information pertaining to single phase /
three phase spur disconnections.

02 21/02/2019 Stuart Smit Section 9.8. Backup process. Revised to

include information regarding place keeping
practises when using a paper switching
schedule.

03 24/09/2019 Stuart Smit Section 3. Section 3.2.1 – Distribution

Transformer Tap Setting. Pole mounted and
ground mounted PTW requirements specified
for off-load tapping.

04 30/09/2020 Stuart Smit Section 4. Updated to include remote control

monitoring for Fusesavers.
Section 5. Updated to include DC isolator for
spring charge motors as well as inclusion of
the T300 RTU.
Section 6. Updated to include DC isolator for
spring charge motors.

CS10#5011675 Page 3 of 3
 SECTION ONE

Introduction: Distribution
Switching

Table of Contents
1. Introduction: Distribution Switching ...................................................... 1-1
1.1 Purpose .............................................................................................. 1-1
1.2 Content .............................................................................................. 1-1
1.2.1 Manual One .................................................................................... 1-1
1.2.2 Manual Two .................................................................................... 1-3
1.3 Switching Operator Authorisation Levels ............................................ 1-3

i
Switching Operator's Manual One

List of Figures
No table of figures entries found.

List of Tables
No table of figures entries found.

ii
1. Introduction: Distribution
Switching
1.1 Purpose
Manual One provides the switching operator with information on the distribution
network configuration, apparatus and switching operations. The manual covers
the Horizon Power distribution networks associated with the microgrid and Pilbara
Grid systems.

Manual Two provides the switching operator with information on the transmission
network configuration, apparatus and switching operations. This manual covers
the transmission network associated with the Pilbara Grid.

Both manuals are intended to be used as a resource for all switching operators
and also a major resource for the training modules in Switching Operations.

1.2 Content
1.2.1 Manual One

Manual One covers the network and switching associated with the distribution
high voltage (HV) and low voltage (LV) network, which is common to both
microgrid and Pilbara Grid systems. The LV distribution network connects
electrical power to the majority of the Horizon Power’s customers, and the HV
distribution network supplies HV power to the distribution transformers which is
stepped down in voltage to supply the LV network.

A brief description of the contents of each section is provided below.

Section 1

Section One (this section) provides a brief overview of the contents of the manuals
and a more detailed overview of the sections related to the distribution HV and LV
networks.

Section 2

Section Two is a general introduction to Horizon Power’s Power systems. It

provides an overview of both microgrid and the interconnected Pilbara Grid
systems. An overview of generation stations, transmission substations and lines
and the distribution HV and LV networks is provided. The responsibility for
switching on these networks is also discussed.

1-1
Switching Operator's Manual One

Section 3

Section Three describes in detail the LV distribution network configuration,

apparatus and switching operations. This is the most extensive network and both
overhead and underground forms are common. This network connects and
provides electrical power to the majority of Horizon Power’s customers.

Section 4

Section Four describes in detail the HV distribution overhead network

configuration, apparatus and switching operations. This is an extensive network
and exists in both three-phase and the single-phase forms common in regional
areas.

Section 5

Section Five describes in detail the HV underground network configuration,

apparatus and switching operations. This network tends to be located in built-up
areas and exists in both three-phase and the single-phase forms.

Section 6

Section Six describes in detail the substations which provide the source of supply
for the HV distribution network. It includes a description of the substation
configurations and the associated primary and ancillary apparatus.

Section 7

Section Seven describes the protection systems used on both the HV and LV
distribution systems. It includes descriptions of the grading introduced to ensure
only the faulted section of the distribution system is disconnected.

Section 8 – (also applicable to Transmission switching)

Section Eight describes the critical matters relating to safe switching operations, it
is applicable to both distribution and transmission switching. The section includes
a description of the switching related documentation and the roles and
responsibilities. Also detailed are the principles and practice of isolation and
earthing, permits and barriers, locking and tagging. Details are provided on
common switching operation tasks, the practical checks before and after switching
apparatus and switching related hazards.

Section 9 – (also applicable to Transmission switching)

Section Nine describes the roles and responsibilities, tools and procedures
associated with the creation and running of switching programs which are
applicable to both distribution and transmission switching. Also included in the
section are the program writing considerations which must be reflected on and
included if appropriate to create a successful switching program.

1-2
 Section One – Introduction: Distribution Switching

Section 10

Section 10 describes the testing and commissioning documentation, equipment

and practices required to carry out the testing and commissioning of distribution
apparatus which is to be placed in service. Also included is an example of a
commissioning switching program.

1.2.2 Manual Two

Manual Two covers matters relating to transmission network switching.

It should be noted Sections 8 and 9 as described above are also applicable to

transmission switching.

1.3 Switching Operator Authorisation

Levels
Horizon Power's Switching Operator Authorisation Levels are described in the
table below.

Level Description

1 Fault response – initial response to faults including switching to

disconnect faulted apparatus on de-energised distribution
systems.

2 Distribution switching – all primary apparatus associated with HV

and LV overhead and underground networks.

3 Substation switching – allows switching operations on primary

apparatus located within Pilbara Grid and microgrid substations.

4 Transmission switching – all primary apparatus associated with

Transmission lines, zone substations and terminal stations.

5 Protection and other secondary systems – isolation and

commissioning of protection and secondary systems.

6 Generation switching – HV and LV switching on generation sites.

7 HPCC controller switching – switching coordination and remote

switching of Pilbara Grid and microgrid apparatus.

Field Instruction – Switching Authorisation details the requirements of obtaining a

switching operator’s authority.

1-3
 SECTION TWO

Horizon Power’s Power Systems

Table of Contents
2. Horizon Power’s Power Systems ........................................................... 2-1

2.1 Introduction......................................................................................... 2-1

2.2 Horizon Power's Two Systems ........................................................... 2-1
2.2.1 Microgrid Systems .......................................................................... 2-1
2.2.2 Interconnected Systems ................................................................. 2-4
2.3 System Components .......................................................................... 2-7
2.3.1 Generating Stations ........................................................................ 2-7
2.3.2 Transmission Lines ......................................................................... 2-9
2.3.3 Terminal Stations .......................................................................... 2-10
2.3.4 Zone Substations .......................................................................... 2-13
2.3.5 Distribution High Voltage Feeders – Underground Overhead ....... 2-16
2.3.6 Distribution Low Voltage (LV) Circuits ........................................... 2-16
2.3.7 Component Responsibility ............................................................ 2-18
2.4 Connection of Components .............................................................. 2-18
2.5 Switching Responsibility ................................................................... 2-19

i
Switching Operator's Manual One

List of Figures
Figure 2-1 Horizon Power's microgrid and interconnected systems ................... 2-2
Figure 2-2 Components of a microgrid system ................................................... 2-3
Figure 2-3 Components of an interconnected system ........................................ 2-5
Figure 2-4 Interconnected system: The interconnection of components ............. 2-6
Figure 2-5 Typical gas turbine generator............................................................ 2-8
Figure 2-6 Typical diesel fuel-fired power station ............................................... 2-8
Figure 2-7 Horizon Power’s Pilbara Grid transmission system ........................... 2-9
Figure 2-8 South Hedland Terminal Station ..................................................... 2-11
Figure 2-9 Hedland Terminal Station ............................................................... 2-12
Figure 2-10 Anderson Street Zone Substation ................................................. 2-14
Figure 2-11 Wedgefield Zone Substation 66kV single busbar .......................... 2-15
Figure 2-12 Typical distribution feeders ........................................................... 2-17

List of Tables
Table 2-1 Responsibility for components ......................................................... 2-18
Table 2-2 System advantages and disadvantages ........................................... 2-19

ii
2. Horizon Power’s Power
Systems

2.1 Introduction
Horizon Power generates, distributes and retails electricity through its range of
power systems in regional Western Australia. The components and structure of
Horizon Power's power systems are described in this section.

Two types of power systems are used (see Figure 2-1):

 the non-interconnected systems, known as microgrid systems, and

 the interconnected systems.

The type of system used is determined by local conditions such as the number of
customers, customers load, and the distance to the power supply source.

2.2 Horizon Power's Two Systems

2.2.1 Microgrid Systems

Horizon Power’s microgrid systems are designed to suit load centres in regional
and remote areas. Figure 2-1 shows the location of the microgrid systems and the
fuel type used for generation. (Note that all locations outside the Pilbara Grid
network are microgrids, although there is an interconnection between Kununurra
and Wyndham in the Kimberley region.) Because of their remote location, each
microgrid system operates independently and does not connect to other microgrid
systems.

Figure 2-2 shows the basic components of a microgrid system. The system can be
divided into generation, HV distribution and LV distribution.

The generating plant consist of conventional generation which may also be

supplemented with local distributed generation. Conventional generation uses gas
turbines or diesel engines fuelled by natural gas or diesel. Distributed generation
mainly comprises photovoltaic panels, both in the form of customer rooftop solar
arrays and commercial solar farms, and wind turbines. Hydro generation is also
used in the Kimberley region to supply the towns of Kununurra and Wyndham.

2-1
Switching Operator's Manual One

Step up transformers are used to increase the voltage to 11, 22 or 33kV. The HV
distribution feeders supply distribution transformers with electrical energy which is
further stepped down to the LV distribution voltages (480/415/240V), to supply the
customers via overhead and underground LV networks.

Figure 2-1 Horizon Power's microgrid and interconnected systems

2-2
 Section Two – Horizon Power’s Power Systems

Generating
plant
Generation

Output
415V – 11kV

Step-up
transformer
HV Distribution

Distribution feeders
33kV – 22kV – 11kV

Distribution
transformer
LV Distribution

LV Distribution
 415V – three-phase
 480V – split-phase
 240V – single-phase

Consumer

Figure 2-2 Components of a microgrid system

2-3
Switching Operator's Manual One

2.2.2 Interconnected Systems

Horizon Power’s Pilbara Grid is of the interconnected system type and is designed
to accommodate large load centres and use several generating stations connected
together with a transmission network. Figure 2-1 shows the location of the Pilbara
Grid system supplying the Karratha and Port Hedland areas. The fuel used for
generation is predominantly natural gas, with diesel fired generation being available
for shortages in natural gas supply.

Figure 2-3 shows the basic components of a typical interconnected system. The
system can be divided into generation, transmission, HV distribution and LV
distribution.

The generating stations produce electrical energy using large gas turbines.
Generator step up transformers increase the voltage to higher transmission
voltages of 66, 132 or 220kV to reduce the electrical system losses. The HV
transmission lines transport the electrical energy to the terminal stations which are
the bulk supply points for the zone substations.

The zone substations connect the transmission network to the distribution network
using step down transformers to reduce transmission voltages (66 or 132kV) down
to HV distribution voltages (11, 22 or 33kV). The distribution feeders supply
distribution transformers with electrical energy which is further stepped down to the
LV distribution (415/240V), to supply the customers via overhead and underground
LV networks (see Figure 2-4 below).

Figure 2-4 shows a simplified representation of the Pilbara Grid, where the
Karratha and Port Hedland systems are connected together with a long 220kV
transmission line. It can be seen the terminal stations connect the generation
stations together and supply the zone substations. For increased supply security
most zone substations have more than one source of high voltage transmission
supply.

2-4
 Section Two – Horizon Power’s Power Systems

Generators

Generation
11kV

11kV – 132kV – 220kV

Step-up transformer

Transmission line
220kV – 132kV – 66kV

Terminal station
220kV – 132kV – 66kV
Step-down transformer
Transmission

Transmission line
132kV – 66kV

Zone substation
Step-down transformer
HV Distribution

Distribution feeders
33kV – 22kV – 11kV

Distribution transformer
LV Distribution

LV Distribution
 415V – three-phase
 240V – single-phase

Consumer

Figure 2-3 Components of an interconnected system

2-5
2-6
Generation Generation Generation Generation

Generation
220 kV
Switching Operator's Manual One

Terminal station Terminal station

Zone substation
Large distances
132 kV 132 kV 66 kV 66 kV

132 kV 66 kV

Transmission
Zone substation Zone substation Zone substation Zone substation

U/G to O/H
connection Industrial or
U/G HV commercial
Feeder customer

HV
O/H HV
Feeder
U/G HV Feeder

Distribution
415 / 240 V Kiosk Universal
Pole top substation Pillar
Distribution
transformer O/H service Distribution feeders
line and

Figure 2-4 Interconnected system: The interconnection of components

Distribution transformers Residential

LV
11, 22, or 33 kV U/G customer
415 / 240 V service
Residential Distribution line 415 / 240 V network
415 / 240 V network customer

Distribution
 Section Two – Horizon Power’s Power Systems

2.3 System Components

The major components of microgrid systems are generating stations, transformers,
distribution feeders and LV circuits.

The interconnected system is much larger and has a transmission system which
requires the additional components of transmission lines, terminal stations and
zone substations

2.3.1 Generating Stations

Generation is the conversion of mechanical or renewable energy into electrical

energy. Horizon Power generates or purchases power derived mainly from
mechanical means such as gas turbines and diesel engines. This is being
increasingly supplemented with localised distributed generation.

Pilbara Grid is supplied mainly from:

 privately-owned and operated gas turbines, and

 power stations owned and run by local mining companies.

Microgrid towns can be supplied from a range of generation which can include
combinations of the following (dependent on the specific installation):

 gas- or diesel-fired turbines

 diesel combustion engines

 wind turbines

 photovoltaic solar farms

 consumer solar arrays and battery storage, and

 hydro power on the Ord river.

The size of generating units is dependent on the load to be supplied from the
kilowatt range to many megawatts. The smaller generating units will generate at
low voltage 415V, whilst the larger units will generate around 11kV with step up
transformers to match the voltage of the network to which they connect.

In the Pilbara Grid to increase efficiency, because of the large amounts of power
required and long distances involved, the voltage may be stepped up to 132 or
220kV. In microgrids the generator or step up transformer voltage will match the
local distribution voltage.

Generating stations usually have multiple generating units to allow for multiple units
to run at high load and also make individual units available for maintenance.

2-7
Switching Operator's Manual One

Exhaust with
Air inlet
silencer
duct

Generator

Electric Axial flow

starting motor compressor Gearbox
Turbine

Step-up
Transformer

Figure 2-5 Typical gas turbine generator

Exhaust
Generator
Exciter

Water
cooling
Diesel engine

Step-up
Transformer

Figure 2-6 Typical diesel fuel-fired power station

2-8
 2.3.2

KTP KRP

YPS DBS KTS SHL CBS SHP TIG HPS BPS

voltage may be increased.

DMP KRT CLB SHT HDT WFD FIH FIN

Transmission Lines

BKN MSM PWA PCK BUL PSN WCT SWC MNM

TPE PBO ROE UTP AST MDR GW

JDS YND HDS = Non-Horizon Power network = 11 kV = 33 kV = 66 kV = 132 kV = 220 kV

HDS = Hope Downs BUL = Bulgarra SHT = South Hedland Terminal AST = Anderson Street

LEGEND DBS = Dampier Bulk Supply SS KTP = Karatha Temporary Power CBS = Cape Lambert Bulk supply HDT = Hedland Terminal HPS = Hedland Power Stn
WAS
YPS = Yurrali Maya PS DMP = Dampier substation KTS = Karatha Temporary Substation CLB = Cape Lambert SWC = South West Creek FIH = Finucane Island

BKN = Brockman MSM = Millstream KRT = Karatha Terminal PSN = Point Sampson UTP = Utah Point MDR = Murdoch Drive
Figure 2-7 shows the network and voltages used in the Pilbara Grid.

TPE = Tom Price PBO = Paraburdoo PCK = Pegs Creek ROE = Roebourne TIG = Tiger substation BPS = Boondarie PS

Figure 2-7 Horizon Power’s Pilbara Grid transmission system

JDS = Juna Downs YND = Yandi KRP = Karatha Power WCT = Wickham Terminal WFD = Wedgefield FIN = Finucane

WAS = West Angelas PWA = Pannawonica SHL = Stove Hill Terminal SHP = South Hedland Power Stn MNM = Mount Newman GW = Goldsworthy
These lines transmit power over long distances using very high voltages. This
reduces power losses. However, the cost and availability of equipment (step up
transformers, insulators, circuit breakers, towers etc.) limit the degree to which the
Section Two – Horizon Power’s Power Systems

2-9
Switching Operator's Manual One

2.3.3 Terminal Stations

As the interconnected networks became more complex and a greater variety of

voltages were used, terminal stations were introduced to interconnect the various
voltages (see typical examples in Figure 2-8 and Figure 2-9). Terminal stations
allow flexibility to control and transform power to lower levels of transmission.

Voltage of 66kV, 132kV or 220kV are used in terminal stations. These voltages
may be stepped up for further transmission to other terminal stations or stepped
down for transmission to lower levels of transmission at zone substations.
Transmission to zone substations is carried out at voltages of 66kV or 132kV.

2-10
 Section Two – Horizon Power’s Power Systems

Figure 2-8 South Hedland Terminal Station

Incoming 11kV generation connected to generation step up transformers (SUT 1-3)
which change voltage 11/220kV to supply Hedland Terminal Station (HDT)
and Cape Lambert Terminal Station (CLB)

2-11
Switching Operator's Manual One

Figure 2-9 Hedland Terminal Station

Incoming 220kV supply from South Hedland Terminal Station (SHT)
with transformers supplying 66kV to outgoing circuits to Wedgefield (WFD) zone substation

2-12
 Section Two – Horizon Power’s Power Systems

2.3.4 Zone Substations

Zone substations are used as the final stage of transmission and the first level of
distribution networks. Zone substations are fed mainly from 66kV or 132kV
transmission lines and are usually connected in a ring network to other zone
substations and terminal stations. The ring network is used to maintain continuity of
supply during faults and planned outages.

The transmission voltage supplied to the zone substation is transformed down to

distribution high voltage by means of a step down transformer.

Zone substations use two busbar configurations:

 single bus, and

 double bus.

The double bus configuration has better flexibility of supply than the single bus
configuration.

There are also two types of switchgear used for distribution from the zone
substation:

 indoor

 outdoor.

Zone substations can have distribution voltages of 11, 22 or 33kV. This depends on
local conditions and design factors.

Typical examples are shown in Figure 2-10 and Figure 2-11.

2-13
Switching Operator's Manual One

Figure 2-10 Anderson Street Zone Substation

66kV double busbar to 22kV single busbar
(with transfer bus) outdoor switchgear

2-14
 Section Two – Horizon Power’s Power Systems

Figure 2-11 Wedgefield Zone Substation 66kV single busbar

2-15
Switching Operator's Manual One

2.3.5 Distribution High Voltage Feeders – Underground

Overhead

Feeders distribute high voltage power to distribution transformers in local areas

around a substation (see Figure 2-12). To allow for flexibility, distribution feeders
interconnect with other feeders from the same substation or other substations in an
interconnected network. Interconnection between substations is possible only if the
voltage output from the substations is the same.

Feeders are three-phase circuits and can be overhead line networks, underground
cable networks or a combination of both.

The distribution high voltages used are 11kV, 22kV and 33kV. The choice of
voltage is determined by the load and location.

Long rural feeders are often supplied at 33kV to reduce line losses.

In some remote areas the rural feeders extend from the substation as three-phase
overhead lines and branch into single-phase spurs. These spurs combine with a
running earth to feed several small distribution transformers. These single-phase
spurs can be overhead or be installed in an underground system, referred to as a
single-phase underground distribution system (SPUDS).

2.3.6 Distribution Low Voltage (LV) Circuits

Each distribution transformer steps down the feeder high voltage to supply the
distribution low voltage circuits. Depending on the circuit arrangements, the
distribution low voltage circuit provides customers with a range of voltages:

 415V three-phase

 240V single-phase

 480V split-phase (only single-phase rural areas)

The low voltage circuit may feed a single rural customer, a large commercial
customer or several streets in a residential area.

The area of the circuit is determined by:

 the size of the transformer (load)

 the volt drop within the LV circuit, and

 the type of load to be supplied.

Low voltage circuits are designed to allow the transformers to be run as near as
possible to their rated values. Various sizes of conductors maintain set voltage
limits around the circuit.

2-16
 Section Two – Horizon Power’s Power Systems

Substation

F1 F2 F3

Legend
Circuit breaker closed Recloser

RMU fuse switch closed

Pole top switch Distribution transformer

or RMU switch disconnector closed interconnectable
Drop out fuse closed

Distribution transformer
PTS or RMU SWDC NOP OH to UG cable head non-interconnectable

Figure 2-12 Typical distribution feeders

2-17
Switching Operator's Manual One

2.3.7 Component Responsibility

Responsibilities for the components of the Horizon Power microgrid and Pilbara
Grid systems are shown below. Horizon Power Control Centre (HPCC) located in
the Perth suburb of Bentley is the control authority.

Component Responsibility Activity

Pilbara Grid power HPCC Generation dispatch

stations under HP
control

Transmission Lines HPCC Operate plant and coordinate

outages
Control operations on
transmission circuits
Switching Operator Perform field switching
Terminal Stations HPCC Coordinate terminal station
circuit operations and perform
remote switching
Switching Operator Perform field switching
Zone and Microgrid HPCC Coordinate zone substation
Substations circuit operations and perform
remote switching
Switching Operator Perform field switching

Distribution Lines HPCC Coordinate daily operations

and perform remote switching

Switching Operator Perform field switching

LV Circuits Switching Operator Perform all operations

Microgrid power HP Generation Coordinate and perform daily
stations Asset Manager operations
or Private IPP
Table 2-1 Responsibility for components
of Horizon Power microgrid and Pilbara Grid systems

2.4 Connection of Components

The extent of the connection of components determines whether the system is
interconnected or non-interconnected.

Recall that the Horizon Power microgrids (non-interconnected systems) consist of

one or more local generating sources which feed straight into a distribution
network.

2-18
 Section Two – Horizon Power’s Power Systems

Recall also that the Horizon Power Pilbara Grid (an interconnected system)
consists of all the components already presented. These components connect
many generating sources to customers through various levels of transmission and
distribution.

The relative advantages and disadvantages of the microgrid and Pilbara Grid
systems are shown in Table 2-2. The most appropriate system is set up according
to the particular conditions of the location. However, wherever possible, an
interconnected type of system is preferred.

Microgrid systems

Advantages Disadvantages

Less capital outlay Low efficiency of generating plant

Fewer transmission line losses Low system security
Less equipment and maintenance Requires specialist spares for plant
Poor fault performance

Pilbara Grid

Advantages Disadvantages

High system security Large potential losses

(line and distribution)
Large efficient generating plant Very complex to operate
Relatively minimum plant
and spares
Centralised control of a single
system

Table 2-2 System advantages and disadvantages

2.5 Switching Responsibility

(Microgrid and Pilbara Grid)

Horizon Power Control Centre (HPCC) is the operating authority for Horizon
Power’s networks. HPCC has a Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)
system which monitors switchyard apparatus and enables remote switching of
specific apparatus in the networks.

After successful training and assessment, personnel are authorised with level-
specific switching authorities which allow operators to undertake switching duties in
a particular part of the network.

These switching operators are based in the regional depots. Switching operators
are required to write switching programs and undertake manual switching to
provide safe access for the maintenance, construction and testing as required on
the network.

2-19
 SECTION THREE

LV Distribution System

Table of Contents
3. LV Distribution System ........................................................................... 3-1

3.1 Introduction ........................................................................................ 3-1

3.2 Components of LV Distribution System .............................................. 3-2
3.2.1 Distribution Transformers .............................................................. 3-2
3.2.2 Aerial Conductors .......................................................................... 3-7
3.2.3 LV Disconnectors and Fuses ......................................................... 3-9
3.2.4 Underground Cables ................................................................... 3-19
3.2.5 Pillars .......................................................................................... 3-21
3.3 Design .............................................................................................. 3-24
3.3.1 Underground ............................................................................... 3-24
3.3.2 Overhead .................................................................................... 3-26
3.4 Switching Procedures ....................................................................... 3-28
3.4.1 Interconnection............................................................................ 3-29
3.4.2 Isolation....................................................................................... 3-30
3.4.3 Fault Location.............................................................................. 3-31
3.5 Traps ................................................................................................ 3-33

i
Switching Operator's Manual One

List of Figures
Figure 3-1 LV distribution system ....................................................................... 3-1
Figure 3-2 Circuit of pole mounted transformers................................................. 3-3
Figure 3-3 Typical schematic circuit of ground mounted transformers ................ 3-3
Figure 3-4 Distribution transformer ..................................................................... 3-4
Figure 3-5 Single-phase transformer circuits ...................................................... 3-5
Figure 3-6 Typical peak loads for 24-hour period ............................................... 3-7
Figure 3-7 LV overhead distribution connected in mesh ..................................... 3-8
Figure 3-8 LV underslung pole mounted disconnector........................................ 3-9
Figure 3-9 Pfisterer (l) and Krone (r) ganged fuse units ................................... 3-10
Figure 3-10 Distribution board disconnector ..................................................... 3-11
Figure 3-11 Two types of HRC fuse ................................................................. 3-12
Figure 3-12 Current limiting HRC fuse .............................................................. 3-12
Figure 3-13 HRC fuse system (underground system) ....................................... 3-13
Figure 3-14 Distribution board mounted disconnectors (extractable) ................ 3-14
Figure 3-15 Distribution board mounted disconnectors (hinged) ....................... 3-15
Figure 3-16 ABB SLBM 400 fuse and BSL 1600 disconnector ......................... 3-15
Figure 3-17: ABB Single Switch-Fuse / Isolator ................................................ 3-16
Figure 3-18: Double Switch-Fuse / Isolator ....................................................... 3-17
Figure 3-19 Testing busbar and cable side. ...................................................... 3-17
Figure 3-20 Type 1.1 Kiosk rated at 630A/415V ............................................... 3-18
Figure 3-21 Type 2 Kiosk rated at 1400A/415V ................................................ 3-18
Figure 3-22 Type 3.1 Kiosk rated at 2800A/415V ............................................. 3-18
Figure 3-23 Three core LV XLPE Cable (Wavecon) ......................................... 3-19
Figure 3-24 LV underground radial connections ............................................... 3-21
Figure 3-25 Mini pillar ....................................................................................... 3-22
Figure 3-26 Universal pillar............................................................................... 3-22
Figure 3-27 Universal pillar rear view ............................................................... 3-23
Figure 3-28 Feeder pillar .................................................................................. 3-24
Figure 3-29 Underground LV distribution system .............................................. 3-25
Figure 3-30 Overhead LV distribution system ................................................... 3-28
Figure 3-31 Examples of barriers for disconnectors.......................................... 3-31
Figure 3-32 Danger of misaligning universal pillar contacts .............................. 3-33

ii
 Section Three – LV Distribution System

List of Tables
Table 3-1 Voltage ranges at customer level meter position ................................ 3-2
Table 3-2 Transformer five stage variation on input voltage ............................... 3-5
Table 3-3 Advantages of HRC fuses ................................................................ 3-11
Table 3-4 Commonly-used LV underground cables ......................................... 3-20
Table 3-5 Transformer and LV circuit fault – switching operator response ....... 3-32

iii
Switching Operator's Manual One

Page left blank intentionally

iv
3. LV Distribution System

3.1 Introduction
This section is designed for the switching operator to refer to before and during
switching. It aims to promote safe switching practice and ensure continuity of
supply within the LV distribution system.

The low voltage distribution system extends from the distribution system
transformer to the customer's point of supply (see Figure 3-1). It is the point where
the majority of customers receive their supply.

Distribution
transformer

LV
Distribution
415 V 3Ø
480 V 2Ø
240 V 1Ø

Customer

Figure 3-1 LV distribution system

Horizon Power is required to maintain its supply within 6% (either side) of the
nominated voltage (240V phase to neutral, 415V phase to phase). Where the
power quality tests verify it is found to be outside these limits, modification to the
network is required.

3-1
Switching Operator's Manual One

Nominal
Voltage Lower limit Upper limit
(V) (V) (V)

Single-phase 240 226 254

Three-phase 415 390 440

Table 3-1 Voltage ranges at customer level meter position

In accordance with AS 61000.3.100 – 2011, Horizon Power expects to adopt the

new voltage standard 230 V +6%, -10% for single phase and 400 V +6%, -10% for
three-phase supplies. At the time of adaption, a further publication and review will
be issued.

3.2 Components of LV Distribution System

This section describes each component of the LV Distribution System and the
switching operations required. Further information can be found in Horizon
Power’s Distribution Design Rules.

The major components include transformers, aerial conductors, disconnectors

(isolators), fuses, underground cables, pillars and LV switchboards.

3.2.1 Distribution Transformers

Distribution transformers are used to transform power from the HV distribution

system to the LV distribution system.

Those used by Horizon Power are either pole mounted or ground mounted,
depending on size.

Pole Mounted Transformers

Pole mounted transformers in the network range from single-phase 10kVA to

three-phase 315kVA. Single-phase pole mounted transformers normally feed rural
installations or small loads. Figure 3-2 shows a typical single line diagram of a
transformer and its circuit.

3-2
 Section Three – LV Distribution System

Pole mounted

(bare LV or ABC)
transformer

HV feeder

LV mains
HV drop-out fuse LV disconnector
(or fuses)

Figure 3-2 Circuit of pole mounted transformers

For safety reasons, the distance between a three-phase transformer and the drop-
out fuse is normally as short as possible.

Ground Mounted Transformers

Ground mounted transformers may be padmount, compound, or indoor

distribution substations. They may be fed from drop-out fuses (DOFs) or a ring
main unit (RMU) (see Figure 3-3). Drawings of each type of distribution substation
are available in Horizon Power's Distribution Construction Manual.

Ground Circuit
mounted fuses
transformer
overhead

LV
HV

LV circuits
Drop-out
fuse disconnector

Board mounted fuses

Ground
mounted
underground

transformer
LV
HV

LV circuits
Switch
fuse
disconnector
Circuit
Ring main unit fuses
Padmount

Figure 3-3 Typical schematic circuit of ground mounted transformers

3-3
Switching Operator's Manual One

Standard transformer ratings used by Horizon Power for underground distribution

schemes are:

• 63kVA

• 160 kVA

• 315 kVA

• 630 kVA

• 1000 kVA.

Note: Other transformer sizes exist as a legacy of earlier design standards.

Purpose

Three-phase LV distribution transformers are normally wired HV delta/LV star.

They provide three-phase and a neutral to the LV supply.

LV Star Phase-to-phase
HV Delta Iron core

415 V

240 V

3-phase HV
• 11 kV Neutral
• 22 kV
• 33 kV Phase-to-neutral

Figure 3-4 Distribution transformer

The rural system is an exception, for the high voltage supplying the transformer
may be single-phase. Rural transformers supply single-phase (240V) or split-
phase (480V). See Figure 3-5.

Each transformer has a tap changer to provide a constant LV voltage with variable
HV levels. Table 3-2 shows the five-stage variation with 2.5% steps for a
22kV/415V transformer.

3-4
 Section Three – LV Distribution System

19.1 kV Iron core

12.7 kV
240 V
480 V
240 V

Earth Phase-to-earth

Iron core
1Ø

240 V

22 kV 480 V
240 V

1Ø

Phase-to-phase

Figure 3-5 Single-phase transformer circuits

HV
Nameplate Percentage LV Voltage
Tap
Voltage (%) (Φ to N)
(volts)

1 23 100 -5 415/240
2 22 550 -2.5 415/240
3 22 000 415/240
4 21 450 +2.5 415/240
5 20 900 +5 415/240

2.5% = 550 volts on HV side

Table 3-2 Transformer five stage variation on input voltage

Switching operators should find out what localised tap requirements are necessary
to obtain the correct voltages for all types of transformers in each locality.

3-5
Switching Operator's Manual One

Operations and Checks – Fault/Short Circuit Current

When a fault occurs on the LV distribution system, the current flowing from the
transformer into the fault will be very large. The higher the rating of the
transformer, the larger the fault current or short circuit current.

Note: The fault/short circuit current for:

• a 1000kVA transformer is 21 000 amps

• two 500kVA transformers run in parallel exceeds 31 000 amps

on the 415V side.

This highlights the need to keep interconnected transformers to a minimum.

Distribution Transformer Tap Setting

The tap changer is a no-load tap changer, requiring the de-energisation of the
transformer before the tap is changed. See Table 3-2 for tap settings. The tap
selector handle is required to be locked or otherwise secured after a required tap
is selected.

Pole Mounted.

To change taps on a pole mounted transformer, the transformer must be isolated,

earthed and an Electrical Access Permit (EAP) issued. If a safe approach distance
(SAD) to overhead supply conductors cannot still be maintained whilst a tap change
is undertaken, then the isolation boundary must be increased to include the
overhead conductors in question.

Ground Mounted.

To change taps on a ground mounted transformer, the transformer must be de-

energised following an approved switching program with all relevant isolation
points locked / barriers fitted and tagged with a Do Not Operate Tag. An EAP is
not necessary as tapping is considered an operating activity under such a
condition.

Ratings

The switching operator must understand the transformer capacities used in the
switching program. Check the ratings and loads that are required when planning
interconnection for feeding up of the load.

For example, a 200kVA transformer (22kV/415V) draws 5.2 amps/phase on the HV

side and 278 amps/phase on the LV side at full load.

3-6
 Section Three – LV Distribution System

Transformers operate within a range that is influenced by temperature and the type
of load being supplied. Both a cyclic rating and a nameplate rating are allocated to
each transformer.

Cyclic rating is higher than nameplate rating because the transformer takes
approximately 4 hours to heat to maximum temperature. The transformer may be
run higher than its nameplate rating for the 2 to 4 hour period of daily peaks.
During this time, the oil will not rise to a temperature where insulation breakdown
could occur, or the flashpoint of the oil is reached. Figure 3-6 shows there are two
peak loads for each 24-hour period.
Transformer load

Cyclic
rating
(130%)

Name-
plate
rating
(100%)

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
Time (hours)

Figure 3-6 Typical peak loads for 24-hour period

Note: These peak load times may vary depending on weather conditions and
location.

3.2.2 Aerial Conductors

Aerial conductors making up overhead distribution vary in size and type (copper,
aluminium, aluminium alloy).

Horizon Power typically uses the following conductors for open aerial mains:

• 7/2.50 AAAC (street lighting, three-phase HV radial, running earths)

• 7/4.75 AAAC (HV and LV in rural towns, rural three-phase HV rings)

• 19/3.25 AAAC (LV mains from ground mount substations, heavy HV

feeders).

3-7
Switching Operator's Manual One

There is also a legacy of other conductors size and types in use.

For details of overhead bare LV conductors see the Distribution Design Rules.

Aerial bundled cable (ABC) has been introduced to replace bare conductors on
the LV distribution network. There are only two sizes:

• 95 mm²

• 150 mm² (used predominantly).

For details of ABC conductors and accessories, see the Distribution Design Rules.

Each type of conductor has a summer and winter rating. The switching operator
must know these capacities to note the rating for the switching process. The rating
changes because of a higher average temperature during summer. This reduces
the current carrying capacity of the conductors.

More than one type and size of conductor is commonly fed from one transformer.
When interconnecting two or more transformers, there may be even more sizes
and types involved.

Configuration

Bare LV overhead distribution is connected in a mesh configuration where

possible (see Figure 3-7). This reduces volt drop problems in the circuit.

Normally open disconnectors Transformer

Figure 3-7 LV overhead distribution connected in mesh

Volt drop depends on the conductor size, the load current and the length of
conductor. Connecting the circuit in mesh has historically been the most efficient
way of ensuring maximum voltage at every point of the supply.

3-8
 Section Three – LV Distribution System

Note: LV aerial bundled cable circuits are not connected in mesh, but as radial
feeds.

3.2.3 LV Disconnectors and Fuses

Types of LV disconnectors and fuses used by Horizon Power are:

• underslung pole mounted disconnectors

• pole mounted Krone units, and

• distribution board mounted disconnectors or fuses.

Underslung Pole Mounted Disconnectors

These disconnectors are rated at either 400 or 600 amps operating current (see
Figure 3-8).

They may be used to make or break this load. Commonly, these disconnectors:

• isolate a distribution transformer

• allow an open point between two distribution transformers. (Open points

enable interconnection of distribution transformers during switching or
whenever required.)

Figure 3-8 LV underslung pole mounted disconnector

3-9
Switching Operator's Manual One

LV disconnectors are mounted under the crossarm and may be operated from
below. An insulated HV operating stick is used to pull the blade out, making the
operation reasonably fast and uncomplicated.

Figure 3-9 Pfisterer (l) and Krone (r) ganged fuse units

Three-phase switched disconnectors (or fuses) are used as transformer isolation

points or LV interconnection points. Krone units are currently used, however there
is a legacy of Pfisterer units being still in service.

Although rated to carry a 400 or 600 amps continuous load, the

! switching operator should avoid operating them at full load

current because of arcing and contact damage.

Distribution Board Disconnectors

Distribution board disconnectors may be used in universal pillars, LV kiosks, and

padmount and compound distribution substations. Distribution board
disconnectors are normally interchangeable with fuses (see Figure 3-10).

3-10
 Section Three – LV Distribution System

Solid disconnector
Moulded case carrier

Figure 3-10 Distribution board disconnector

A moulded case carrier may be used as a disconnector or fuse disconnector. The

solid disconnector above requires a special link screwdriver to fit and remove the
disconnector.

Distribution Board Fuses

The HRC (high rupturing capacity) fuses are used to protect LV cable circuits. The
fuses fit into a range of carriers including mounted case carriers (see Figure 3-10)
and ABB SLBM carriers (see Figure 3-16). Table 3-3 lists the advantages of HRC
fuses.

Advantages of HRC fuses

Operation of fuse does not emit flame

Consistent performance

Does not deteriorate

Operates silently
Has a tamper-proof fuse element

Cuts off power before current

reaches maximum fault level
Does not deteriorate

Table 3-3 Advantages of HRC fuses

The HRC fuses (see Figure 3-11) used in Horizon Power's LV distribution system
include meter board, pole and LV distribution board fuses.

3-11
Switching Operator's Manual One

The HRC fuses shown below are two of the types of fuses used by Horizon
Power. All fuses have one or more parallel silver fuse elements, each with multiple
narrow sections. When fault current exists, the fuse element narrow sections will
melt and arc simultaneously, ensuring the arc is rapidly extinguished. High current
rating fuses use multiple silver elements in parallel.

Sealed Granular Sealed

end caps quartz end caps

Fuse element Porcelain Fuse element

(silver) casing (crimped silver)

Figure 3-11 Two types of HRC fuse

Function

HRC fuses are more effective than rewirable fuses because they limit fault current
or overcurrent to less than a dangerous level.

Figure 3-12 shows the point at which the HRC fuse interrupts power during the
first quarter of the phase cycle.

Current
B
Prospective fault current
A
HRC fuse
actual Rewireable fuses and air circuit breakers
current extinguish arc at or beyond this point

Time

Figure 3-12 Current limiting HRC fuse

3-12
 Section Three – LV Distribution System

In Figure 3-12, point B is the peak fault current. This may be thousands of amps
causing excessive damage to equipment. Point A shows the point where the HRC
fuse has blown. In this case, the fault current is interrupted in less than 5
milliseconds (ms), that is, 0.005 seconds.

Note: The HRC fuse is designed to give a specific characteristic under fault
conditions. If the fuse is tampered with, it will not operate correctly.

Rating

The amperage rating is marked on the end cap of HRC fuses and is easily seen
when replacing the cartridge.

! Make sure that the replacement fuse is appropriately rated.

Horizon Power fuses in the LV supply range in size from 32 to 400 amps. (See
Figure 3-13).

Figure 3-13 shows how the fuses are used to protect the underground LV
distribution system. A fuse is also installed on the consumer switchboard.

80A / 60A / 30A

Padmount / Compound Board fuse

Figure 3-13 HRC fuse system (underground system)

Transformer LV Distribution Board Unit

There are various types of board mounted disconnectors and fuses. The
disconnectors are used for isolation or interconnection and fuses are used for
isolation.

3-13
Switching Operator's Manual One

! Opening and closing at full load should be avoided if possible.

Board mounted disconnectors and fuses are either mounted on a three-phase

carrier (see Figure 3-14) or individually mounted on a rack (see Figure 3-15). Both
types are manually operated. This makes the operation potentially hazardous
because:

• the close proximity of a switching operator to the disconnector may result in

injury if a fault occurs on the distribution board, and

• installation and removal are sometimes difficult, causing arcing and

chattering.

When installing board mounted disconnectors, the bottom connection should be

made first. The top connection should then be made using a rocking action.

Figure 3-14 Distribution board mounted disconnectors (extractable)

3-14
 Section Three – LV Distribution System

LV circuit
LV distribution breaker
board

Figure 3-15 Distribution board mounted disconnectors (hinged)

Figure 3-16 ABB SLBM 400 fuse and BSL 1600 disconnector

Distribution board disconnectors of the type shown in Figure 3-16 consist of a

removable cover with three-phase fuses/disconnectors mounted inside the cover.

To operate the disconnector, the switching operator grasps the handle at the top
and pulls briskly outward to open. To close, the operator engages the bottom
pivots, then moves the cover toward the closed position, and while holding a safe
distance away, checks alignment and then briskly closes by pushing forward.

3-15
Switching Operator's Manual One

When used as an isolation point, the fuses/disconnectors inside the cover must be
removed and the cover replaced and Danger–Do Not Operate (D–DNO) tagged. An
alternative is to fit a D–DNO tagged replacement cover with the fuses/disconnectors
removed.

Where large capacity transformers are installed, a circuit breaker (see Figure 3-15)
or moulded air break switches can be installed between the transformer and the LV
board. This replaces the transformer disconnectors which are used on smaller
capacity transformers.

PENDA – Public Electricity Network Distribution Assemblies.

A new type of low voltage distribution board is available to Horizon Power as a result
of ABB switch gear becoming obsolete as from 2020.

The new gear using the Weber South Pacific type is frame mounted LV distribution
switchgear. Standard components, such as fuse switch strips, isolators, circuit
breakers and load break switches, are assembled together to make switchgear
configurations.

Vertical fuse switches and isolators are a core product of Weber South Pacific
switchgear design. They are ideally suited to power distribution in electricity
networks because of the efficient shape of the switch and busbar mounting.

Figure 3-17: Single Switch-Fuse / Isolator

3-16
 Section Three – LV Distribution System

Figure 3-18: Double Switch-Fuse / Isolator

Figure 3-19: Testing busbar and cable side.

Applications

• Indoor installation (fire rated substation room) – PENDA I

• Outdoor installation (non-fire rated substation) – PENDA O

3-17
Switching Operator's Manual One

Figure 3-20: Type 1.1 Kiosk rated at 630A/415V

Figure 3-21: Type 2 Kiosk rated at 1400A/415V

Figure 3-22: Type 3.1 Kiosk rated at 2800A/415V

3-18
 Section Three – LV Distribution System

Improved features of PENDA switchgear compared to the ABB type used

previously, include but not limited to:

• Improved Operator and Public Safety

• ARC Fault protection
• Larger busbars
• Improved ventilation and as a result higher current rating than old
switchgear
• Operation earthing / shorting point
• Larger doors for easier access to cable terminations
• Fuse and circuit test points
• Visible and lockable open points

3.2.4 Underground Cables

There are several types and sizes of cables that are used in the underground
system. Initially, lead or lead alloy sheathed underground cables were used. Now,
all new underground cable is XLPE (cross-linked polyethylene) insulated.

Copper of various sizes in stranded formation and aluminium in stranded or solid-

form are used. All underground cables in the Horizon Power network include
either a nylon termite protection layer or Termitex® termite repellent impregnated
into outer LDPE (low density) or HDPE (high density) sheaths.

A typical example of an XLPE cable is shown in Figure 3-17 below. The

application of underground cables is shown in Table 3-4.

Termite
protection layer

Butyl mastic
moisture barrier
XLPE insulation
phase colouring

Outer sheath

Copper concentric neutral

(Wavecon)
Binding tape
Conductor
(solid sector aluminium)

Figure 3-23 Three core LV XLPE Cable (Wavecon)

3-19
Switching Operator's Manual One

Use Size Phase Type

Street lights 16 mm² single copper

Customer service 25 mm² three copper

LV distribution 240 mm² three aluminium

LV substation 630 mm² single aluminium

Table 3-4 Commonly-used LV underground cables

Details and sizes of all Horizon Power underground cables can be found in the
Horizon Power Distribution Design Rules.

Apart from the physical location, underground cables differ from the overhead
system because:

• larger conductor sizes are used

• underground cables are not connected in mesh.

Larger cables are used for a number of reasons:

• feeding larger more concentrated loads

• they ensure efficient feeding up of other areas

• they maintain a standard sizing to rationalise sizes

• cables are more difficult to upgrade, in comparison with overhead

conductors

• there is less heat dissipation.

Underground LV circuits are connected radially with interconnection points within

the network to afford transfer of loads to alternative sources (see Figure 3-18).

3-20
 Section Three – LV Distribution System

3 x 3-phase
circuits
Disconnector
solid link

Transformer
Outgoing
circuit
fuses

Normally open

Figure 3-24 LV underground radial connections

3.2.5 Pillars

There are three common types of pillar:

• mini

• universal

• feeder (mounted on a wall or footpath), flushmount pit, 100A or 200 A wall

box .

Mini Pillars

These are usually located inside a customer's property. The pillar becomes the
connection point for the property's consumer main. It may also service the
property next door. They also supply street light circuits and unmetered supply
pillars and pits.

Figure 3-19 shows a mini pillar. Customer service connections are unfused, while
street light and unmetered supplies are fused in the pillar.

Isolation of street light circuits and unmetered supplies requires load-side tail to be
removed from the fuse holder. This practice is required because the holder can
become conductive because of water condensation in the pillar.

3-21
Switching Operator's Manual One

Mini pillar

Housing properties

Mini Mini
pillar pillar

LV U/G circuit

Figure 3-25 Mini pillar

Universal Pillars

These are used in the LV circuit as open points and/or switching points, and to
supply customers with larger load requirements of up to 315A, e.g. commercial or
industrial lots.

Figure 3-20 shows that the universal pillar normally has no fuses, only removable
disconnectors. These disconnectors can be removed or installed, as required for
interconnection, load distribution or isolation

Sometimes, universal pillars are used for connection points for only one large
customer. As fuses may be installed, fuse grading must be observed.

The maximum load at which a universal pillar can run is 400 amps. The load
depends on the cable sizes being used.

Universal pillar

Housing properties
Universal
Mini pillar Mini
pillar pillar

LV U/G circuit

Figure 3-26 Universal pillar

3-22
 Section Three – LV Distribution System

For large demand LV customers a universal pillar with fuses is used to connect
the customer rather than a mini-pillar.

Figure 3-21 shows the rear view of the universal pillar, the customer service
connection blocks and a HRC fuse for a street light or unmetered supply.

Customer
connections
(R-W-B)

Figure 3-27 Universal pillar rear view

Feeder Pillars (LV Distribution Board)

Feeder pillars are used in high-density underground areas and are generally
located on the cable alignment or in a distribution substation compound. They
allow isolation of underground cables, interconnection and load distribution.

Their mounted disconnectors are similar to distribution board connection units

(see Figure 3-22). However, the circuit from the pillar servicing the customer may
be fused and there is no transformer directly connected to the busbar.

Feeder pillars (or LV kiosks) provide Horizon Power with a convenient place to
marshal its underground LV circuits and provide switching flexibility. They can also
be used to provide a customer's point of supply.

The only operation on feeder pillars is the removal and installation of

disconnectors or fuses for switching (interconnection, isolation and load
distribution).

3-23
Switching Operator's Manual One

Figure 3-28 Feeder pillar

3.3 Design
LV distribution consists of two systems; underground and overhead. Each system
is different in design but both serve the same purpose.

Frequently the overhead and underground systems complement each other by

being used together in an area. This usually occurs when an underground system
is replacing an older overhead system or where a new underground distribution
system (UDS) is connected to the existing overhead system.

Both the underground and overhead systems are described in the following
sections.

3.3.1 Underground

The underground system consists of high voltage feeders which supply ground
mount transformers required to step the voltage down to LV (415V). The
transformer LV then supplies the underground LV cable circuits running down
each street to connect the houses via their service connections. Each transformer
will have multiple separately-fused LV circuits.

An example of an underground LV distribution system is shown below in Figure

3-23.

3-24
 Section Three – LV Distribution System

1
2

5 9
8
6 4

1 Coolajacka Transformer 1
2 Coolajacka Transformer 1 LV circuits (orange)
3 Coolajacka Transformer 2
4 Coolajacka Transformer 2 LV circuits (green)
5 Coorbeeli Transformer
6 Coorbeeli Transformer LV circuits (red)
7 LV Normally open point (NOP) between Coolajacka Transformer 1 and Coorbeeli Transformer circuits
8 LV Normally open point (NOP) between Coolajacka Transformer 2 and Coorbeeli Transformer circuits
9 LV Normally open point (NOP) between Coolajacka Transformer 2 and Coorbeeli Transformer circuits

Figure 3-29 Underground LV distribution system

LV underground circuits are not run in mesh configuration, as is sometimes used

in the overhead system. The normally open points (NOPs) are installed between
different LV circuits to allow flexibility for interconnection, which can be used to
maintain supply during transformer outages. These NOPs can be established on
the universal pillars or LV boards.

3-25
Switching Operator's Manual One

Low voltage circuits are not normally run in parallel, however there are occasions
when interconnection may be required. If these circuits are left permanently
interconnected, the problems that may occur are:

• one fault on either circuit may blow both fuses and totally cut power

• a minor fault on the cable may result in neither set of fuses blowing but
cause overload on each circuit.

Fuse protection of cables is most important. If a cable is overloaded, it is much

harder to repair than in an overhead system. Therefore, cables are fused at their
source to prevent damage.

Different size ratings can be used according to the size of the cable required:

• 400 amp fuses are normally used for 240 mm² XLPE cables

• 315 amp fuses are normally used for 185 mm² XLPE cables.

Note: Because of the grading problems between 400 amp LV HRC fuses and
some HV HRC fuses, sometimes it is necessary to reduce the rating of the LV
fuse, usually to 315 amp.

To prevent grading problems, no additional fuses are usually installed along the
cable feed. Instead, disconnector links are used for all additional connection or
interconnection. This is an advantage if a customer loses supply, because there is
only one location to be checked for blown LV fuses. However, this also means all
customers connected to the cable will lose supply and depending on the fault
current the fuses at the source may not blow.

The main advantages of underground systems are:

• reduced volt drop problems

• no street poles or wiring, which is aesthetically pleasing

• fewer outages due to plant failure, and

• less maintenance, because the apparatus is not exposed to weather.

3.3.2 Overhead

The overhead system consists of high voltage feeders which supply transformers
required to step the voltage down to LV (415V). The transformer LV then supplies

3-26
 Section Three – LV Distribution System

the overhead LV circuits (LV mains) running down each street to connect the
houses via their service connections.

An example of an overhead LV distribution system is shown in Figure 3-24 below.

The NOPs between LV different circuits are installed to allow flexibility for
interconnection, which can be used to maintain supply during transformer
outages.

Common variations on the LV system include:

• large ground mounted transformers feeding overhead LV circuits. These

transformers have LV fused circuits protecting the cable and overhead LV
circuit

• mesh LV mains are sometimes connected in mesh to reduce voltage drop.

The overhead system has the advantage of being visible for inspection and
quickly accessible for maintenance and repair.

3-27
Switching Operator's Manual One

1
3

8 5

2
6

7
NELSON

1 HV feeder 1 (light green)

2 HV Feeder 2 (turquoise)
3 Normally open point (NOP) between Feeder 1 and Feeder 2
4 Nelson Transformer
5 Nelson Transformer LV circuit (magenta)
6 Richards Transformer
7 Richards Transformer LV circuit (dark green)
8 LV Normally open point (NOP) between Nelson and Richards transformers
9 LV Normally open point (NOP) between Nelson and Richards transformers

Figure 3-30 Overhead LV distribution system

3.4 Switching Procedures

An approved LV switching program is required to undertake LV switching.

The main switching functions in the LV distribution system are:

• interconnection
• isolation
• fault location.

3-28
 Section Three – LV Distribution System

It is recommended practice when switching on the LV

! distribution system for a competent safety observer to be in

attendance.

3.4.1 Interconnection

When a transformer is taken out of service for replacement or maintenance, the

LV area (normally fed by that transformer) may be fed from another source.

When connecting extra transformers to feed up an area, the switching operator

should remember the following.

Before Interconnection

1. Check the load on both the transformer to be taken out and the transformers
being used to feed up. (This helps the operator to decide whether there is
enough capacity available to feed up from the other sources.)

Note: When two transformers are interconnected, they tend to share the load
between them. If transformers of different sizes are interconnected for a long time,
the load should be checked at each transformer. This will show if either
transformer is overloaded.

2. Check for small conductor size and long route length. These may cause volt
drop or overload problems. Where possible, use the largest conductors
available and the shortest possible route length.

3. Plan to interconnect the minimum number of transformers. The more

transformers the switching operator interconnects, the greater will be the fault
current if there is a fault in the interconnected area. Each connected
transformer will share the fault current. The drop-out fuses protecting these
transformers may not blow, as they may not 'see' the full overload current.
This creates a potential hazard to personnel and may damage plant in the
fault area.

4. The switching operator should check to see if they are parallelling two
substation feeders together via the LV circuits. (If one of the feeders trips off
completely, the other feeder will try to pick up all that feeder's load through the
interconnected LV system. This will cause major damage to transformers and
conductors.)
If a feeder is tripped momentarily and restored by auto reclose, the
transformers feeding up the interconnected area may blow a drop-out fuse.
Interconnecting two feeders through the LV network should be avoided, it is
often possible to reconfigure the HV feeders by switching to place all

3-29
Switching Operator's Manual One

interconnected transformers are all on one feeder. If this is not possible, LV

interconnection can be made using LV fused jumpers or fuses.

5. The switching operator should check circuit labels before operating

underground interconnected apparatus. Additional checks should be made
before installation, including general cleanliness of the units, corrosion or
condensation on the links or fuses (causing bad contacts), and continuity of
fuses.

After Interconnection

6. The switching operator should check whether they are within the statutory
voltage limits at all points of supply. Do not forget to check the voltage at the
furthest point from the transformer! (See Table 3-1).

Restoration

7. Check all closed normally open point disconnectors have been opened. If
transformers are left interconnected, load sharing will continue. When a fault
occurs, both transformers will share the fault current.

3.4.2 Isolation

When isolating any equipment on the LV distribution system, the isolation points
must be prevented from inadvertent closure which can result in re-energisation.
This is achieved by using a form of physical barrier or where locking facilities are
available they are to be used. A Danger–Do Not Operate tag is also to be fitted.

All isolation points must be off, D–DNO tagged and barriered.

All lockable apparatus that can be locked must be locked and
D–DNO tagged.
! Where necessary, a section of conductor can be removed to
create an isolation point and D–DNO tagged.

Actions for consideration when performing isolations include the following points.

• It may be possible to feed up parts of the LV system not directly involved in

the isolated area. This will depend on the duration of isolation. (For example,
disconnect the PG (parallel groove) clamps at appropriate poles either side
of the isolation. This is better than isolating the whole LV circuit from the
transformer.)

3-30
 Section Three – LV Distribution System

• For overhead LV disconnectors (see Figure 3-8), extra security must be

provided to prevent them from being accidentally closed. The operator must
use barriers whenever possible. Figure 3-25 shows the typical types of
barriers which can be used to prevent inadvertent re-energisation.

• Where barriers cannot be installed, the disconnector connection tap is to be

disconnected.

• For underground cables, use a voltmeter to prove the cable is isolated. The
operator should D-DNO tag isolation points. Where it is suspected that there
may be an HV cable in the same area, signal injection may be required to
prove LV cable identification.

• As a general rule, isolation should begin at the LV level.

• ABC fuse box inserts when used as an isolation point must be removed with
a Danger–Do Not Operate tag attached.

• Where work is performed on isolated and shorted LV apparatus an Electrical

Access Permit must be issued for the work.

Figure 3-31 Examples of barriers for disconnectors

3.4.3 Fault Location

Due to different construction and components the detection of LV faults differs

between overhead and underground systems.

Overhead

Overhead circuits are reasonably short in length and faults are usually easy to
find. Most faults can be found by patrolling the circuit.

3-31
Switching Operator's Manual One

SECTION FOUR

HV Distribution – Overhead
Table of Contents
4. HV Distribution – Overhead .................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Introduction......................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Components ....................................................................................... 4-3
4.2.1 Conductors .................................................................................... 4-3
4.2.2 Fuses ............................................................................................ 4-3
4.2.3 Pole Top Switch Disconnectors (PTS) ........................................... 4-7
4.2.4 Disconnectors (Isolators) ............................................................... 4-9
4.2.5 Surge Diverters and Arresters ..................................................... 4-12
4.2.6 Reclosers .................................................................................... 4-13
4.2.7 Single-phase Sectionalisers ........................................................ 4-19
4.2.8 Fusesaver ................................................................................... 4-21
4.2.9 Load break switches .................................................................... 4-25
4.2.10 Line Voltage Regulating Transformers ........................................ 4-26
4.2.11 Fault Indicators ............................................................................ 4-30
4.2.12 Transformers ............................................................................... 4-31
4.2.13 Reactors ...................................................................................... 4-31
4.3 Interconnection of Feeders ............................................................... 4-31
4.4 Common Distribution Faults ............................................................. 4-37
4.4.1 Vehicles Hitting Poles .................................................................. 4-37
4.4.2 Trees Touching or Falling on Mains ............................................. 4-37
4.4.3 Pollution Failures ......................................................................... 4-38
4.4.4 Pole Top Fires ............................................................................. 4-38
4.4.5 Animals ....................................................................................... 4-38
4.4.6 Transient Faults........................................................................... 4-38
4.4.7 Single-phasing Faults (Loss of one HV phase) ............................ 4-39
4.4.8 Feeder Faults – Drop Out Fuses Failing to Clear......................... 4-40
4.5 Fault Finding Process ....................................................................... 4-40
4.5.1 Single-phase Spur Faults ............................................................ 4-40
4.5.2 Three-phase Feeder Faults ......................................................... 4-42
4.5.3 Distribution Transformer Faults ................................................... 4-44

i
List of Figures
Figure 4-1 HV overhead distribution system ...................................................... 4-1
Figure 4-2 Typical microgrid network ................................................................. 4-2
Figure 4-3 Single shot drop-out expulsion fuse .................................................. 4-4
Figure 4-4 Sparkless fuse element..................................................................... 4-6
Figure 4-5 Typical wear rod – expulsion drop-out fuse ....................................... 4-7
Figure 4-6 Pole top switch ................................................................................. 4-9
Figure 4-7 Single HV disconnector (isolator) .................................................... 4-10
Figure 4-8 Opening disconnectors under load.................................................. 4-12
Figure 4-9 Surge diverter ................................................................................. 4-13
Figure 4-10 Nu-lec N-series recloser installation in the field ............................. 4-15
Figure 4-11 Nu-Lec operator control panel....................................................... 4-16
Figure 4-12 Kyle E hydraulic single-phase recloser (top left)............................ 4-17
Figure 4-13 Nu-Lec W-type single-phase recloser ........................................... 4-18
Figure 4-14 Sectionaliser operations on detection of a fault ............................. 4-20
Figure 4-15 Haycolec sectionaliser .................................................................. 4-21
Figure 4-16 Typical Fusesaver™ installation ................................................... 4-21
Figure 4-17 Installation of RTU & Fusesaver ................................................... 4-22
Figure 4-18 Remote Control Unit ..................................................................... 4-23
Figure 4-19 Remote Control Unit ..................................................................... 4-24
Figure 4-20 Remote Control Unit Display ......................................................... 4-25
Figure 4-21 RL series load break switch/sectionaliser...................................... 4-26
Figure 4-22 Load break switch/sectionaliser in the field ................................... 4-26
Figure 4-23 Horizon Power’s VR-32 voltage regulator ..................................... 4-27
Figure 4-24 Windings ....................................................................................... 4-27
Figure 4-25 Circuits of line voltage regulator .................................................... 4-28
Figure 4-26 Tap position indicator .................................................................... 4-28
Figure 4-27 Typical Horizon Power fault indicator ............................................ 4-30
Figure 4-28 Fault indicator operation ............................................................... 4-30
Figure 4-29 Types of feeder interconnection .................................................... 4-32
Figure 4-30 Circulating current......................................................................... 4-34
 Section Four – HV Distribution – Overhead

List of Tables
Table 4-1 HV and LV fuse ratings ...................................................................... 4-5
Table 4-2 Types of reclosers used on Horizon Power networks ....................... 4-14
Table 4-3 Interconnection switching table ........................................................ 4-35

iii
Switching Operator's Manual One

Page left blank intentionally

iv
 4. HV Distribution – Overhead
4.1 Introduction
This section examines components of the overhead HV distribution system, its
design principles and switching procedures. It is designed to give the switching
operator a working knowledge of HV overhead supply in the Horizon Power
distribution system.

This section is written to reflect current standards and may not include many of the
legacy installations and apparatus.

The HV overhead distribution system is designed to allow:

• feeding of distribution transformers

• load transfer
• interconnection
• back up in fault situations.

The overhead high voltage distribution system extends from the zone or microgrid
substation to the distribution transformers (see Figure 4-1).

Overhead HV circuits are connected radially, most having open points which permit
the interconnection of other feeders (see Figure 4-2). However, some feeders
cannot be interconnected with any other feeders. This causes a problem when
isolating sections of these feeders. If interconnection is not available, the power to
the isolated sections is interrupted for the duration of the isolation.

Pole top
switch
3-phase
transformer

Main feeder

1-phase
spur line

From Line fuse

substation
Earth wire

1-phase
transformer From
substation

Figure 4-1 HV overhead distribution system

4-1
Switching Operator's Manual One

Substation

F1 F2 F3

Legend
OH to UG cable head
Circuit breaker closed

Recloser
Pole top switch
or RMU switch disconnector closed

PTS or RMU SWDC NOP Distribution transformer

interconnectable

RMU fuse switch closed

Distribution transformer
Drop out fuse closed non-interconnectable

Figure 4-2 Typical microgrid network

showing both overhead and underground HV feeders

4-2
 Section Four – HV Distribution – Overhead

4.2 Components
The main components of this system are conductors, fuses, pole top switches,
disconnectors, surge diverters, reclosers, regulators, sectionalisors, fault indicators,
transformers, distribution line reactors and capacitors.

4.2.1 Conductors

Typical conductor types used are :

• AAAC - All Aluminium Alloy Conductor – sizes include 7/2.50 and 7/4.75

• SC/AC - Steel Conductor Aluminium Clad – size = 3/2.75

Only AAC, AAAC, SC/GZ (for repairs only) and SC/AC are now purchased as
standard bare overhead conductors. ACSR/AZ is also used for special applications.
However, the following conductor types may also be found in Horizon Power
networks:

• ACSR - Aluminium Conductor Steel Reinforced

• AAC - All Aluminium Conductor

• HDBC - Hard Drawn Bare Copper Conductor

• FE/GZ - Galvanised Steel

• Hendrix-configured conductors.

The switching operator should be aware of conductor's current rating, particularly

when interconnecting to transfer load.

Further details of conductors may be found in the Distribution Design Rules.

4.2.2 Fuses

Horizon Power uses expulsion drop-out fuses (DOF) in overhead HV distribution.

Drop-out Expulsion Fuse

This fuse is designed to operate when current flow exceeds the fuse element
rating. Although the expulsion fuse is mainly a protective device, it may be used as
an isolation point, by removing the barrels from their frames and tying the barrels to
the pole with a Danger–Do Not Operate (D–DNO) tag.

4-3
Switching Operator's Manual One

There are two types of drop-out fuses used:

• single vent – this is the most-commonly used type. Single vent DOFs do not
permit venting through the top.

• double vent – has a vent cap fitted allowing venting through the top should
the barrel be blocked (for example, a mud wasp nest), or the fault current be
too high.

Many brands of fuses are available but the design is basically the same.

The single shot drop-out fuse is most common (see Figure 4-3). It is used in the
three-phase system to protect distribution transformers (one fuse per phase). It is
also used in rural areas to protect the single-phase spurs which feed many
transformers.

Contact Terminal
assembly

Mounting
Operating
bracket
ring

Fuse barrel Insulator

Fuse barrel
in open position

Terminal
Safety hinge

Figure 4-3 Single shot drop-out expulsion fuse

Table 4-1 shows the normal ratings of HV drop-out fuses.

4-4
 Section Four – HV Distribution – Overhead

Fuses
Phase
kVA 11kV 22kV 33kV LV

Single 5 - 2.0 2.0 30A HRC

10 - 3.15 3.15 60A HRC

20/25 - 3.15 3.15 100A HRC

25 3.15 3.15 3.15 80A HRC

Three
50/63 5.0 3.15 3.15 100A HRC
100 10.0 5.0 5.0

200 16.0 10.0 8.0

160 25.0 10.0 8.0

300/315 25.0 16.0 10.0 No

LV
500 40.0 25.0 16.0 Fusing
630 63.0 31.5 25.0

750 63.0 31.5 25.0

1000 90.0 40.0 31.5

Table 4-1 HV and LV fuse ratings

There are different types and sizes of fuse element.

The correct fuse element must be used to replace the fuse that
has been blown. This ensures appropriate grading is
! maintained. In emergencies, this may not be possible.

Where an incorrect size is used, the correct size must be fitted

as soon as possible.

When replacing a fuse, the barrel must not be slammed with excessive force but
closed firmly and sharply. Care must be taken to check that the barrel has made
good contact and is seated correctly.

Insulated HV operating sticks are used to replace a fuse barrel into the mechanism.
The operator must wear appropriate PPE when operating these devices.

Horizon Power uses sparkless fuse elements to reduce the risk of ground fires. The
construction of a sparkless fuse is shown in Figure 4-4. The nylon tubing contains a
fuse element of lower melting point than the older types of fuse. A carbon-doped
Terylene cord is used to take the strain of the installed fuse.

4-5
Switching Operator's Manual One

Inner
Nylon tube Teflon heat
Tube crimp insulating tube

Tube crimp
Brass terminal
Tin fuse wire
Outer Nylon tube
Carbon doped
Brass terminal
Terylene cord

Figure 4-4 Sparkless fuse element

When the fuse element operates, arcing inside the barrel causes the internal barrel
lining (typically horne fibre) to produce a gas which vents through the bottom of the
barrel. This venting gas blows the arc outside the barrel where it extinguishes.

The fuse barrel then drops to release the top catch and then the barrel drops fully
away. This physically separates the circuit, preventing the arc from restriking and
providing visual indication the fuse element has blown.

Care must be taken when replacing a fuse element. The switching Operator must
check:

• the mechanism is operational

• the fuse element size is correct

• the vent cap is always fitted, and

• the fuse barrel is not obstructed.

The switching operator should use an expulsion fuse wear rod to check the internal
diameter of the fuse barrels, as they have a limited life span. The wear rod is used
to determine whether the barrel is serviceable. The smaller diameter end of the
wear rod must be able to pass freely through the centre of the barrel, indicating
there are no obstructions.

If there is insufficient clearance inside the barrel, the fuse element may not clear
and the barrel may not drop away, causing extensive damage to the fuse barrel.
A flashover may result, shorting out the adjacent phases and tripping the feeder.

4-6
 Section Four – HV Distribution – Overhead

The fuse wear rod larger diameter must not be able to enter the barrel, to ensure
there is an adequate amount of gas producing material lining (typically horne fibre)
the inside of the barrel. This gas producing material is required to extinguish the arc
inside the barrel.

The notch on the end of the wear rod is used to check the shrinkage of the gas
producing material inner tube. The shrinkage of the gas producing material should
not exceed this distance.

The fuse barrel must be replaced if any of these tests cannot be correctly
performed. A typical expulsion fuse wear rod is shown in Figure 4-5.

600 mm

500 mm

10 mm Ø 5 mm
13.5 mm Ø

Figure 4-5 Typical wear rod – expulsion drop-out fuse

This information is also provided in Field Instruction – Expulsion Drop Out Fuse
Barrel Inspection and Fuse Rating Requirements.

4.2.3 Pole Top Switch Disconnectors (PTS)

Pole top switch disconnectors are usually called pole top switches and are three-
phase air break switches used to provide:

• flexibility of supply

• open points for interconnection, and

• isolation points, when required.

Essentially, they are three single disconnectors ganged together to give

simultaneous operation driven from a ground level operating handle (see Figure
4-6).

Pole top switches used for 11kV and 22kV systems are rated to 22kV. 33kV
systems use a larger pole top switch than the 22kV switch because they require
higher levels of insulation. 33kV-36kV-rated pole top switches are sometimes used
on the 22kV system in areas of high pollution.

4-7
Switching Operator's Manual One

Pole top switches are normally rated at 400 amps continuous load current and a
limited load breaking rating of 200kVA.

When operating pole top switches, the operator should remember the following.

If there is any doubt relating to any of the following actions,

! do not proceed with the switching program.

1. Confirm the location of the pole top switch is correct against its asset label
and as identified on the switching program.

2. Before switching, check the pole top switch to see if it is in the expected
operational position.

(For example, if the switching program directs the switching operator to open
a pole top switch, before opening first check that the switch is closed. If the
switch is not closed, something is wrong with the program or the operator is
at the wrong switch.)

3. Before operating, check the mechanism for defects. Check earthing of the
switch handle and connections to the earthing mat. Also check that the flexi
tail is bent in the correct direction.

4. Install the portable equipotential earthing mat in readiness for switching

operation. Refer to Field Instruction – Use of portable equipotential mat for
switching.

5. Ensure the correct PPE for switching is being used. Refer to the Field
Instruction Manual for the PPE appropriate to the switching operation.

6. When operating the switch, the switching operator should stand with feet
together on the earth mat to avoid any effects of step potential.

7. When opening or closing, make sure that the operation of the switch handle
is smooth and complete. A brisk speed of the operation should be used and
the operation must not be interrupted.

8. After the operation, visually check again to make sure both the main switch
contacts and the arc suppression contacts have been properly made or
broken.

9. All pole top switches have locking facilities that must be used at all times
(unless the switch is actually being operated). If the pole top switch is being
used as an isolation point, D–DNO tags are locked onto the operating handle.

4-8
 Section Four – HV Distribution – Overhead

Arcing
suppression
PTS contact
Flexi tail PTS
Open Closed (On)
(Off)

Contact
in closed
position

Main contact

Pipe bracket
leading to
Operating
Handle

On Pivot
point
Operating
Off Handle

Earth mat Earth mat

OFF ON

Figure 4-6 Pole top switch

4.2.4 Disconnectors (Isolators)

The HV disconnector or isolator is basically a single-phase knife switch mounted on

suitable insulators. Its body is similar to the drop-out fuse, but it has a solid
conductive blade instead of a fuse barrel. Unlike the drop-out fuse, the blade is not
normally removable (see Figure 4-6).

HV disconnectors have a lower rating than a pole top switch, 100 amps being
typical. Normally, they are used to open or close on no load, or to open and close
on limited interconnection loads.

4-9
Switching Operator's Manual One

HV disconnectors are generally mounted on a crossarm and operated by an

insulated HV operating stick. An open disconnector provides a visual break in the
circuit for isolation. When a disconnector is used as an isolation point, the blade
must be fully opened and a Danger–Do Not Operate tag must be attached through
the eye of the blade.

Clip

Pull
down
here

Bolted
to
crossarm

Blade

Figure 4-7 Single HV disconnector (isolator)

Where single-phase DISOs are used to parallel or unparallel

feeders, the earth fault and sensitive earth fault protection must
! be disabled for the duration of the switching to prevent
possible out-of-balance feeder tripping.

4-10
 Section Four – HV Distribution – Overhead

The switching operator should pay attention to the following.

1. Confirm the location of the HV disconnector is correct against its asset label
and as identified on the switching program.

2. Before switching, check the HV disconnector to see if it is in the expected

operational position.

(For example, if the switching program directs the switching operator to open
HV disconnector, before opening first check that the disconnector is closed.
If the switch is not closed, something is wrong with the program or the
operator is at the wrong disconnector.)

3. Before operating, visually check the HV disconnector insulator and contacts

for defects

4. Ensure the correct PPE for switching is being used. Refer to the Field
Instruction Manual for the PPE appropriate to the switching operation.

5. Where HV disconnectors are used in a three-phase application additional

steps a) and b) must be performed:

a) When paralleling or unparalleling feeders with HV disconnectors, the earth

fault protection and SEF must be disabled to prevent the protection tripping
the feeders on out-of-balance current.

b) The sequence for opening disconnectors under load is shown as 1, 2 and

3 in Figure 4-8.

6. When opening or closing, make sure that the operation of the blade is smooth
and complete. A brisk speed of the operation should be used and the
operation must not be interrupted.

When closing, the blade must not be slammed shut with undue force. This
action must be firm.

7. After closing, the operator must check the blade is fully shut and correctly
aligned between the contact points.

8. After the operation, visually check again to make sure both the main blade
contacts and, where fitted, the arc suppression contacts have been properly
made or broken.

4-11
Switching Operator's Manual One

Crossarm

2 1 3

HV disconnectors

Pole

Figure 4-8 Opening disconnectors under load

Note: The operation should be carried out in the sequence 1–2–3 to give
maximum clearance to the second operation (as it produces the largest arc).

4.2.5 Surge Diverters and Arresters

Surge diverters protect transformers, cables, and conductors from harmful

overvoltages resulting from lightning strikes. Surge diverters are designed to
discharge lightning current to earth before any damage to equipment can occur. To
be effective surge diverters must be no more than 2.5m from the apparatus they
are protecting eg transformer.

Note: The internal failure of a surge diverter may result in a permanent phase to
earth fault.

4-12
 Section Four – HV Distribution – Overhead

Phase
connection
End fitting

Silicone housing

Metal oxide varistor

(MOV)

Fibre reinforced
plastic rods

Earth End fitting

connection

Figure 4-9 Surge diverter

4.2.6 Reclosers

The recloser is a pole mounted circuit breaker connected in-line (series) in a feeder
or spur. It is used to interrupt fault current, automatically restoring power after a
transient outage. Recloser protection is required to grade with distribution feeder
circuit breaker protection for correct protection operation.

In the event of a transient fault, reclosers:

• clear the fault and restore service with the minimum delay

• prevent a transient fault from causing long term outage.

In the event of a permanent fault, a recloser:

• opens and locks out after a set number of reclose operations

• restricts the outage to the smallest possible section of the system.

Reclosers are set to trip and restore power multiple times before locking out. The
time lapse between trips may also be changed to suit different circumstances.

Note: A recloser must never be used by itself as an isolation point, because

inadequate electrical clearance cannot be assured under all circumstances.

4-13
Switching Operator's Manual One

Types of reclosers

Reclosers are available in many different forms as shown in the table below:

Characteristics

Number of phases Three-phase Single-phase Single-phase

Contact insulating SF6 gas Oil SF6 gas

medium (modern type) (old type) (modern type)

Operation Electronic control Hydraulic Electronic control

(modern type) (old type) (modern type)

Table 4-2 Types of reclosers used on Horizon Power networks

Number of phases

Three-phase and single-phase reclosers are used to match the distribution system
where they are installed.

Contact insulating medium

Modern type three-phase reclosers have three vacuum interrupters housed in an

SF6-insulated tank, while modern single-phase reclosers have a single vacuum
interrupter mounted in an epoxy bushing.

Old type reclosers are oil-insulated, requiring routine maintenance because

operation under load and fault currents reduce the oil insulating properties.

Operation

Both electronic and hydraulic control reclosers are currently in use. Electronic
controls panels are used with the Nu-Lec reclosers, and the Kyle E recloser is a
lever-operated hydraulic recloser.

4-14
 Section Four – HV Distribution – Overhead

Three-phase recloser

The three-phase recloser used on HV lines is the Nu-Lec N-series. Figure 4-10
shows a typical Nu-Lec recloser and electronic control box installation.

Pole top switch

to bypass
the recloser

Disconnectors
to isolate
the recloser

Single-phase
Disconnectors
transformer
to isolate
drop out fuse
the recloser

Surge diverters
on both sides

Single-phase Nu-lec
transformers for N-series recloser
240V supply

ON – OFF
indicator

Recloser
control box

Bypass pole
top switch
operating handle

Figure 4-10 Nu-lec N-series recloser installation in the field

The features of the N-series recloser are:

• the Nu-Lec three-phase recloser has three vacuum interrupters housed in an

SF6 insulated tank.

• the electronic control panel is mounted in a box at the bottom of the structure
or pole. Figure 4-11 shows the operator controls and indication.

4-15
Switching Operator's Manual One

• a separate power supply is required for the control panel. This can be
provided by a nearby LV supply or where this is not available, a single-phase
HV fused transformer is mounted on the recloser pole (see Figure 4-10) or a
nearby pole.

• a bypass pole top switch and three disconnectors on each side of the
recloser are installed to enable continuity of supply and isolation of the
recloser for maintenance work. At some locations, such as Leonora, the
disconnectors have not been installed.

Figure 4-11 Nu-Lec operator control panel

Note: The switching operator is responsible for basic recloser switching

operations, not programming.

Single-phase Reclosers

These reclosers are used on single-phase HV spurs. The main types used by
Horizon Power are:

• Kyle E which is used in conjunction with a bypass fuse, and

• Nu-Lec W type

Figure 4-12 shows a Kyle E hydraulic single-phase recloser.

The features are:

• single-phase oil contact insulation

4-16
 Section Four – HV Distribution – Overhead

• hydraulic operating mechanism with operating lever and a ‘single shot’ non-
reclosing lever which are operated with an insulated HV operating stick. The
switching operator should recognise the operating positions of the recloser
levers shown in Figure 4-12 (on/off/single shot).

Cyclometer

Closed

Open

Non-reclosing

Open and close Non-reclosing

lever (red) lever

Figure 4-12 Kyle E hydraulic single-phase recloser (top left)

showing the ‘single shot’ non-reclosing lever in the non-reclosing position (top right),
which moves upwards to its normal operating position (arrowed).
Bottom shows the operating lever in its opened, closed,
and non-reclosing operating positions.

4-17
Switching Operator's Manual One

Manual
lever
Status
indicator

Figure 4-13 Nu-Lec W-type single-phase recloser

Shown in Figure 4-13 is a Nu-Lec W-type single-phase recloser. The features of

this W-type recloser are:

• single-phase vacuum interrupter

• electronic control panel operation

• manual lever – UP position allows for normal operation, and in the DOWN
position the recloser is tripped and both mechanically and electronically
locked open.

When isolating a recloser via disconnectors, the switching operator must:

1. set the recloser to manual or non-auto reclose

2. close the bypass

3. open the recloser

4. open disconnectors on each side of recloser.

The recloser connections should not be earthed until both sides are isolated.

4-18
 Section Four – HV Distribution – Overhead

Comparison of electronic control and hydraulic operating reclosers

The advantages of electronic reclosers over hydraulic reclosers include:

• improved flexibility of operation, thus solving many grading problems

• the ease of changing operating values, without de-energising the recloser

• remote operation is possible

• greater accuracy of operation

• maintaining the quality of operation at all times

• the ease of designing operating curves for specific application purposes

• temperature changes not affecting operating features, and

• the ease of routine testing.

The main disadvantages include:

• the need for a separate power supply for control, and

• the location of the control box, making them targets for vandalism.

4.2.7 Single-phase Sectionalisers

Single-phase sectionalisers are typically used on 19.1kV (33kV) rural single-phase

lines. The sectionaliser is used to disconnect a faulted section of line. It opens its
contacts automatically, only after the circuit is de-energised by a recloser. It is
always used in series with a fault-interrupting device (recloser), as it is not designed
to interrupt fault current.

Normally, sectionalisers have a bypass drop-out fuse mounted on the same pole.
When sectionalisers are removed for any reason, the fuse barrel may be installed
to protect the line and maintain supply for the period of removal.

To explain sectionaliser operations on the detection of a fault, consider Figure 4-14

below. Assume F1 is a permanent fault, the recloser R1 is set for three shots to
lock out, and sectionaliser S1 is set for two shots to open.

When a fault F1 occurs down the line from the sectionaliser S1 (in its normal zone
of protection), the fault current is sensed by both the recloser R1 and the
sectionaliser S1. The recloser R1 trips and de-energises the line. The sectionaliser
S1 count is one, due to the fault current.

4-19
Switching Operator's Manual One

Substation

S2

R1

S1

F1

Figure 4-14 Sectionaliser operations on detection of a fault

The recloser R1 recloses again and fault current is sensed by R1 and S1. R1 trips
again and S1 has now reached its count of 2; it opens, disconnecting the fault F1
whilst the recloser is open. The recloser R1 again recloses and the feeder is
restored with the exception of the faulted line section after S1.

In another scenario, the recloser R1 and sectionaliser S1 have the same settings
as above. However, this time F1 is a transient fault (the first reclose attempt is
successful).

On seeing the fault, recloser R1 and sectionaliser S1 sense the fault current.
Recloser R1 opens and the sectionaliser S1 count is one. The recloser R1
recloses, this time successfully as the fault has cleared. Sectionaliser S1 has not
reached its count and remains closed. The complete feeder is restored. Both the
recloser R1 and sectionaliser S1 fault counts are reset back to zero after a set time
delay.

Sectionalisers may be used in series. Where this occurs, the sectionaliser further
down the line will be set for fewer counts. (Normally, they are set for either two or
three shots.)

Sectionalisers have the advantages of:

• being more economical than reclosers

• allowing transient faults to clear before operating

• isolating only the faulted section of line

• aiding fault finding, and

• opening easily for de-energisation, in the same way as a drop-out fuse.

Before the line tap is removed, the load current must be broken with the
sectionaliser.

4-20
 Section Four – HV Distribution – Overhead

An Haycolec electronic sectionaliser link is shown in Figure 4-15. The sectionaliser

link fits in a standard drop out fuse holder. The link electronic measurement unit is
in the middle section.

This electronic unit counts the times fault current passes through the link and
activates the latch mechanism, allowing the link to open by swinging down on the
bottom hinge point when its set count is reached. The desired count is set with
switches on the link.

Operating
ring

Electronic
sectionaliser
link

Electronic
sectionaliser
link fitted to holder

Hinge point

Figure 4-15 Haycolec sectionaliser

When used as an isolation point, the sectionaliser link must be fully removed from
the holder and tied to the pole with a D–DNO tag.

4.2.8 Fusesaver

A Fusesaver™ is a high speed outdoor vacuum circuit breaker with integrated

protection which can operate within the first half cycle of fault current.

Fuse savers are used on single-phase spurs and connected in series with the
associated drop out fuse. Figure 4-16 shows a Fusesaver.

To
To line
drop out
fuse

Figure 4-16 Typical Fusesaver™ installation

4-21
Switching Operator's Manual One

When a fault occurs the Fusesaver vacuum interrupter opens, disconnecting the
line before the associated drop out fuse element can melt. The Fusesaver remains
open for a period of one to 30 seconds dependent on the setting, giving time for a
transient fault to clear. The Fusesaver vacuum interrupter then closes. Therefore,
for a transient fault the power is fully restored. However, for a permanent fault the
associated drop out fuse blows, resulting in a loss of power.

The Fusesaver has the capability to improve system reliability, because a transient
fault does not cause the drop out fuses to blow.

Remote Control and Monitoring of Fusesavers.

Fusesavers have the ability to be incorporated into a SCADA system via a Remote
Control Unit (RCU). The RCU works in partnership with a Fusesaver to increase
network automation by allowing the Utility Control Centre to be able to remotely
monitor and control Fusesavers.

Additionally, the RCU can be equipped with a local control panel to enable a local
Switching Operator control of the Fusesaver. Remote Control Units are outdoor
installed devices that are normally pole mounted close to a single or ganged set of
Fusesavers.

Figure 4-17 Installation of RTU & Fusesaver

4-22
 Section Four – HV Distribution – Overhead

Remote Control Unit (RCU).

Figure 4-18 Remote Control Unit

4-23
Switching Operator's Manual One

Electronic Housing of the RCU.

The electronic housing contains the micro-processor, battery, power terminals, data
connection points and the user interface for the RCU. The RCU has a simple user
interface for operations and maintenance purposes. The panel makes use of LED
indicators, which are not illuminated when the door to the panel is closed to save
power.

Figure 4-19 Remote Control Unit

LED Indicator Display of RCU.

4-24
 Section Four – HV Distribution – Overhead

Figure 4-20 Remote Control Unit Display

SCADA Operator Controls of Fusesaver.

The purpose of SCADA connecting through the RCU is to allow remote operation of
the devices it controls as well as to review event data.

Typically, the following functions are available via SCADA:

1). View RCU status and event information.

2). Issue trip and close commands to the Fusesaver via the RCU. The RCU must
have the Remote Control Switch set to “ON” for this to be possible.

3). Change protection settings in the Fusesaver via the RCU. The RCU must have
the Remote Control Switch set to ON for this to be possible.

4). Issue a command to the Fusesaver to force the protection to be armed

regardless of whether there is adequate line current to power the Fusesaver. The
protection will remain armed until a command to disable the forced arming is
received, or a time limit that is set by the Fusesaver policy file is reached.

4.2.9 Load break switches

An RL series load break switch/sectionaliser (LBS) is shown in Figure 4-17 below.

The load break switch contacts are sealed inside the tank which contains sulphur
hexafluoride (SF6) gas. Because sufficient SF6 gas pressure is required to achieve
the full load current make and break rating, the LBS will lock out, preventing further
operation on low gas pressure.

The LBS can be operated from the local electronic control panel attached to the
pole, or manually operated using an insulated HV operating stick in the operating
lever rings. The electronic control panel requires an external power supply and
when fitted with a communications system will provide remote operation.

The LBS provides a mechanical indicator for the switching operator to verify the
switch status. The LBS lockout lever is provided to mechanically lock the switch

4-25
Switching Operator's Manual One

contact mechanism in the open position. This is part of the requirement to use the
LBS as an isolation point. Further details are provided in Field Instruction – Nu-Lec
RL (SF6) load break switch as an isolation point.

Operating SF6
lever contact tank

LBS status Lockout

mechanical indicator lever

Figure 4-21 RL series load break switch/sectionaliser

Shown in Figure 4-18 is a typical LBS installation, showing the pole mounted LBS
fitted with surge diverters on each side, an external power supply transformer with
DOFs, and the in-line insulators in the main feeder.

Figure 4-22 Load break switch/sectionaliser in the field

4.2.10 Line Voltage Regulating Transformers

Line voltage regulating transformers (commonly called regulators) are used to

provide voltage regulation to maintain voltage levels within prescribed limits at a
particular point along a HV feeder. This is commonly required on long and/or
heavily loaded feeders. Horizon Power regulators are model VR-32 (see Figure
4-19).

4-26
 Section Four – HV Distribution – Overhead

MOV-type
series arrestor

Bushings

Tap position
indicator

Tap changer
motor capacitor
Control
Tap position
indicator

Figure 4-23 Horizon Power’s VR-32 voltage regulator

A conventional transformer has primary and secondary windings connected
magnetically, not electrically (see Figure 4-20a). The windings of the regulators are
autotransformers connected both electrically and magnetically. Figure 4-20b shows
that part of one winding is common to both the primary and secondary sides of the
transformer.

Iron core

Primary winding
Secondary winding

a. Connected magnetically

Winding

Auto transformer

b. Connected electrically

Figure 4-24 Windings

A number of connection methods are available for regulators on three-phase

systems. Figure 4-21 shows star connected three-phase line voltage regulator with
bypass disconnector and isolation disconnectors A and B.

4-27
Switching Operator's Manual One

Bypass disconnect

A B

Unregulated

Regulated
Line Load

Main
winding

Figure 4-25 Circuits of line voltage regulator

The regulator on-load tap changer has 32 tap positions (see Figure 4-22). This
allows the regulated load voltage to range from 90-110% of the unregulated line
voltage. The tap changer is controlled by automatic voltage regulating relays with
line drop compensation.

Neutral tap position

Input voltage = output voltage

Figure 4-26 Tap position indicator

on the VR-32 voltage regulator

4-28
 Section Four – HV Distribution – Overhead

Note: When closing the bypass disconnector, the tap changer must be in the
neutral position so the unregulated line and regulated load voltages are the same.

If the tapping mechanism is in any position but neutral, closing the bypass switch
short-circuits the tapped winding coils and results in heavy circulating current flows.

The correct switching procedure is essential or serious damage to the regulator

may result.

Switching Procedure to Isolate Regulator

1. Place the regulator on manual control.

2. Using the push button control, adjust the regulator to the neutral tap position.
Check all indicators.

(A light may indicate when the mechanism is on the neutral tap. The
switching operator must check the mechanical tap indicator and nameplate
for the neutral tap setting.)

As an added precaution, open off the mechanism supply switch or fuses.

(The neutral tap position is where output voltage equals input voltage.)

3. Close the bypass switch. (This may have a mechanical or electrical interlock.)

4. Open the disconnectors on the line and load sides of the regulator.

Switching Procedure to Place in Service

1. Check the regulator is on manual control and in the neutral tap position.

2. Close the disconnectors on the line and load sides of the regulator and
remove any D–DNO tags.

3. Open the bypass switch.

4. Energise the mechanism supply, if necessary.

5. Reinstate the supply fuses or switch.

6. Place the regulator to auto control. If necessary, check the operation. To

check auto operation, use the manual control to raise or lower the taps.

To avoid errors, the switching operator must check each step and work
methodically.

4-29
Switching Operator's Manual One

4.2.11 Fault Indicators

Fault indicators are used to assist in locating faults by indicating the path fault
current has flowed. A range of fault indicators are used in Horizon Power; a
common example is the SEL AR360 AutoRANGER® fault indicator (shown in
Figure 4-23). This fault indicator is clipped onto the overhead line conductor using
an insulated HV operating stick.

Use an
insulating HV operating stick
to install the fault indicator

Figure 4-27 Typical Horizon Power fault indicator

This is the SEL AR360 AutoRanger® device.

Fault indicators detect the presence of a fault by the sudden increase in current
flow, caused by the fault current which is followed by the loss of voltage as the
protective device operates to disconnect the fault.

A successful auto reclose would indicate a temporary fault and the fault indicator
flashes amber. However, an unsuccessful auto reclose resulting in permanent loss
of supply would cause the fault indicator to flash alternately red-amber.

Fault detectors
Three-phase
feeder
A B C
Fault current flow
Substation

F1

Figure 4-28 Fault indicator operation

In Figure 4-24, a line fault F1 is located between fault indicators B and C. Fault
indicators A and B operate as the fault current has passed through them, however
fault indicator C does not operate as the fault current did not pass through C.

4-30
 Section Four – HV Distribution – Overhead

Most fault indicators will self-reset after a set time period. Others must be reset
manually after the fault is found.

Note: The manual fault indicator must be reset as soon as possible. In the event
of a further fault before resetting, the operator will not be able to tell whether the
fault current passed the indicator point. The indicator would still show the previous
fault.

4.2.12 Transformers

The transformers used by Horizon Power include:

• pole top

• padmount

• ground mount (compound).

Refer to Section 3.2.1 – Distribution Transformers for further details.

4.2.13 Reactors

Reactors have high voltage windings similar to transformers but have no LV

windings. Reactors absorb reactive power and they are installed on long three-
phase lines to control high voltages caused by the type of construction and length
of the line (capacitive effect).

Reactors are used mainly on 33kV distribution lines. Normally, they are protected
by drop out fuses.

4.3 Interconnection of Feeders

This section should be read with Section Six. Interconnection of transformers
involves the connection of two different feeders at any one point.

4-31
Switching Operator's Manual One

Substation 1 Substation 2

T1 T2 T1

F1 F2 F3 F4

NOP
B
NOP NOP
A C

Figure 4-29 Types of feeder interconnection

Figure 4-25 shows two substations S1 and S2 and four feeders F1, F2, F3 and F4
with normally open points A, B and C. There are two basic types of feeder
interconnection:

• feeders may be interconnected from different substations, e.g. F3 and F4 via

NOP C

• feeders may be interconnected from the same substation supplied by:

• different transformers, e.g. F2 and F3 via NOP B, or

• the same transformer, e.g. F1 and F2 via NOP A.

Note: Interconnection is also possible via the LV system.

Interconnection of feeders is necessary for the following reasons:

• to move open points

• to transfer load

• to isolate a section of line or apparatus without outage to customers.

Before interconnection is carried out, the following factors must be considered:

• the feeder loads before and after interconnection

4-32
 Section Four – HV Distribution – Overhead

• the selection of the best location for interconnection (for example, for circuit
breaker isolation, interconnection should be close to the substation)

• the extra load on conductors after interconnection

• the need for two or more connection points, where required by the load

• the type of switchgear used for interconnection (for example, pole top
switches or disconnectors)

• the level of circulating current between zone substation transformers

• interconnection of extensive underground areas may result in high through

currents, depending upon transformer impedances and lengths of cables.

Figure 4-26 shows circulating current. T1 and T2 are set at different taps, therefore,
the secondary busbars will be at different voltages.

If the bus coupler A is closed under this condition, a current will be driven around
the transformers, as shown. This is called circulating current and may be several
hundred amps for large tap differences. The smaller the tap difference, the less
circulating current will occur.

The same principle applies when bus coupler A is left open and two feeders F2 and
F3 on opposite bars are interconnected with a pole top switch or ring main unit
outside the substation. To minimise the circulating current through the feeders,
transformer T1 and T2 taps need to be set reducing the voltage difference. Failure
to reduce the circulating current may result in the interconnected feeders tripping
on overcurrent.

The circulating current will lessen the further the pole top switch or ring main unit is
from the substation because of the increased line impedance. For example, the
circulating current through NOP C will be less than NOP B. The circulating current
is negligible over two kilometres from the substation, unless most of the feeder is
underground cable.

4-33
Switching Operator's Manual One

Circulating
T1 current T2
Tap 6 Tap 8

NOP

Bus
coupler A

F1 F2 F3

NOP B
Close in NOP

NOP C

Distant NOP

Figure 4-30 Circulating current

Local knowledge and careful analysis of circuits is required when planning

interconnection. Table 4-3 shows the general requirements for feeder
interconnection but specific local conditions may overrule these requirements.

4-34
 Section Four – HV Distribution – Overhead

Tap Feeder/ Feeder/

Bus Sensitive
Change Adjust Recloser Recloser Capacitor
Configuration Coupler Earth
to Taps Set to Earth Off
Closed Fault Out
Manual Manual Fault Out

One No No See Note PTS No No No Yes

Transformer 7 DISO Yes (Note 5)
or Two
Transformers (Note 3)
in Parallel

Two No No See Note PTS No No No Yes

Transformers (Note 1) (Note 7 DISO Yes (Note 5)
Feeding 1)
Separate (Note 3)
Bars.
Switching
outside 2km
from sub-
station

Two Yes Yes See Note PTS No See See Yes

Transformers (See 7 DISO Yes Section Section (Note 5)
Feeding Section 6.9.2 6.9.2
Separate (Note 3)
6.9.2) (Note 4)
Bars. Inter-
connecting
inside 2km
from sub-
station

Separate No No See Note PTS No No No Yes

Substations (Note 2) (Note 7 DISO Yes (Note 5)
(greater than 2 6) (Note 3)
km)

Note 1 Transformers must be set to manual and the taps must be matched if the length of the feeder route is
more than 50% cable.
Note 2 Transformers need only to be set to manual when the feeder length route is more than 50% cable.
Note 3 This applies to reclosers installed in feeders as well as substation feeder breakers.
Note 4 This applies only for outdoor substations with a disconnector type bus coupler.
Note 5 Sensitive Earth Fault – Flag 14.
Note 6 Taps may need to be adjusted if separate substations have extreme voltage differences.
Note 7 If the switching operator is concerned that there may be a flashover or fault on the switching apparatus
they are operating, they must set the feeders/reclosers to manual to prevent multiple automatic reclose
operations when paralleling feeders.

Table 4-3 Interconnection switching table

Tap Changer to Manual

This is done to guard against tap changer runaway (transformers tapping in

opposite directions) due to circulating currents.

Adjust Taps

Adjusting transformers to the same tap or voltage is carried out when switching
inside two kilometres of the substation. Circulating current result if switching inside
two kilometres, while on different taps. The current may trip the feeder or cause
excessive arcing on the interconnecting apparatus.

4-35
Switching Operator's Manual One

Feeder Circuit Breaker Set to Manual

This is done as a precaution to eliminate multiple automatic reclose operations if a

fault occurs during switching.

Feeder Earth Fault Out

When switching with pole top switches, 'feeder earth fault out' is not necessary.
(However, it is necessary when switching a three-phase set of single-phase
disconnectors. If this is not done, the feeder may trip. This is due to the out-of-
balance load as the first disconnector is operated during interconnection.)

Always switch with a ganged three-phase device rather than a single-phase device,
where ever possible.

Note: When carrying out three-phase isolation of a rural feeder connected with
single-phase spurs, earth fault protection may operate due to out-of-balance
current.

Hydraulic Reclosers and Sectionalisers

When interconnection involving reclosers and/or sectionalisers is being carried out

the recloser and/or sectionaliser by-pass must be closed.

Nu-Lec Reclosers

When interconnection involves Nu-Lec reclosers, by-passing the recloser is not

necessary because the overcurrent protection has been pre-set to take the
additional load. As these reclosers are fitted with SEF protection, the SEF is
disabled before paralleling feeders downstream of the recloser. The SEF can be
returned to service after the feeders are separated.

Bus Coupler Closed

The bus coupler may need to be closed when interconnection is carried out:

• within two kilometres of a zone substation

• where transformers are feeding separate busbars, and

• the feeders are fed from different busbars.

This procedure effectively parallels the transformers, making further interconnection

and switching safe at the interconnection point in the field.

The bus coupler (circuit breaker or switch) is closed, because it has a higher rating
than field equipment. It may also be fault rated.

4-36
 Section Four – HV Distribution – Overhead

The reverse is true when reinstating the bus coupler to normal. The switching
operator should first open the interconnection point in the field and then open the
bus coupler.

The switching operator must remember to adjust the taps before operating the bus
coupler.

Capacitor Bank Off

In outdoor substations, the bus coupler is normally a switch, not a circuit breaker.
When interconnecting with the bus coupler, with the substation capacitor banks in
service, there is a danger of flashover.

If the bus coupler has to be operated at a zone substation, all capacitor banks may
need to be taken out of service, according to local conditions. The operation of
capacitor banks may cause unwanted transient spikes through the system. (Local
rulings determine when capacitor banks should be operated.)

Sensitive Earth Fault

When interconnecting feeders, the sensitive earth fault must be made inoperative.
This is because the slightest out-of-balance load may be detected and trip the
feeder. The out-of-balance may be caused by something as simple as poor contact
on a pole top switch.

Note: Not all overhead feeders have sensitive earth fault protection activated.
Underground feeders will not have sensitive earth fault protection enabled.

4.4 Common Distribution Faults

Common faults in the HV and LV distribution system include vehicles hitting poles,
trees touching or falling on mains, pollution failures, pole top fires, animals and a
variety of unknown causes. Single-phasing, drop out fuses failing to clear
(flashover) and faults on pole top switches also are common.

4.4.1 Vehicles Hitting Poles

When a vehicle hits a pole, a power failure may occur due to the conductors
clashing or shorting to earth. At times, the feeder successfully recloses.

4.4.2 Trees Touching or Falling on Mains

Foliage and wet limbs of trees touching the mains can conduct electricity and cause
short circuits between conductors. This may result in a circuit breaker tripping or a
high voltage fuse blowing. Falling or swaying trees, and their limbs, may also
damage or break conductors, resulting in live wires falling or hanging dangerously.

4-37
Switching Operator's Manual One

4.4.3 Pollution Failures

The pollution from industrial areas and exposed coastal areas may result in
flashovers, pole top fires or radio interference.

4.4.4 Pole Top Fires

Pole top fires normally occur on those structures that have loose connections or are
poorly bonded. Pollution, lightning damage and rain also contribute. Fires are more
frequent with the first light rains following a long dry summer and also occur with
high humidity at the end of summer. The fires are caused by leakage from, or
damage to, the insulator. As a result, the current may track down the insulator to
earth, or flow between the conductors. The tracking current through the wooden
pole and wooden crossarm will heat the wood and may eventually, set them on fire.

4.4.5 Animals

Both domestic animals and wild life may interfere with mains by short-circuiting the
phases. Cats, birds and flying foxes may create problems.

4.4.6 Transient Faults

Faults with no known cause may trip a feeder that then successfully recloses.
These are called transient faults. On the other hand, a feeder may trip and lock out.
Switching operators will then be called upon to patrol and then sectionalise the line
to determine the position of the fault.

For recurrent transient faults, the relevant part of the feeder or spur must be
patrolled.

Transient faults may be caused by the following situations.

• High winds cause tree limbs to come into contact with mains. This problem
may be observed by the burning ends of branches and dead leaves. (The
switching operator should find, cut and remove the problem limbs of trees
using suitable safety procedures.)

• High winds and slack bays of mains may result in conductors swinging
together and clashing. (When patrolling lines, the switching operator should
look for burn marks or pitting on the conductors.)

• Hot weather may cause excessive sag in long bays. Lines may touch trees in
the heat of the day but be quite clear early in the morning or at night. (When
patrolling, the switching operator should carefully examine the height of trees
near the middle of long bays.)

• Heavily loaded conductors carrying excessive current (amps) become heated

and droop. They may come into contact with trees or other conductors.

4-38
 Section Four – HV Distribution – Overhead

• Vehicles hitting poles may stretch street light circuits, customer services,
stays and mains. Lines may become so taut that they break, whip up into the
HV mains, cause a short circuit and then fall clear. These accidents may also
break conductor ties or split crossarms. (Close checking of pole tops is
required here.)

• Faults near water and grain storage areas may be caused by birds that fly
into exposed lines, especially at dusk or sunrise. (The switching operator
should look for signs of dead wildlife or feathers when patrolling the line.)

• Vandals constantly cause faults by throwing wires or rubbish over mains.

These may be difficult to detect. (The switching operator should carefully
observe the area and make local enquiries.)

• Insulation failures may be transient. Surge diverters may be faulty but look
perfectly normal. Pin insulators may puncture beneath the conductor and trip
the line when moisture fills the puncture. (These faults are extremely difficult
to find.)

• Faults caused by lightning may be only transient. Lightning strikes do not

have to strike a line directly to cause an outage. Strikes in close proximity can
induce high currents in lines, which trip the controlling circuit breakers.

• Bush fires beneath lines send up dense clouds of smoke containing

conductive particles. These particles may cause outages due to a flashover
between conductors or the conductor and earth.

4.4.7 Single-phasing Faults (Loss of one HV phase)

In a three-phase system, single-phasing faults are caused by the open circuiting of

one HV phase. This causes abnormal voltages on the LV side of distribution
transformers and is commonly reported by customers as a ‘dim supply’ or ‘partial
supply’.

The open circuiting of one HV phase will not operate feeder circuit breaker
protection, because of the balanced current on the healthy two phases.

Most of these faults on a three-phase system are caused by the following:

• a HV drop out fuse has blown

• a tap may burn off at a pole top switch, a corner tapping pole, or a
termination.

• the contacts on a pole top switch may overheat and burn so badly that the
contacts become highly resistive. They may also melt away from each other
resulting in an open circuit.

• a broken conductor caused by weather conditions or mechanical damage.

4-39
Switching Operator's Manual One

After the repair and restoration of a permanent phase to phase or earth fault, or the
successful reclose after a transient fault, complaints about dim lights or partial
supplies may be received. Such complaints may indicate the fault current from the
previous fault has also caused an open circuit HV conductor or a blown HV fuse.

4.4.8 Feeder Faults – Drop Out Fuses Failing to Clear

Sometimes faults occur on fused spurs or circuits that feed transformers. A whole
feeder may trip for the following reasons:

• The fuse operates too slowly, because it may be incorrectly sized or have
been hard wired.

• The expulsion tube (in which the arc extinguishes) fails to function correctly.
A flashover then results, causing the feeder to trip instead of the drop out
fuse (DOF).

4.5 Fault Finding Process

HPCC manages all unplanned HV outages and will advise the switching operator of
specific actions required to be undertaken in the fault finding process.

The fault finding process requires a close review of any protection or fault indicator
operation and a systematic approach to the trial restoration process.

Field Instruction – Replacing fuses on the HV/LV underground and overhead

network after a fault has occurred provides details of the procedures for overhead
HV/LV faults. The switching operator must perform risk assessment and line patrols
in accordance with this field instruction. Line patrolling is an essential part of the
fault finding process and is undertaken to ensure that the line is not hazardous to
the public, livestock and equipment and to locate any obvious cause of the fault.

Note: Line patrols for faults are mandatory for overhead HV circuits within town
boundaries and overhead LV circuits.

Risk assessment and line patrol requirements for feeder and auto-recloser lockout
and sectionaliser operation are similar to those for fuses.

Examples of the approach typically used for fault finding specific types of faults are
given below.

4.5.1 Single-phase Spur Faults

Single-phase HV spurs are often protected by single and multiple drop out fuses.
They may have disconnection points (live line taps) at several points throughout the

4-40
 Section Four – HV Distribution – Overhead

spur.

HPCC manages HV fault switching and will guide the switching operator to ensure
compliance with Field Instruction – Replacing fuses on the HV/LV underground and
overhead network after a fault has occurred for line patrol requirements. HPCC will
then the request the operator at the appropriate time to perform the following steps:

• Reload the HV fuse and try to reinstate the line.

• If the fault was transient, the fuse will hold. A full line patrol is required
at the earliest practical time, if not already carried out.

• If the fuse blows when it is replaced the fault is permanent , the line will
then need to be sectionalised and reenergised until the fault is located:

o Once the faulted section is found, the healthy sections of the line
may be reinstated.

o The line fault can then be rectified and the line may be returned to
normal.

Note: The fault may cause arcing and sparks every time the fuse is replaced. (Dry
conditions present a real danger of fire in this case.)

The fault may be a conductor close to the ground. (This places people and stock at
great risk.)

The fault may be in a transformer and not visible. (In this case, each transformer or
group of transformers must be disconnected in order to locate the fault.)

For two and three shot fuses, the fault finding process is the same as for single
shot drop out fuses.

Single-phase Reclosers and Sectionalisers

Single-phase spurs are often protected by reclosers and sectionalisers.

Fault finding for recloser and sectionaliser operation is described in Section 4.2.
The switching operator should consider the following.

• To locate a fault when fault switching, the reclosers must be set to 'manual'
(single shot or non-reclosing). The recloser is fully rated for fault switching.

• Reclosers and sectionalisers have a bypass fuse that can be used as a

substitute to prove the recloser or sectionaliser. It may also be used to protect
the line and maintain supply, if repairs to the recloser or sectionaliser are
required.

4-41
Switching Operator's Manual One

• The sectionaliser must not be used for fault switching. The sectionaliser
bypass fuse should be used, where available. If it is not available, use the
recloser.

Note: Regular records of the number of reclose attempts are kept. This assists
district staff to identify any spur that has a high percentage of transient faults. Such
spurs can be patrolled and the problems identified.

Records should also be kept for three-phase reclosers protecting the whole feeder
or parts of the feeder.

4.5.2 Three-phase Feeder Faults

Feeder faults are serious because:

• many customers will lose power

• phase-to-phase voltage is greater than for single-phase spurs

• more complicated switching is involved (LV feeder, feeder interconnection

and substation switching).

HPCC manages three-phase fault switching and the manual reclosing of feeders
and will direct the switching operator on the actions required. Details of the typical
actions are provide below.

Transient Faults

Transient faults on feeders are reinstated by auto reclose of the circuit breakers at
the substations or line reclosers. Where the number of reclose attempts is high in
normal conditions, the line will be requested by HPCC to be patrolled to locate and
rectify the transient fault.

Manual Reclose

At times, the complete feeder trips and, following the required number of reclose
attempts, the circuit breaker locks out at the substation. HPCC will request field
staff to investigate the fault with a line patrol. If called to attend a substation, the
switching operator must record all flagging in the logbook before resetting the flags.

For short feeder lengths, the line is patrolled from the substation. If required the
patrolled sections can be progressively reinstated.

For long 22kV and 33kV feeders it may be necessary to patrol, sectionalise and
attempt trial reclose operations to locate the fault. Therefore, the feeder should be
opened at an appropriate point of the feeder, approximately half way. After manual
reclose, if the first half of the feeder stays in, the remaining half of the feeder should
be opened at its half way point.

4-42
 Section Four – HV Distribution – Overhead

The feeder may then be tripped at the substation and the first open pole top switch
should be closed. If the pole top switch is fault-rated, the feeder does not need to
be tripped. If the reinstated feeder stays in, the fault must be contained in the last
quarter of the feeder. The feeder may be broken again or patrolled, depending on
the length of the remaining feeder.

During fault switching, after location and isolation of the fault, further faults may be
found as the feeder is restored. This is because the high fault current travelling to
the fault may cause more damage to other parts of the feeder. The following
problems may occur under these circumstances:

• Dim supplies may be caused by the following:

• drop out fuse flashover causing the original trip – once the feeder is
reinstated, the drop out fuse still needs to be replaced

• a burnt off tap – during the transient fault, the fault current has been
sufficiently large to burn off a connection. If the live side falls clear of all
other apparatus when it is energised after a reclose, the feeder will hold
in. However, dim supplies will occur past the burnt off connection.

• failure of lightning arrestors – sudden changes of voltage may cause failure of

deteriorated lightning arrestors. The failure may occur at the time of the fault
or during the fault switching process

• blown drop out fuses – a drop in voltage may cause the operation of
deteriorated fuses or fuses with a very small rating.

Note: When fault switching, the minimum number of re-energising operations

should be used. This helps to limit the fault current through other parts of the
feeder. In turn, this reduces the stresses on all apparatus.

In summary, fault finding for feeders should be conducted as follows.

• HPCC manage all unplanned outages and will request the required line
patrols.

• HPCC must be advised of all flags recorded at the substation (if attendance is
required).

• Safety is most important. Use only approved methods, equipment and

personal protective equipment.

• Pole top switches are designed to make fault current, but not break fault
current.

4-43
Switching Operator's Manual One

• The auto reclose device must be taken out of service when fault switching at
zone substations and/or feeder reclosers which are installed along the line.

• While the faulted section is being located and repaired, the unfaulted line
sections may reinstated. For example, unfaulted line sections may be fed
from the zone substation or be interconnected using another feeder.

• The same fault finding principles, as those for a feeder from a zone
substation, apply to fault finding beyond a recloser.

Note: If the stated rating is not exceeded when closing on a fault, the pole top
switch may be used instead of the circuit breaker.

4.5.3 Distribution Transformer Faults

See Section 3.4.3 for a description of overhead transformer faults and the
associated procedures required.

4-44
 SECTION FIVE

HV Distribution – Underground
Table of Contents
5. HV Distribution – Underground .............................................................. 5-2
5.1 Introduction ........................................................................................ 5-2
5.2 System Components .......................................................................... 5-2
5.2.1 Cables ........................................................................................... 5-2
5.2.2 High Voltage Cable Terminations .................................................. 5-4
5.2.3 Ring Main Units ............................................................................. 5-6
5.2.4 HV Metering ................................................................................ 5-20
5.2.5 Ground Mounted Distribution Transformers ................................. 5-20
5.3 Design Principles.............................................................................. 5-21
5.3.1 Method 1 – Standard RMU single transformer............................. 5-21
5.3.2 Method 2 – Single RMU with multiple transformers ..................... 5-22
5.3.3 Method 3 – Overhead supply to transformer................................ 5-22
5.3.4 Method 4 – Piggy-back transformers ........................................... 5-23
5.3.5 Method 5 – Single-phase underground distribution system ......... 5-25
5.3.6 Combination of Methods ............................................................. 5-25
5.4 Switching Procedures ....................................................................... 5-27
5.4.1 Planned Switching ....................................................................... 5-27
5.4.2 Fault Indicators............................................................................ 5-32
5.4.3 Fault Switching ............................................................................ 5-33
5.5 Ferroresonance ................................................................................ 5-34
5.6 Traps ................................................................................................ 5-37
5.6.1 Isolating Both Ends of Cable before Earthing .............................. 5-37
5.6.2 Switchgear Interlocks .................................................................. 5-37
5.6.3 Switchgear Testing Facilities ....................................................... 5-38
5.6.4 Not having a Mental Picture of the Circuit.................................... 5-38
5.6.5 Ferroresonance ........................................................................... 5-38
5.6.6 Maps and Diagrams not Up-to-Date ............................................ 5-38
5.6.7 Not Using Meters or Indicators .................................................... 5-38
5.6.8 Lack of Local Knowledge............................................................. 5-39
5.6.9 Equipment Labelling .................................................................... 5-39

i
Switching Operator's Manual One

5.6.10 Ring Main Unit Locks ................................................................... 5-39

5.6.11 Voltage Indicators ........................................................................ 5-39

ii
 Section Five – HV Distribution – Underground

List of Figures

Figure 5-1 Single core XLPE cable .................................................................... 5-3

Figure 5-2 PILCSWA cable ................................................................................ 5-4
Figure 5-3 HV cable terminations used to connect HV cables ............................ 5-5
Figure 5-4 Typical ring main unit ........................................................................ 5-7
Figure 5-5 Sectional view of a HV HRC fuse...................................................... 5-9
Figure 5-6 Schneider RM6 two ring main switch and two switch fuse .............. 5-10
Figure 5-7 Typical Schneider RM6 four ring main switch ................................. 5-10
Figure 5-8 Extendable and combined ring main units ...................................... 5-11
Figure 5-9 Ring main switch in the service and withdrawn positions ................ 5-12
Figure 5-10 Ring main switch front panel ......................................................... 5-14
Figure 5-11 DC Isolator.................................................................................... 5-15
Figure 5-12 T300 Remote Terminal Unit .......................................................... 5-16
Figure 5-13 T300 Locked Enclosure. ............................................................... 5-16
Figure 5-14 ‘Voltage presence’ indicating neon lights ...................................... 5-17
Figure 5-15 Gas level gauge on RM6 ring main unit ........................................ 5-18
Figure 5-16 Brown Boveri withdrawable ring main unit .................................... 5-19
Figure 5-17 Method 1 – Standard RMU single transformer .............................. 5-22
Figure 5-18 Method 2 – Single RMU with multiple transformers....................... 5-22
Figure 5-19 Method 4 – Overhead supply to transformer ................................. 5-23
Figure 5-20 Cable pole with drop out fuses ...................................................... 5-23
Figure 5-21 Transformer connections in a ‘piggy-back’ arrangement ............... 5-24
Figure 5-22 End transformer connections in a “piggy-back” arrangement ........ 5-24
Figure 5-23 Simplified ring main reticulation .................................................... 5-26
Figure 5-24 Procedure for isolation of a cable.................................................. 5-28
Figure 5-25 Ring main isolation at distribution substation ................................ 5-30
Figure 5-26 Ring main unit fault indicator ......................................................... 5-32
Figure 5-27 Fault location using indicators ....................................................... 5-33

iii
List of Tables
Table 5-1 Cable applications .............................................................................. 5-3
Table 5-2 Typical makes and types of ring main units ........................................ 5-6
Table 5-3 Ring main HRC fuse ratings ............................................................... 5-8
Table 5-4 Operational positions and their electrical status ............................... 5-13
Table 5-5 Mechanical interlock status in relation to operational positions ......... 5-14
Table 5-6 DOF sizes for piggy backed transformers ........................................ 5-25
Table 5-7 Critical cable length for ferroresonance – XLPE cable ...................... 5-36
Table 5-8 Critical cable length for ferroresonance – PILCSWA cable ............... 5-36

5-1
Switching Operator's Manual One

5. HV Distribution –
Underground
5.1 Introduction
This section deals with the operations of HV (11kV to 33kV) underground
distribution systems. These systems may be combined within an overhead system
or used solely from the zone substation to the distribution transformers.

The fundamental principles of the underground HV system are the same as those
of the overhead system. However, certain areas require different designs for
operation procedures.

Underground systems are the standard construction for distribution systems in

cyclonic regions. They are also used in high-density commercial areas, heavy
industry, and new residential developments, typically underground distribution
schemes (UDS).

This section is written to reflect current standards and may not include many of the
legacy installations and apparatus.

5.2 System Components

The main components in the HV underground system are cables, ring main units,
HV metering and ground mounted distribution transformers.

5.2.1 Cables

Horizon Power uses cables in a variety of sizes and voltages, depending on the
need. The main cables are shown in Table 5-1.

In addition to those listed, many older sizes and types of cables are found in
Horizon Power's system.

5-2
 Section Five – HV Distribution – Underground

Application Voltage (kV) Cable (mm2)

300 Cu and Al
11 240 Cu and Al
185 Cu
Feeder 240 Cu and Al
22 400 Al
185 Cu
33 185 Al
11 70 Al

Distribution 35 Al
22
transformer 50 Al
33 50 Al

Table 5-1 Cable applications

XLPE Cables

Cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) cables are the standard cable. Polyethylene has
the following advantages over previous insulants:

• low cost

• low capacitance

• ease of extrusion

• low dielectric loss, and

• high electrical strength.

Termite Conductor
protection layer Metallic
screen
shield

LV
Concentric
round

HV
Compacted
conductor

Conductor
Outer sheath
Insulation Insulation
screen

Figure 5-1 Single core XLPE cable

5-3
Switching Operator's Manual One

PILCSWA Cables

PILCSWA cables are paper insulated with lead sheathing and steel wire armour.
The cable has a conductive screen of metal tape around each core that aids the
detection of any earth leakage current from an individual core. The lead sheath
prevents moisture from entering the cable while the wire armours provide
mechanical protection around the cable.

Where the cable is terminated, the screening, the lead sheath and the steel wire
armours are each connected to the earth system of the zone or distribution
substation.

This means that there is a fully screened system bonded to earth, except for the
small area where the screening does not meet the cable box bushings at the
terminations. Therefore, nearly all cable faults will be detected and cleared by
earth fault relays.

Although no longer installed, these PILCSWA type cables will be found in older
systems.

Impregnated paper Fillers Lead or alloy

Stranded insulation sheath
conductor Bitumen-impregnated
Core insulation paper tapes

Metallic foil screen Bitumen-compounded

jute or double-hessian
Bitumen-compounded
tapes Galvanized hession or PVC serving
steel wire
armour

Figure 5-2 PILCSWA cable

5.2.2 High Voltage Cable Terminations

High voltage cable terminations are used to connect high voltage cables to Horizon
Power’s indoor and outdoor switchgear and pole mounted terminations. The
integrity of the connection is paramount to ensure terminations are able to
withstand peak load requirements and not fail during fault events.

5-4
 Section Five – HV Distribution – Underground

Apparatus Use

630A elbow connector

Used to terminate HV UG cables into Horizon Power switchgear

including ring main units and possibly circuit breakers.

These connections are used on Horizon Power’s feeder

connections.

200A deadbreak elbow connector

Used to terminate HV UG cables into Horizon Power padmount

transformers.

200A deadbreak straight connector

Used to terminate HV UG cables into Horizon Power fusible ring

main switch units.

200A deadbreak Insulated cap

Used to create insulated protection for non-used high voltage

bushings on Horizon Power’s padmount transformers.

HV indoor / outdoor terminations

Used to terminate HV UG cables into Horizon Power

indoor/outdoor switchgear, mostly substation and outdoor pole
terminations.

Note: When installed outdoors, the termination must have weather

shields, applicable for the operating voltage of the cable, installed
along the termination.

Figure 5-3 HV cable terminations used to connect HV cables

to Horizon Power’s indoor and outdoor switchgear, and pole mounted terminations.

Horizon Power's cable terminations are not rated as switching devices. Any
removal or modification will need to be done under an Electrical Access Permit
(EAP). Before switching and where possible, a visual inspection should be
performed to check integrity, including baling assemblies and terminations for
tracking or other defects.

5-5
Switching Operator's Manual One

5.2.3 Ring Main Units

Ring main switchgear is installed in HV underground cable systems throughout the

distribution system. All ring main units are made up of one or more of the following:

• a ring main switch, which is a load-break, fault-make switch

• a switch fuse, also called a fuse switch, which is a load-break, fault-make
switch equipped with HRC fuses to break fault current
• an HV metering tank.

The ring main switch enables:

• the underground cable system to be isolated in sections, and

• the interconnection of adjacent feeders.

The switch fuse allows the following functions:

• the connection and protection of distribution transformers, and

• an isolation point for distribution transformers.

Many styles and designs of ring main units are used by Horizon Power (for details
see Table 5-2). They are mainly non-withdrawable units with a few remaining
withdrawable units.

Make Type

Areva/Alstom FBA

Schneider/Merlin Gerin RM6 VM6

Areva FBE 33kV

Brown Boveri Withdrawable

Table 5-2 Typical makes and types of ring main units

Ring main switch and fuse switch contacts have a ganged three-phase operation.
The insulating materials used in the switch contact chamber to extinguish arcing
during operation are:

• sulphur-hexafluoride (SF6) in a pressurised sealed chamber

• air (no longer commonly used).

A typical ring main unit is shown Figure 5-4 below. The ring main unit has a fuse
switch in centre position with a switch on either side.

5-6
 Section Five – HV Distribution – Underground

Fuse switch Switch

Switch

Figure 5-4 Typical ring main unit

This RMU is a Schneider RM6 in 2+1 configuration

Ring Main Switches

These switches are used on distribution underground systems for the same
purpose as pole top switches on overhead systems.

These three-phase switches are used for interconnection, load movement or

isolation of sections of feeder cables.

Ring main switches are connected between the internal bus bar and the cable as
shown in Figure 5-7 and incorporate either an internal earth function or facilities for
external earthing. The earth function works on the cable side and not the busbar
side of the ring main switch.

The normal configuration of a ring main unit is two ring main switches and a
number of switch fuses, although other configurations may be installed where
required.

Typically, the maximum full load rating of a ring main switch is 630 amps.
Particular details for each type of ring main unit can be found on the nameplate.

Ring Main Fuse Switches (Fuse Switches)

Fuse switches are used on distribution underground systems for the same purpose
as drop out fuses on overhead systems.

Switch fuses are used extensively in ring main systems, as an economical means
of protecting distribution transformers. They are similar to ring main switches in
construction, but include a HV HRC fuse to provide fault interruption and an
associated automatic three-phase trip as shown in Figure 5-6.

5-7
Switching Operator's Manual One

The advantages of correctly graded fuses are:

• quick isolation of the fault, minimising the risks of injury and damage to
equipment

• isolation of only the faulted transformer, keeping maximum supply available to

customers.

Switch fuses typically have a maximum full load rating of 200 amps.

The size of the fuse to be used depends on the size of the transformer to be
protected. For example, an 11kV 500kVA transformer is protected by 63 amp HRC
fuses. The fuse sizes range from 6.3 amps to 80 amps (see Table 5-3).

Ring Main HRC Fuses

kVA 11kV 22kV 33kV

160 25 10 6.3

315 31.5 16 16
Three-
500 40 25 -
phase
630 50 31.5 20

750 63 40 -

1000 80 40 40

Table 5-3 Ring main HRC fuse ratings

Note: 33kV ground mounted distribution transformers are mainly fed via overhead
drop out fuses.

HV HRC fuses consist of a porcelain cylinder with end caps and an internal fuse
element and striker pin. The fuses are located in a dry air insulated chamber
attached to the switch tank.

The components of an HV HRC fuse are shown in Figure 5-5.

5-8
 Section Five – HV Distribution – Underground

Seal

End cap

Striker pin Striker pin

actuator

Ceramic spider

Silica powder
Fusible elements
Porcelain tube

Porcelain beads
End cap

Seal

Figure 5-5 Sectional view of a HV HRC fuse

Note the yellow arrow on the fuse body, indicating the direction of the striker pin.

When the fuse blows, the striker pin in the cartridge is released. This protrudes
outside the cartridge, striking the trip bar device on the fuse switch. The switch
then trips to the 'off' position. An indicator on the face of the fuse cabinet may be
provided to show the fuse has blown.

Because fuse striker pins are fitted at one end only, the striker pin must be
correctly located adjacent to the trip bar mechanism. Note the arrow on the fuse
body in Figure 5-5, indicating the correct direction of the striker pin.

Access to a fuse is not possible unless it is isolated, that is, the switch fuse is
switched 'off'. Where switches have an internal earth function, the switch must be
put to the 'earth' position before access to the fuse chamber is possible. Where
switch fuses are withdrawable, they must be switched 'off' and racked out for
access to the fuses.

Note: When changing fuses, the switching operator must remember:

• the internal bus bar section of the ring main unit is normally energised, and

• the fuse must be fitted with the striker pin towards the trip mechanism.

5-9
Switching Operator's Manual One

Ring Main Unit Configuration

The ring main units consist of the required number of switches and fuse switches
to match their application in the network. Figure 5-6 shows a ring main unit with
two switches and two fuse switches. This arrangement is commonly referred to as
a 2+2 unit. Figure 5-7 shows a unit with only four switches (4+0 unit).

Ring main fuse switches Ring main switches

Busbar

Switch
Trip Trip
signal signal

Earth switches
operate
together
Fuse

Cables

Figure 5-6 Schneider RM6 two ring main switch and two switch fuse

Earth
switch

Switch

Cables

Figure 5-7 Typical Schneider RM6 four ring main switch

Ring main units can be supplied as an extendable or combined (non-extendable)

units as shown in Figure 5-8.

Extendable units provide the capability to build the required configuration by joining
together the required number of switch and fuse switch modules. Each module is

5-10
 Section Five – HV Distribution – Underground

joined to the next with air-insulated connection joints. Where the switch and fuse
switch modules are SF6 -insulated, each module has a separate SF6 chamber and
associated pressure gauge.

Combined (non-extendable) units are built by the manufacturer to required

configuration inside one tank. Therefore in combined SF6 units there will only be
one pressure gauge. Combined units are commonly used for standard
configurations such as 2+1.

Three single extendable units

Removable joints
Extendable
if required

Transformer

Combined (non-extendable) unit

One tank

Transformer

Figure 5-8 Extendable and combined ring main units

Withdrawable and non-withdrawable switches and fuse switches can also be

provided. In non-withdrawable units, the switch and fuse switch cannot be
withdrawn, disconnecting them from the busbar and cable circuits. Non-
withdrawable units are most commonly used.

5-11
Switching Operator's Manual One

Shown in Figure 5-9 below is the principle of withdrawable ring main units with a
withdrawable truck unit for both a ring main switch and a switch fuse. The figure
shows the truck C may be moved in or out of the housing D. When the ring main
switch is inserted into its correct position, it plugs into the HV cable spouts A and
the busbar spouts B. When physically withdrawn the switch separates from the
busbar and cable connections as shown for the ring main switch in the right image
of Figure 5-9.

In its correctly plugged-in position, the interlock of the ring main switch may be set
to the 'service' position. The switch can then be operated to 'on' or 'off', as
required, usually by means of a spring charged device.

The interlock prevents the switch from being withdrawn while it is in the 'on'
position. It also prevents the switch being racked in if the truck is in the 'on'
position.

The withdrawable switch fuse is constructed and operated in the same way as a
ring main switch but contains three fuses (see Figure 5-9 left). It must be switched
'off' and racked out into the withdrawn position out before the fuses can be
replaced.

Service position Withdrawn position

Bus and cable contacts Bus and cable contacts
connected to switch separated from switch
D D D

C C C
B B B

A A A

Cable Cable Cable

Ring main Ring main Ring main

fuse switch switch switch

Figure 5-9 Ring main switch in the service and withdrawn positions
Note the ring main fuse switch on the left is also a withdrawable unit.

Comparison of the underground and overhead system

It can be seen that underground and overhead systems are almost identical in
operation but there are important differences.

• Ring main units have a cable earthing facility. This may be a switch or manual
plug-in device that is used instead of portable overhead earth sets.

5-12
 Section Five – HV Distribution – Underground

• Ring main equipment is designed as full load-break fault-make units. This is

not so for pole top switches that have limited capacities.

• Ring main units are designed so that the transformer's switch fuse opens if a
fuse blows. This produces a three-phase trip if any fuse blows. (Drop out fuses
only trip one phase).

• The switch contacts are inside the chamber and are not visible. The switching
operator must prove the circuit is de-energised before the earths are applied.
(Some units have neon indicators while others have external testing devices.)

• Faults that develop on an underground cable are mostly permanent.

Therefore, the substation circuit breaker should not be set to 'auto reclose' on
circuits that are mainly cable.

• A section of cable may be isolated without loss of supply to a distribution

transformer. Usually, this is not possible in the overhead system.

Operation of Switches

Ring main switches and fuse switches have three operational positions – ON, OFF
and EARTH. A description of the electrical status for each position is shown in
Table 5-4 below.

Operational
Electrical status
position

ON Busbar is connected to cable

OFF Busbar is disconnected from cable

EARTH The cable is connected to earth

Table 5-4 Operational positions and their electrical status

Most ring main switches and fuse switches have separate switch operating
mechanisms or earth switch operating mechanisms, whereby a handle is inserted
to operate the switch or earth switch. Switching is restricted to one operation at a
time to ensure each operation is separate and deliberate.

Mechanical interlocks between the switch and earth switch mechanisms restrict
the allowable combination of the switch and earth switch position to those shown in
Table 5-5 below.

5-13
Switching Operator's Manual One

Earth
Operational Switch
Electrical status switch
position position
position

ON Busbar is connected to cable ON OFF

OFF Busbar is disconnected from cable OFF OFF

EARTH The cable is connected to earth OFF ON

Table 5-5 Mechanical interlock status in relation to operational positions

One exception to this arrangement is the Brown Boveri ring main unit, which has a
plug-in portable earth rather than an earth switch.

Figure 5-10 shows an example of the mechanisms and indicators on the front
panel of a ring main unit.

Voltage Fault SF6 pressure

indicator indicator gauge

Earth switch
operating handle
socket

Switch operating
handle socket

Mechanical
indicator

Figure 5-10 Ring main switch front panel

5-14
 Section Five – HV Distribution – Underground

Spring assisted operation

Ring main switches and earth switches typically have some form of spring
assistance in the operating mechanism to ensure the switch contacts move at the
rate required to achieve the nominated switching current ratings.

As the handle of the switch is operated, it charges a spring that takes over the
switching action. This release of stored energy quickly transfers the switch to the
selected position, giving a consistent operation every time.

On closing a fuse switch, a stored charge is first made to enable the fuse switch to
trip if the HRC fuse blows and operates the striker pin. To trip a fuse switch, the
switching operator is required to either press a button or move the handle in the
opposite direction.

Earth switches are spring-assisted on closing to ensure rapid earthing of the circuit
but in some cases are not assisted on opening.

Drive Motor Spring Charged.

Certain types of Schneider switches and breakers make use of a DC drive motor to
charge the closing spring. This feature is used when remote switching operations
are required on apparatus using a RTU via SCADA.

The design of some apparatus does however not include a standard feature to
isolate the DC supply to the spring charge motor. This is a problem when the
switch needs to be isolated for the issue of an EAP.

To overcome the problem of the apparatus not having an integrated means to

isolate the DC supply to the spring change motor, a separate external DC isolator
is fitted to each switch. The position of the DC isolator in circuit not only isolates
the spring charge motor, but also isolates the electrical supply for “remote control”
functioning of the apparatus as well.

Operation of the DC isolator must be included in the switching program by the

Switching Operator when isolation of the circuit / apparatus is required.

Figure 5-11 DC Isolator

5-15
Switching Operator's Manual One

Remote Terminal Unit (T300).

Remote control functionality of some ring main units via SCADA is achieved by
means of a T300 Remote Terminal Unit (RTU).

Figure 5-12 T300 Remote Terminal Unit

A single T300 Remote Control Unit is designed to allow remote operation (close,
open) of the switches it controls at a particular location.

To inhibit remote operation of the RTU and the associated switches it controls, a
selection to “local control” must be made on the unit. When the unit is selected to
“local control”, a LED is illuminated to indicate this.

The T300 remote terminal unit is housed in a weather proof lockable enclosure. To
prevent the T300 unit from being accessed and inadvertently selected to “remote
control” after being selected to “local control”, it must be locked.

Figure 5-13 T300 Locked Enclosure.

5-16
 Section Five – HV Distribution – Underground

Voltage indicators (neon indicators)

Voltage indicators are provided on the ring main unit front panel to show the
electrical status of the associated cable. Earth switches must not be closed unless
the indicators on each phase show the cable is de-energised.

An example of voltage indicators is shown in Figure 5-11 below. The markings L1,
L2 and L3 represent the R, W and B phases respectively. The neon indicators
glow to show the presence of voltage on each phase of the cable

Neon indicator for each phase

Glowing = voltage is present

Socket to plug in voltmeter

as alternative indication

Figure 5-14 ‘Voltage presence’ indicating neon lights

as fitted to a RM6 ring main unit.

It is good switching practice to observe the three voltage indicators are operational
prior to de-energising a circuit. As an alternative method of proving de-energised,
three sockets are often provided near the indicators to allow the use of a voltmeter.

Some ring main units have removable voltage indicators. This facilitates proving
the indicators are working on live circuits before and after switching to de-energise
a cable.

Before applying an earth, the switching operator must use an

! approved testing method to positively prove the circuit is de-

energised.

SF6 gas pressure indicator

SF6 ring main units require adequate gas pressure at the operating temperature to
achieve the rated switching current. An energised switch must not be operated
with low gas pressure. The switching operator must check the gas gauge to ensure
adequate pressure before operating a switch.

5-17
Switching Operator's Manual One

An example of a gas pressure gauge is shown in Figure 5-12. The gas pressure is
indicated by the black needle. As pressure varies with temperature, the gauge has
a number of concentric circles indicating temperature between the range of –25°C
to +40°C. The green and red areas are used to show adequate or low gas
pressure respectively.

One method of reading the gauge is to look if the needle crosses anywhere into
the red area. If so, the temperature of where the needle crosses from the green
into the red area is estimated using the concentric temperature circles. If the actual
switchgear temperature (usually ambient temperature) is above this temperature
read from the gauge then the gas pressure is low and switching is not to proceed.

For example, in Figure 5-12 the left-hand image shows the needle in the green
area over the entire temperature range; therefore the gas pressure is adequate.
The right-hand image shows the needle crossing into the red area at an estimate
5°C from the concentric circles. This is interpreted as the gas pressure is low if the
actual temperature of the switchgear (usually ambient temperature) is above 5°C
(that is, a temperature in the red area). Therefore if the actual temperature of the
switchgear at the time of switching is above 5°C this switchgear must not be
operated.

Needle in green area Needle in red area above 5°C.

for all temperatures. Gas pressure is low
Gas pressure is adequate. for all temperatures above 5°C
(red area).

Figure 5-15 Gas level gauge on RM6 ring main unit

Where RMUs are fitted with a gas pressure indicator, this

indicator must be checked to ensure the gas pressure is
adequate for the switch to be operated.
! Switching must not proceed if the gas pressure is outside
acceptable limits.

5-18
 Section Five – HV Distribution – Underground

Earthing of Circuits Connected to Withdrawable Ring Main Units’

Switchgear

Withdrawable ring main units are not fitted with an integral earthing switch.
Earthing of the cable circuits must be done manually.

Earths must be applied as soon as possible after testing. If a circuit is proved to be

de-energised, but earths cannot be applied at the time, the switching operator
must prove the circuit is de-energised again, just before applying the earths.

An example of a withdrawable ring main unit is the Brown Boveri unit (shown in
Figure 5-13). Proving de-energised and earthing is performed through the cable
access cover. The portable earths are applied with the insulated earthing handle.
Because of interlocking arrangements this earthing access cover can only be
opened when the switch/fuse switch is in the withdrawn position.

Before applying an earth, the switching operator must use an

! approved HV testing device to positively prove the circuit is de-

energised.

Cable access
cover

Withdrawable
fuse switch

3 x withdrawable
switches

Portable earth
insulated handle

Portable earth
leads

Figure 5-16 Brown Boveri withdrawable ring main unit

5-19
Switching Operator's Manual One

Changing fuse switch fuses

Fuse switches are used to supply distribution transformers. To change the fuses
in the fuse switch the following conditions are required:

• The transformer must be isolated on the LV side – transformer LV

disconnectors removed, barriers fitted and Danger–Do Not Operate (D–DNO)
tagged.

• The fuse switch must be OFF and D–DNO tagged.

• The fuse switch earth switch must be ON – this earths both side of the fuses
and enables access to remove covers and change the fuses.

• The fuse must be inserted with the fuse striker pin facing toward the trip bar.

5.2.4 HV Metering

Where customers require a sole use distribution substation (usually over 2 MVA),
HV metering can be installed instead of LV metering. This allows customers to run
HV supplies within their own installations and have different rates for power
consumption. Depending on the ring main switchgear type the metering may be
installed as part of the ring main unit or as a separate unit.

In this type of installation, the HV distribution system has one, two or three
incoming feeds entering a common busbar. From here, the power passes through
the HV metering tank, where current and voltage transformers measure power
consumption. The common busbar then feeds a series of customer owned switch
fuses or circuit breakers.

Note: When insulation resistance testing switchgear with HV metering tanks,

switching operators must remember to remove the HV voltage
transformer fuses.

If this is not done, incorrect readings will result during the tests.

5.2.5 Ground Mounted Distribution Transformers

The principles of both overhead and ground mounted transformers are the same.
However, enclosed HV and LV cable boxes are normally fitted to ground mounted
transformers, in contrast with the open HV and LV bushings used on pole mounted
transformers.

5-20
 Section Five – HV Distribution – Underground

Because of the inherent danger of electrocution, all compound ground mounted

transformers with open HV bushing are required to be converted to enclosed cable
box transformers. If any open HV bushing ground mounted transformer
compounds are found, the switching operator must not enter them. The operator
must report the details to their formal leader for remedial action.

The standard sizes of ground mounted transformers range from 160kVA to

1000kVA. These transformers are installed in padmounts, compounds or fully fire-
rated indoor substations.

5.3 Design Principles

An underground system is designed in basically the same way as an overhead
system. The feeders run radially and are interconnected with other feeders, where
possible. Distribution transformer feeders are teed-off as required.

The switch fuse replaces the drop out fuse. The ring main switch replaces the pole
top switch.

Where a ground mounted transformer is required to supply customer installations,

one of the five following methods may be used:

• Method 1 – Standard RMU single transformer

• Method 2 – Single RMU with multiple transformers

• Method 3 – Overhead supply to transformer

• Method 4 – Piggy-back transformers (not approved for new installations)

• Method 5 – Single-phase underground distribution system.

5.3.1 Method 1 – Standard RMU single transformer

The most common method for supplying padmount transformers in the network is
via ring main switchgear with at least two ring main switches and a switch fuse
(see Figure 5-14). This method enables flexibility of feeder loads and continuity of
supply during minor outages.

5-21
Switching Operator's Manual One

Transformer
Main feeder Main feeder
cable cable

Figure 5-17 Method 1 – Standard RMU single transformer

5.3.2 Method 2 – Single RMU with multiple transformers

In this method, a remote transformer is supplied from a ring main substation (see
Figure 5-15).

There may be problems when the ring main unit has to be isolated. Both the
substation’s transformer and the remote transformer must be fed up on LV circuits
to avoid customer outage.

Ring main
substation

Satellite substation
remote location from
ring main substation Main feeder cables

Figure 5-18 Method 2 – Single RMU with multiple transformers

5.3.3 Method 3 – Overhead supply to transformer

This method is used to connect ground mounted transformers to the overhead

network. Drop out fuses are used (instead of a HV switch fuse) to feed a cable to
the ground mounted transformers (see Figure 5-16).

5-22
 Section Five – HV Distribution – Underground

Drop out fuses Surge diverters Insulators

Main feeder

Cable termination

a. Construction
Overhead
main feeder

Pole top DOF Pole top

switch switch

Cable to
ground mounted
transformer

b. Circuit

Figure 5-19 Method 4 – Overhead supply to transformer

Insulators
Drop out fuses

Feeder
conductors

Cable head

Figure 5-20 Cable pole with drop out fuses

5.3.4 Method 4 – Piggy-back transformers

This section is included as piggy-back transformers have been installed in some

locations. However, it should be noted piggy-back transformers are not approved
for new installations.

5-23
Switching Operator's Manual One

The term ‘piggy-backing’ is used in a HV “tee-off” arrangement where two or more

transformers are switched and protected by a common device upstream. The HV
supply to each transformer loops in and loops out. This is facilitated by providing
two bushings or bushing wells, for each phase winding terminal on the
transformers.

Shown below in Figure 5-18 are the transformer connections in a ‘piggy-back’

arrangement.

200 ECS
elbow cable seal

All fittings shown are ‘Elastimold’

Figure 5-21 Transformer connections in a ‘piggy-back’ arrangement

The last transformer in the HV feed is obviously not looped out, and must have its
vacant or unused bushing of each phase covered by a dead-end receptacle
insulated connector when energised. This is illustrated in Figure 5-19 below.

Dead end
plug

Dead end
receptacle

All fittings shown are ‘Elastimold’

Figure 5-22 End transformer connections in a “piggy-back” arrangement

The Table 5-6 below should be used for piggy-backed transformers supplied with
drop out fuses (DOF). These fuse sizes are required to ensure non-operation of
DOFs for transformer energisation.

5-24
 Section Five – HV Distribution – Underground

Transformers DOF Fuse Size

Piggy Backed Required (K Class)

2 x 500kVA 40A

2 x 315kVA 25A

2 x 315kVA + 1 x 500kVA 40A

Table 5-6 DOF sizes for piggy backed transformers

Piggy-backing increases the risk of loss of supply to a larger number of customers

but a significant cost saving is achieved with fewer HV fuse switches installed in
the system.

5.3.5 Method 5 – Single-phase underground distribution

system

The HV reticulation in the single-phase underground distribution system (SPUDS)

is designed as a single-phase SWER system, operating at 19.1kV.

The system is based on servicing semi-rural residential lots using several 25kVA
single-phase padmount transformers, each servicing up to six customers. Each
transformer is internally fused to protect the system from internal transformer
faults.

The single-phase SWER supply is provided by a single core 35mm² HV

underground cable with a heavy duty copper screen to provide the earth return
path. The single core cable loops in and out of a string of 25kVA transformers
using separate non-loadbreak connectors.

5.3.6 Combination of Methods

An underground or underground/overhead feeder may use several of the

previously stated methods. Figure 5-20 is an example of a combined overhead and
underground distribution network, incorporating feeder circuits from a zone or
regional substation feeding a simplified HV ring main reticulation network. The
different configurations of the ring main units should be noted.

5-25
Switching Operator's Manual One

Substation 1 Substation 2 Substation 3

A B

F1
* F2
F1
Typical substation
F1 F2 ring main board

F2

Overhead
Drop out line
fuse

To zone or regional
substation
transformer F2

Circuit breakers
to main feeders

F3
F3 F2 F2
Zone or regional Drop out fuse
substation C D Substation 7
distribution busbar
* *

*F1 Normally
Feeder 1
open point

Remote
Substation 5 transformer
F2 Feeder 2
F3 Feeder 3
Substation 6

Figure 5-23 Simplified ring main reticulation

In Figure 5-20 substation 1 is being fed via feeder F1, which also feeds through to
open point A at substation 2. Feeder F2 feeds substations 2, 3, and 7, and through
to the open points at ring main switches C and D at substation 5. Feeder F3 feeds
substation 5 and its remote transformer at substation 6. The diagram shows that it
is the open points on feeders that enable flexibility of supply and adjustment of
loads on distribution feeders.

If open point A is moved to B, feeder F1 will take up the load of substations 2, 3,

and 7. The load on feeder F2 then drops to zero. Because open points are located
on the basis of load assessment and convenience, they may need to be changed
from time to time.

Note: The particular types of ring main units are not shown in Figure 5-20. The
switching operator must have local knowledge of the type of ring main unit
and its characteristics when choosing open points and switching
arrangements.

5-26
 Section Five – HV Distribution – Underground

5.4 Switching Procedures

Horizon Power's main switching procedures include planned switching and
unplanned fault switching.

5.4.1 Planned Switching

Before a switching operator commences switching on a ring main system, it is

essential to have the following:

• an authorised switching authority

• up-to-date plans

• an approved switching program registered with HPCC

• the correct PPE, and

• local knowledge.

Standard procedures must be adopted for the safety of the switching operator and
work crews, as well as for the security of the system.

If in doubt, the operator must ASK.

! If still in doubt, STOP!

Ring main switching can be complicated and more technically demanding than
overhead switching because of the inherent layout and concealed nature
underground distribution networks. A switching operator is required to keep
continuous contact with HPCC.

Switching operators must pay attention to the following:

• Ring main switchgear is operated at close quarters. The operator must use all
correct PPE. The second operator must stand outside the substation, holding
the door open while switching is being carried out.

• The operator must know how to operate the switch and its interlocks.
Interlocks on switch fuses are similar to ring main switches, but extra
precautions must be taken when changing fuses.

5-27
Switching Operator's Manual One

• Operations on ring main units are carried out without any visual confirmation
of the circuit route. Only the labels on switchgear and schematic plans are
available. The switching operator must be satisfied that they are operating the
correct switch.

• The switching operator needs to have a mental picture of each operation in

order to know how the operation will affect the distribution system.

Do not rely solely on the program. If the program is faulty, the careless
operator may follow the program blindly, thus operating incorrect items.

Figure 5-21 shows two feeders supplying four ring main units.

Feeder 2

Substation 1

Substation 2
A

Cable
to be
isolated

B
Substation 3

C * Substation 4

Feeder 1 * Normally open point

Figure 5-24 Procedure for isolation of a cable

Planned Switching Example 1 – Feeder cable access

5-28
 Section Five – HV Distribution – Underground

To isolate a cable within the ring main system, the switching operator must be sure
that work can be carried out with safety and system security. Loads must be within
acceptable limits.

The standard way of isolating a cable, and a brief description of what happens in
each operation, are given in the following procedure.

1. In Figure 5-21 when the normally open point C is closed, both feeders are
interconnected. (At this point the fault level will be at its highest.) If a fault on
either feeder occurs at this time, both feeders will trip.

2. Ring main switch B is opened and D–DNO tagged to create the first isolation
point which separates the interconnected feeders and transfers substation 3
from feeder F2 to feeder F1.

3. Ring main switch A can then be opened and D–DNO tagged to create the
second isolation point which de-energises the cable. This arrangement gives
a cable isolated at both ends whilst maintaining supply to all ring main units
and distribution transformers.

If access to the cable is required, earth switches at both ends of the cable must be
applied after proving de-energised.

Normally, restoration follows the reverse of the procedure above, although phasing
out or other testing may be necessary depending on the nature of the work
performed.

Note: If the interconnected feeders are supplied from different substation

transformers, the tap changers will need to be set to manual and the taps
adjusted before interconnection of the feeders. The transformer tap
changers can be returned to auto after the feeders are separated.

Planned switching Example 2 – Access to Substation 3 ring main unit

With reference to Figure 5-22, to access substation 3 ring main unit for
maintenance or replacement, all HV feeder cables and transformer cables
connected to this ring main unit must be isolated at their remote ends. The feeder
cables are isolated and earthed at the remote end ring main units. The transformer
cable is isolated on the transformer LV side.

Important LV switching note:

! When feeding up substation 3 transformer LV load, care must

be taken to ensure that if LV supplied from different HV feeders
is used, it does not remain in parallel for the outage duration.

5-29
Switching Operator's Manual One

Substation 3

Substation 2
* Substation 4

B D
Substation 6

Substation 1

Substation 7
*Substation 5
F1 F2 F3

*M HV
Normally open point
metered customer

Figure 5-25 Ring main isolation at distribution substation

5-30
 Section Five – HV Distribution – Underground

To isolate distribution substation 3 ring main unit shown in Figure 5-22, the
following isolation points are required:

1. Substation 3 – transformer LV disconnector A

2. Substation 2 – ring main switch B

3. Substation 6 – ring main switch C

4. Substation 4 – ring main switch D.

The switching operator must carry out the following steps:

LV interconnection followed by isolation

1. Start by interconnecting to transfer load then isolate the LV supply from the
transformer at substation 3.

a) Interconnect Substation 3 transformer LV as required. (from other

transformers on the same feeder).

b) Isolate Substation 3 transformer at its LV disconnectors at A.

c) De-energise Substation 3 transformer at its HV fuse switch.

d) Prove transformer de-energised at the transformer side of the LV

disconnectors at A.

HV interconnection followed by isolation

1. Close the normally open point at substation 5. (This interconnects F1 and

F3.)

2. Open and D–DNO tag the isolation point D at substation 4. (This breaks the
interconnection from F1 to F3 and moves the load of substation 4 and
substation 5 onto F3.)

3. Open and D–DNO tag the isolation point C at substation 6. (This de-
energises the cable between substation 6 and substation 3.)

4. Open and D–DNO tag the isolation point B at substation 2. (This de-
energises all incoming supplies to substation 3 including its distribution
transformer.)

5. The switching operator should return to substation 3 to check that all

incoming feeds are isolated. This is done by checking the ring main voltage
indicators on the three switches and fuse switch at substation 3.

5-31
Switching Operator's Manual One

6. The switching operator may then prove de-energise and earth each cable at
B, C and D.

7. At substation 3 the switching operator should open the closed ring main
switches (switches to substation 2 and substation 4), then prove de-
energised and close the earth switches on the three switches and the fuse
switch. (This indicates to the work crew that each possible incoming supply
to substation 3 is isolated and earthed.

It must be remembered that this action isolates, but does not earth, the
busbar of the ring main unit.

5.4.2 Fault Indicators

Shown below in Figure 5-23 is a typical ring main switchgear fault indicator which
is fitted on the switch circuits. The L1 (R), L2 (W) and L3 (B) phase flags will drop
to indicate the presence of fault current exceeding the operating current setting.

When pressed, the test button will drop the flags down and when pressed again
the flags will reset. The flags will automatically reset after the period indicated on
the automatic reset time setting (that is, two or four hours).

Operating
current
setting

Phase fault
indicator
Test button

Automatic reset
time setting

Figure 5-26 Ring main unit fault indicator

Fault indicators are installed on the front panel of most ring main unit switches.
These fault indicators have a current measuring device (current transformer)
around the termination bushing of each phase of the ring main switch cables.
Secondary wiring connects the current measuring devices to the front panel
indicator as shown above in Figure 5-23. Normal load current does not operate the
fault indicator, however when fault current flows the corresponding fault phase
indicator will operate.

To determine the fault location the switching operator visits the substations,
inspecting fault indicators to determine passage of the fault current. In the example
in Figure 5-23, all fault indicators up to and including ring main unit 4 have
operated and all fault indicators from ring main unit 5 to the end of the feeder have

5-32
 Section Five – HV Distribution – Underground

not operated. This would indicate fault is located in the cable connected between
ring main units 4 and 5.

Feeder
OCB

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Fault
indicator

Fault indicators operated Fault indicators not operated

Fault

Figure 5-27 Fault location using indicators

Once fault switching or the fault indicators locate the faulted section, the exact
location of the damage must be identified. In most cases, fault location is obvious,
for example, digging or fencing along the cable route. If damage is not visible,
specialist personnel must be called to locate the exact location of the fault.

5.4.3 Fault Switching

Fault switching refers to the isolation and feed up of distribution systems under
fault conditions. This may involve closing switches onto faulted sections of the
system.

Feeders with over 50% cable have their auto reclose relay
taken out of service, due to the risk of further damage to the
cable.
! The switching operator must never attempt a trial reclose if the
auto recloser facility of a feeder is already out of service.

Fault indicators are used to locate the faulted section of the cable. Once the
faulted section is isolated, healthy parts of the feeders can be fed up from other
sources.

Where fault indicators are not operating correctly, the switching operator is
confronted with a difficult situation. The fault must be located by fault switching on
a ring main switch or the feeder circuit breaker. To fault switch on a ring main
switch, the switching operator must first establish that the switchgear is fit for that
purpose.

Horizon Power has designed the network to ensure ring main unit switchgear
ratings exceed the expected fault level, however this assumes the switchgear is in
good working order and operates correctly. To minimise any risk, the switching
operator must conduct pre-operation switchgear visual checks and other available

5-33
Switching Operator's Manual One

checks (such as checking the SF6 gas pressure) or use the alternative method
described below.

Where the switching operator is concerned about closing a particular switch during
fault switching, an alternative method is described below:

1. HPCC open the feeder circuit breaker feeding up to the open point (the
feeder which is going to be used to feed up to the potentially faulted area).

2. The switching operator closes the suspect open point switch under the de-
energised condition.

3. HPCC reinstate the feeder circuit breaker. This means that the circuit
breaker is being used to close onto the fault rather than the suspect ring
main switch. This ensures maximum safety for the switching operator and
reduces possible damage to Horizon Power apparatus.

This procedure may have to be done a number of times along the feeder.
However, the number of operations onto faulted circuits should be kept to a
minimum as high fault currents can cause further damage along the feeder.

When fault switching, the switching operator must remember the following:

• Use correct PPE.

• A fault switching program is required in consultation with HPCC.

• Before operating switchgear, make the standard pre-switching visual

inspections of switchgear and indicators.

• Before performing each switching operation, consider the affect that step will
have on the network.

Refer to Field Instruction – Replacing fuses on the HV/LV underground and

overhead network after a fault has occurred for additional information on the
required checks before replacing fuses.

5.5 Ferroresonance
Ferroresonance may occur in three-phase underground distribution systems when
an unloaded delta/star distribution transformer becomes energised or de-energised
by single-phase switching. Ferroresonance is a problem only when the length of
cable exceeds the critical length for a given transformer.

5-34
 Section Five – HV Distribution – Underground

Tests have shown that excessive phase to earth voltages, 3.3 times the normal
voltage, may be developed in distribution circuits conducive to ferroresonance.
Once developed, they have a steady value that persists for the duration of the
switching operation.

This sustained overvoltage will shorten the insulation life of distribution equipment,
by accelerating its deterioration. Surge diverters, reclosers and distribution
transformers all are prone to the effects of ferroresonance.

Table 5-7 and Table 5-8 show broad guidelines for areas where ferroresonance is
likely to be a problem, that is, where cable lengths longer than those specified are
used.

XLPE cable – System voltage 11kV

Critical cable lengths (metres)

Tx kVA 35 mm2 95 mm2 185 mm2 240mm2 400mm2

63 17 12 9 8 7

160 43 30 24 21 17

315 84 59 46 41 33

500 133 93 74 64 52

630 168 117 93 81 65

1000 267 186 146 129 104

XLPE cable – System voltage 22kV

Critical cable lengths (metres)

Tx kVA 35 mm2 95 mm2 185 mm2 240mm2 400mm2

63 4 3 2 2 2
160 11 7 6 5 4

315 21 15 12 10 8

500 33 23 18 16 13
630 42 29 23 20 16

1000 67 46 37 32 26

XLPE cable – System voltage 33kV

Critical cable lengths (metres)

Tx kVA 50 mm2 – 185 mm2 – –

63 2 – 1 – –
160 4 – 3 – –

5-35
Switching Operator's Manual One

315 8 – 7 – –

500 13 – 11 – –
630 16 – 13 – –

1000 26 – 21 – –

Table 5-7 Critical cable length for ferroresonance – XLPE cable

PILCSWA cable – System voltage 11kV

Critical cable lengths (metres)

Tx kVA 25 mm2 70 mm2 95 mm2 185 mm2

160 18 11 10 8

315 36 23 20 15

500 57 36 33 24
630 72 45 41 30

1000 114 72 65 47

Table 5-8 Critical cable length for ferroresonance – PILCSWA cable

There are two methods to eliminate ferroresonance while switching.

• Method 1 – The transformer may be energised and de-energised by three

phases switching simultaneously (e.g. pole top switch).

• Method 2 – Ferroresonance may also be prevented by the switching operator

connecting load to the low voltage side of the transformer by means of a load
box, to de-energise and energise the transformer when switching single-phase
(e.g. drop out fuses).

Note: The low voltage side of the transformer should be disconnected before
switching the high voltage.

Further details on ferroresonance are available in the Horizon Power Field

Instruction – Ferroresonance in the Underground Distribution System.

5-36
 Section Five – HV Distribution – Underground

5.6 Traps
The switching of underground systems is complex, therefore a high level of
competency is required. The switching operator must be aware of likely traps with
the following tasks and equipment:

• Isolating both ends of the cable before earthing

• Switchgear interlocks
• Switchgear testing facilities
• Not having a mental picture of the circuit
• Ferroresonance
• Maps and diagrams not up-to-date
• Not using meters or indicators
• Lack of local knowledge
• Equipment labelling
• Ring main unit locks
• Voltage indicators.

These problems are examined in detail on the following pages.

5.6.1 Isolating Both Ends of Cable before Earthing

Interlocks are available on ring main units to stop a switching operator earthing a
unit before the switch is opened. However, it is possible to earth a cable which is
energised from the remote end.

To avoid this, the switching operator must make sure that the ring main switches at
both ends of the cable are isolated (off and D–DNO tagged) and the neon
indicators used to prove the circuit de-energised before the earth switch is closed.

5.6.2 Switchgear Interlocks

A variety of interlocking systems are used in different ring main units, some having
more complex interlocks than others. The switching operator must know the
function of each type of interlock before conducting any operation.

The switching operator will find standard operational padlocks on ring main
switches and different earth padlocks on earth switches. Before operation, the
operator must verify the correct padlock is on the appropriate switch. If this is not
done, it is possible to think that they are operating a ring main switch when it is
actually an earth switch that is being operated.

5-37
Switching Operator's Manual One

5.6.3 Switchgear Testing Facilities

Testing facilities on all Horizon Power ring main switchgear are provided to allow
access to and testing of cables. Specialised equipment must be used on some
switchgear to allow testing to be carried out.

5.6.4 Not having a Mental Picture of the Circuit

When switching on an underground system, no visual confirmation of the cable

sections is available. If the switching operator does not keep a mental picture of
the circuit status during switching, potential errors of the switching program are
unlikely to be identified before they occur.

The switching operator must keep a clear mental picture and understand how each
operation affects the total configuration of the circuits being switched.

5.6.5 Ferroresonance

The potential problem of ferroresonance is serious. Therefore, the switching

operator must be aware of the hazard and take all necessary precautions.

5.6.6 Maps and Diagrams not Up-to-Date

As computer systems are used to write planned and fault switching programs it is
essential the computer single line schematic accurately reflects the actual system.

This requires all changes made to the system are accurately recorded and
incorporated into these schematics.

If the switching operator is faced with a situation where the switching program and
the physical system appear to be in conflict, no operations should be carried out
until the conflict is resolved.

5.6.7 Not Using Meters or Indicators

Switching operators should use voltmeters, ammeters and mechanical indicators

to check conditions of the system before, during, and after switching. This
information helps the operator to decide if operations are correct and if problems
are likely to occur.

The condition of the switchgear must also be checked before switching; this
includes checking SF6 gas pressure.

5-38
 Section Five – HV Distribution – Underground

5.6.8 Lack of Local Knowledge

Before switching, switching operators should beware of any peculiarities of the

system or limiting conditions within the locality. If the operator has doubts about
any operation, they should seek advice before switching. Checks should include
the types of switches to be operated and how to access the building where the
switchgear is installed.

5.6.9 Equipment Labelling

Where apparatus is not labelled to the required Horizon Power standard, the
switching operator must be satisfied that the label on the apparatus in question is
accurate and correct for the switching operation. If there are any doubts about the
labelling of apparatus, the switching program is to stop until clarification has been
made.

5.6.10 Ring Main Unit Locks

When performing multiple steps on a single ring main unit, only the padlock on the
switch or earth switch to be operated is to be unlocked. After the switching
operation is complete, the padlock must be replaced and locked before proceeding
to the next switching operation. This action ensures that access to only one switch
is possible at any time.

The switching operator must not identify the switch and earth switch by the type of
lock fitted. Always carefully inspect the front panel to identify the switch and earth
switch. It has been known for the locks to be reversed as a result of taking multiple
locks off and replacing them incorrectly.

5.6.11 Voltage Indicators

Ring main unit voltage indicators must be proven to work before and after (where
possible) switching to prove a cable de-energised.

Where an indicator is not usable, a hand held voltmeter can be used as an

alternative test device to check that no voltage is present on the test sockets
(where fitted), thereby proving that the cable is de-energised.

5-39
 SECTION SIX

Substation
Distribution Feeders

Table of Contents
6. Substation Distribution Feeders ............................................................ 6-1

6.1 Introduction ........................................................................................ 6-1

6.2 Outdoor Distribution Busbar Configurations........................................ 6-2
6.2.1 Outdoor Single Bus ....................................................................... 6-2
6.2.2 Outdoor Single Bus with Transfer Bus ........................................... 6-3
6.2.3 Indoor Single Bus .......................................................................... 6-5
6.3 Circuit Breakers .................................................................................. 6-6
6.3.1 Minimum Oil Circuit Breaker .......................................................... 6-7
6.3.2 SF6 Gas-Insulated Circuit Breakers ............................................... 6-8
6.3.3 Vacuum Circuit Breakers ............................................................. 6-10
6.3.4 Circuit Breaker Control Mechanisms ........................................... 6-13
6.3.5 Circuit Breaker Control Locations ................................................ 6-17
6.3.6 Circuit breaker status indication................................................... 6-23
6.4 Outdoor Substation Disconnectors ................................................... 6-23
6.5 Indoor switchgear safety features ..................................................... 6-24
6.6 Substation AC and DC Power Supplies ............................................ 6-27
6.6.1 AC Local Supplies ....................................................................... 6-27
6.6.2 Battery Systems .......................................................................... 6-29
6.7 Alarm Panels .................................................................................... 6-33
6.8 Voltage Regulation ........................................................................... 6-33
6.8.1 Voltage Regulation Principles ...................................................... 6-34
6.8.2 Tap Changing Transformers........................................................ 6-34
6.8.3 Regulating Relays and Line Drop Compensation ........................ 6-37
6.9 Under Frequency Load Shedding ..................................................... 6-38
6.9.1 HPCC Operation ......................................................................... 6-39
6.9.2 Restoration Procedures ............................................................... 6-39
6.10 Zone Substation Interconnection ...................................................... 6-39

i
Switching Operator's Manual One

6.10.1 Principles ..................................................................................... 6-39

6.10.2 Standard Procedures ................................................................... 6-44
6.11 Zone Substation Fault Switching ....................................................... 6-46
6.11.1 Faults on a Feeder ....................................................................... 6-46
6.11.2 Recharge Spring Charged Circuit Breakers ................................. 6-47
6.11.3 Faulty Operation of Circuit Breakers ............................................ 6-47

ii
 Section Six – Substation Distribution Feeders

List of Figures
Figure 6-1 Outdoor single distribution bus ......................................................... 6-2
Figure 6-2 Outdoor single with transfer busbar .................................................. 6-4
Figure 6-3 Indoor single busbar configuration .................................................... 6-5
Figure 6-4 Minimum oil circuit breaker ............................................................... 6-8
Figure 6-5 Puffer-type SF6 circuit breaker .......................................................... 6-9
Figure 6-6 Indoor Yorkshire SF6 Circuit Breaker.............................................. 6-10
Figure 6-7 Vacuum circuit breaker interrupter .................................................. 6-10
Figure 6-8 Outdoor vacuum circuit breaker ...................................................... 6-11
Figure 6-9 Indoor switchboard with vacuum circuit breakers installed .............. 6-11
Figure 6-10 Indoor vacuum circuit breaker ....................................................... 6-12
Figure 6-11 Cross-sectional view of a typical indoor switchboard .................... 6-12
Figure 6-12 Circuit breaker mechanism box showing closing springs .............. 6-13
6-13 Typical positioning of DC Isolator on Control Panel. ................................ 6-15
6-14 Schneider RM6 ........................................................................................ 6-16
6-15 Schneider Flusarc. ................................................................................... 6-16
Figure 6-16 The typical SCADA system (simplified) ......................................... 6-18
Figure 6-17 Typical substation human machine interface ................................ 6-19
Figure 6-18 Outdoor feeder panel controls....................................................... 6-20
Figure 6-19 Indoor switchgear feeder control panel ......................................... 6-22
Figure 6-20 Typical outdoor circuit breaker mechanism box ............................ 6-22
Figure 6-21 Feeder circuit disconnector ........................................................... 6-24
Figure 6-22 Shutters inside circuit breaker cubicle ........................................... 6-26
Figure 6-23 Typical voltage indicator ............................................................... 6-26
Figure 6-24 415V AC local supply changeover boards .................................... 6-27
Figure 6-25 Typical substation transformer ...................................................... 6-28
Figure 6-26 Single line circuit ........................................................................... 6-30
Figure 6-27 Typical battery chargers and banks .............................................. 6-31
Figure 6-28 Typical substation battery paralleling panel................................... 6-33
Figure 6-29 Circuit showing the principle of automatic voltage regulation ........ 6-34
Figure 6-30 Substation transformer showing tap changer mechanism box ...... 6-35
Figure 6-31 Tap changer mechanism box showing controls ............................ 6-36
Figure 6-32 Automatic voltage regulator / tap change panel ............................ 6-37
Figure 6-33 Typical AVR relay ......................................................................... 6-38
Figure 6-34 Transformer interconnections ....................................................... 6-40

iii
Figure 6-35 Transformers with different tap settings ......................................... 6-41
Figure 6-36 Two ways of interconnecting transformers .................................... 6-45

iv
Section Six – Substation Distribution Feeders

List of Tables
Table 6-1 Circuit breaker control locations ....................................................... 6-17
Table 6-2 Implications of losing substation local supply ................................... 6-29

v
6. Substation Distribution
Feeders

6.1 Introduction
The zone substation transforms high voltage transmission power to lower voltages
for local distribution. Typically, the substation's high voltage input is either 66kV or
132kV, while the lower voltage output varies between 11kV and 33kV.

In Pilbara Grid the components of zone substations include incoming transmission

lines, transmission busbars, transmission circuit breakers and disconnectors, zone
substation transformers, voltage transformers, current transformers, distribution
busbars, distribution circuit breakers and disconnectors, relays and control
apparatus.

In microgrid systems the distribution busbar is supplied from generator step up

transformers or express power station feeders rather than transformers connected
to the transmission network.

This section examines only those components associated with the operation of
distribution feeders. This includes outdoor and indoor busbar configurations, circuit
breakers, local and battery power supplies, alarm panels, voltage control
mechanisms and under frequency load shedding.

The operation of this equipment is complex. Therefore, the principles of

interconnecting zone substation transformers and the procedures for fault switching
are also included.

The Horizon Power Switchgear Instruction Manual provides detailed photographs

and descriptions for the operation of specific switchgear. The manual should be
consulted by switching operators to ensure the correct methods and sequences are
used. This is particularly important for switchgear with significant interlocking such
as indoor switchgear.

6-1
Switching Operator's Manual One

6.2 Outdoor Distribution Busbar

Configurations
The busbar is the connection point from the zone substation transformer to the
outgoing circuits (distribution feeders). Horizon Power uses two types of busbar
configuration for outdoor zone substations:

• single bus, and

• single bus with transfer bus.

6.2.1 Outdoor Single Bus

The single bus configuration is the simplest form of substation. Single bus outdoor
substations supply feeders from one common busbar (see Figure 6-1 below). One,
two or three transformers are used, depending upon the load and required level of
system security. The single busbar is broken into sections with busbar
disconnectors. This allows several transformers to feed different parts of the busbar
separately, or one transformer to feed the whole busbar.

Outdoor single
distribution busbar

Busbar
disconnector 5xx.4

Circuit
breaker 5xx.0

Circuit
disconnector 5xx.5

Figure 6-1 Outdoor single distribution bus

Each feeder circuit breaker has disconnectors on each side to provide a visual
break for isolation of circuit breakers and feeders. Some substations provide only
one disconnector on the busbar side of the circuit breaker.

6-2
 Section Six – Substation Distribution Feeders

There are two main disadvantages of single bus configuration:

• its operation is not as flexible as other types of bus configurations, and

• feeder loads need to be arranged to ensure that the transformers are
reasonably balanced where the busbar is split using the busbar
disconnectors.

6.2.2 Outdoor Single Bus with Transfer Bus

The single bus with transfer bus substation is most commonly used in rural areas.
The same principle as the single bus configuration applies. The only difference is
that a second busbar or transfer bus is added to the outgoing side of the feeder
circuits. The transfer bus is used to interconnect feeder circuits within the
substation, making it unnecessary to interconnect feeders on the distribution
overhead circuits.

The use of the transfer bus is clearly shown in Figure 6-2. Where WFD 506.8 and
WFD 508.8 are closed, and WFD 506.0 is opened, the Bailey feeder is effectively
transferred to the Hamilton Rd feeder via the transfer bus.

The breaker WFD 506.0 may be taken out of service with further isolation (open
WFD 506.5 and WFD 506.4). This does not require major interconnection of the
distribution system. The method is flexible, saves time and makes the operation
quite simple.

Note: Before attempting to transfer one feeder onto another, the switching
operator must determine the combined loads. Check that the circuit breaker setting
is capable of carrying the extra current.

6-3
Switching Operator's Manual One

single busbar
Indoor
Outdoor single busbar
with transfer busbar

Hamilt on
Road
Bayley
Transfer
busbar
Outdoor

busbar
main

Figure 6-2 Outdoor single with transfer busbar

and indoor single busbar configurations

6-4
 Section Six – Substation Distribution Feeders

6.2.3 Indoor Single Bus

Indoor single busbar substations have a similar configuration to the outdoor

equivalent. However, the indoor substation has withdrawable (rackable) circuit
breakers which provide a visual break for isolation in place of the disconnectors in
the outdoor substations.

Withdrawable Indoor single Bus section

circuit breakers busbar A1 busbar circuit breaker

Earth Voltage
switches transformers T4 incomer

Bus section Indoor single

circuit breaker busbar A2 busbar

T5 incomer

Figure 6-3 Indoor single busbar configuration

In indoor single busbar configurations all circuit breakers are attached to one
busbar (see Figure 6-3). There may be bus section circuit breakers along the
busbar's length, to split the bus as required (see PCK 512.0 and PCK 517.0 in
Figure 6-3, top and bottom respectively). This differs from outdoor substations that
use disconnectors for this purpose.

If the bus section breakers are closed, all feeder circuit breakers can be fed from
the one transformer. If the load is too high for one transformer, the second
transformer can be turned 'on' and a bus section circuit breakers can be opened.
The load is then split between two or more transformers.

6-5
Switching Operator's Manual One

Earth switches

Earth switch are provided on the cable side of each circuit (e.g. PCK 503.7 in
Figure 6-3 top).

The earth switch closing is spring assisted to ensure rapid earth switch operation
regardless of the speed of operating handle movement.

6.3 Circuit Breakers

Circuit breakers are a major component of distribution zone substations. A circuit
breaker is a fault-make/fault-break rated switch capable of being opened and
closed, while carrying the manufacturer's specified fault currents. It is the main
apparatus used for the connection and disconnection of outgoing feeders from the
substation.

All circuit breakers are designed to create an arc, control it and then destroy it at
the most convenient time. The current flowing through the arc depends upon the
voltage between its ends.

Note An arc is a conductor made up of a body of ionised gas at a high

temperature. Its electrical conductivity compares to graphite.

At the instant the contacts separate in a circuit breaker, the electrons (which make
up the current) attempt to flow through the very small gap of the contact. They
collide with the atoms of the insulation medium and cause the atoms to rapidly
break up as more electrons and energy are released. This raises the temperature
of the contact gap.

This process continues as the contacts open. As the length of the arc increases,
more and more energy is required to sustain it. When the arc lengthens and cools,
it will break quite easily.

In Horizon Power's 50Hz alternating current (AC) system, the current falls to zero at
every half cycle or every 10 milliseconds (ms). This means that, for a brief time,
there will be no electron movement to sustain the arc.

Immediately after zero, the voltage across the contacts attempts to re-establish the
current. If the conducting path of the arc is still present, the current will be re-
established. However, the current will not be re-established when:

• the arc path is too long

• the temperature has dropped sufficiently
• the ionised atoms making up the arc path have been dispersed.
If one or more of these conditions is met, the circuit breaker will successfully break
the current flow.

6-6
 Section Six – Substation Distribution Feeders

In the case of vacuum circuit breakers the contacts separate in a vacuum and
therefore absence of atoms in the vacuum assists in interrupting the arc as the
contact separate.

Horizon Power has the following type of circuit breakers:

• minimum oil circuit breaker

• SF6 gas-insulated circuit breakers
• vacuum circuit breakers.

SF6 and vacuum circuit breakers are used in new substations, as it is cost effective
and provides an acceptable level of operation with reduced maintenance
requirements.

6.3.1 Minimum Oil Circuit Breaker

This type of oil circuit breaker is common in older substations. The circuit breaker
contacts are immersed in a small quantity of insulating oil.

The minimum oil circuit breaker is manufactured to cater for a wide variety of
voltages and breaking capacities this varies the amount of oil required.

A three-phase minimum oil circuit breaker consists of three identical units which are
operated by a common linkage from the single mechanism box. The cross section
of a typical minimum oil circuit breaker is shown in Figure 6-4 below.

The circuit breaker is made up of two sections mounted one above the other. The
upper section is the switching chamber, while the lower section houses some of the
mechanical linkages and insulation to the ground.

The operating cam drives the insulated operating rod and moving contact up to
close and down to open the moving contact and fixed contact.

On opening, the fixed and moving contacts rapidly separate drawing an arc inside
the arc extinguishing chamber which is filled with insulating oil. The action of the
arc extinguishing chamber is to divide the arc into several sections and force it into
cool oil. The result of rapidly lengthening, dividing and cooling the arc extinguishes
the arc.

Closing is a less onerous operation for a circuit breaker because the arc will only
strike at the point where the oil insulation breaks down. As the moving contact is
rapidly moving towards the fixed contact the arc length is continually shortened until
the contacts meet at which time the arcing stops.

6-7
Switching Operator's Manual One

Primary
connection

Oil level
glass gauge

Fixed
contact Moving
contact
Arc
extinguishing
chamber Primary
Moving connection
contact
rollers
Moving
contact
Insulated Operating
operating rod cam

Figure 6-4 Minimum oil circuit breaker

Gas vents with filters are fitted to all circuit breakers to allow free passage of gas
and prevent oil from being thrown out during operations. They are constructed to
prevent moisture entering and contaminating the oil.

The level of oil is most important, as this affects the degree of turbulence caused by
the arc. The oil level glass gauges must be inspected regularly.

The switching operator must report all low oil levels, especially
if one phase is lower than the other two phases.

Operators should not attempt to switch an oil circuit breaker if

! the oil level cannot be seen in the inspection window.

All oil stains or droplets on oil filled equipment should be

referred immediately to the responsible authority. (Often the oil
leak is visible long before the drop in oil is able to be detected.)

6.3.2 SF6 Gas-Insulated Circuit Breakers

The SF6 circuit breaker is a modern type, which is used indoor and outdoor
substations. Shown below in Figure 6-5 is the puffer type circuit breaker in the

6-8
 Section Six – Substation Distribution Feeders

closed position (top view A.) and during opening (bottom view B.). When the circuit
breaker is opening SF6 gas is forced through the separating contact to extinguish
the arc.

Nozzle Fixed piston

Fixed contact A. Moving contact

Arc
B.
SF6 gas
Moving cylinder
compressed

Figure 6-5 Puffer-type SF6 circuit breaker

which uses SF6 gas to extinguish the arc produced on opening.

Its arc quenching function is similar to the minimum oil circuit breaker, but much
more efficient. SF6 gas (sulphur hexafluoride) has better insulating properties than
mineral oil and does not break down under arcing.

The gas is held inside the arc chamber under pressure. If a leak occurs, the switch
will lose part of its switching capabilities. For this reason, Horizon Power's SF6
breakers have a low gas alarm and lockout function built into their operation.

Figure 6-6 shows the indoor Yorkshire SF6 switchboard with a circuit breaker
picture inset. Gas pressure gauges are typically fitted to these circuit breakers.

Where possible, SF6 pressure gauges should be checked before carrying out
switching operations.

Switching operators must not attempt to operate SF6 circuit

breakers that have a low gas alarm initiated.
! The relevant authorities must be notified as soon as possible.

6-9
Switching Operator's Manual One

Feeder circuit
control panel

Gas pressure
gauge

Circuit breaker
inside cubicle

Figure 6-6 Indoor Yorkshire SF6 Circuit Breaker

6.3.3 Vacuum Circuit Breakers

The vacuum circuit breaker is a modern type, which is commonly used in indoor
substation switchboards. Figure 6-7 below shows the circuit breaker interrupter in
the open position. When the circuit breaker is opening, the fixed and moving
contacts separate rapidly causing the arc to lengthen whilst passing through a
vacuum. Because the arc cannot sustain itself within the vacuum, it rapidly
extinguishes.

End flange
Enclosure

Circuit breaker Fixed contact

interrupter
Moving contact

Metallic
End shield bellow

Figure 6-7 Vacuum circuit breaker interrupter

6-10
 Section Six – Substation Distribution Feeders

An example of an outdoor feeder circuit with a vacuum circuit breaker is shown in

Figure 6-8.

Vacuum
interrupter

Feeder cable

Current
transformer
Mechanism
(mech) box

Figure 6-8 Outdoor vacuum circuit breaker

An example of an indoor switchboard with vacuum circuit breakers inside the

cubicles is shown in Figure 6-9.

Feeder circuit
control panel

Feeder circuit
circuit breaker
inside cubicle

Feeder circuit
cable and earth
switch inside
cubicle

Figure 6-9 Indoor switchboard with vacuum circuit breakers installed

6-11
Switching Operator's Manual One

Figure 6-10 Indoor vacuum circuit breaker

Shown in Figure 6-11 is the cross-sectional view of an indoor switchgear, showing

the various components.

Explosion duct
for evacuation
of the gases produced
if an arc should occur
Control panel

Busbars

Rackable
circuit breaker Current
transformer
Front
of Earth switches
switchboard (operation arrowed)

Cables
Voltage
transformer
(if fitted)

Figure 6-11 Cross-sectional view of a typical indoor switchboard

6-12
 Section Six – Substation Distribution Feeders

6.3.4 Circuit Breaker Control Mechanisms

The operating mechanisms of circuit breakers are designed to ensure effective

closing and opening:

• The circuit breaker must close cleanly and quickly, with no hesitation at the
'contact touch'. (This means that the moving contacts are in the 'fully home'
position that firmly latches the circuit breaker closed).
• The holding toggles or latch must be released as the tripping (opening)
device operates, allowing the circuit breaker to open.

Correct opening and closing are most important, for example, when the circuit
breaker is being closed onto a fault where the fault current will be high. The moving
contacts must reach a position which provides ample pressure between the
contacts to prevent 'chatter' and possibly 'welding in'.

The mechanism must be trip-free at all times. It should not be possible for a circuit
breaker to be held closed against an opening operation. For example, when closing
a circuit breaker onto a fault, it will need to trip very quickly.

For distribution circuit breakers the common method of storing energy for opening
and closing the circuit breakers is springs.

Spring Method

There are single-spring and multi-spring closing mechanisms that are charged by
hand or an electric motor.

Manual spring
charging handle
in storage location

Spring charge
handle motor

Manual spring
charging mechanism

Closing springs

Figure 6-12 Circuit breaker mechanism box showing closing springs

6-13
Switching Operator's Manual One

Single Spring

The fully charged closing springs store sufficient energy for one operation. Upon
closing, the spring discharges fully, in turn charging the tripping springs to allow a
trip function. This allows automatic reclose or manual reclose, despite loss of the
auxiliary supply. Spring charging by hand may be carried out if the electric motor
fails to charge the spring.

In most cases, the stored energy of the spring is released by a small electric
solenoid. Spring mechanisms are normally recharged automatically immediately
after a close function.

Multi Spring

When in operation, all spring operated mechanisms for distribution feeders have
pre-charged springs. These are designed to perform a trip-close-trip sequence,
when auxiliary power to the circuit breaker is lost. Although a breaker has no
auxiliary power to charge the spring after locking out, the breaker may be closed to
restore power to a feeder while the supply problem is investigated and rectified.
The circuit breaker also has a trip function in reserve, which is essential when a
circuit is in the faulted condition.

Sometimes, the breaker motor may charge the spring partially or not at all. When
this occurs, the spring must be charged by hand. A typical procedure follows:

1. remove and check the fuse feeding the circuit breaker motor, or switch the
motor 'off'

2. insert the crank handle

3. observe the arrow showing the direction of return

4. the spring is fully charged when the crank handle runs free or reaches a stop
and a click is heard

5. the motor fuse of the circuit breaker must then be replaced or its switch
turned 'on'

6. the circuit breaker may then be operated as required.

There are two major advantages of power operated spring close mechanisms:

• Once the closing operation has been initiated, it may be completed without
any further action by the operator. (This is because its power supply is
independent of the operator. It does not rely on manual force for its
operation).
• The trip-close-trip function allows back up of breaker operation after a trip.

6-14
 Section Six – Substation Distribution Feeders

Drive Motor Spring Charge.

Certain types of Schneider circuit breakers and switches make use of a DC drive
motor to charge the closing spring. This feature is used when remote switching
operations are required using a RTU via SCADA.

The design of the RM6 and Flusarc apparatus does however not include a standard
feature to isolate the DC supply to the drive motor. This is a problem when the
breaker or switch needs to be isolated for the issue of an EAP.

To overcome the problem of the apparatus not having an integrated means to

isolate the DC supply, an external DC isolator is fitted to isolate the DC supply to
the particular breaker / switch.

6-13 Typical positioning of DC Isolator on Control Panel.

The position of the DC isolator in the circuit not only isolates the drive motor, but
also effectively isolates the electrical supply for remote control functioning of the
apparatus.

Operation of the DC isolator must be included in the switching program by the

Switching Operator when isolation of the apparatus is required.

Besides isolating the DC at the isolator as described above, a selection to “local

control” must be made on the apparatus to inhibit remote operation via the RTU of
the breaker or switch.

6-15
Switching Operator's Manual One

6-14 Schneider RM6

6-15 Schneider Flusarc.

6-16
 Section Six – Substation Distribution Feeders

6.3.5 Circuit Breaker Control Locations

Circuit breakers may be controlled from several locations as indicated in Table 6-1
below. The table shows the location, mode, description, control system and
switching preference for each switching position.

Switching
Site Mode Description Control system
preference

Remote SCADA Preferred

Bentley HPCC all CBs
(SCADA) supervisory control location

* HMI all CBs

Remote HMI computer
Outdoor CBs
(Switchroom Relay control panel Used when
(at relay panel)
Relay room) SCADA not
Substation available
Indoor CBs CB cubicle
Local (at control panel) control panel
(at circuit
breaker)
Outdoor CBs CB mechanism Maintenance
(at mech box) box control only

* Note that HMIs are not installed in all substations.

Table 6-1 Circuit breaker control locations

If possible, all switching should be carried out in the remote location, SCADA
switching is the preferred location.

When SCADA switching fails, local switching is necessary. Switching operators

should remember to check ammeters and other indicators before operating the
circuit breaker.

SCADA Control

The SCADA system provides remote monitoring and control facilities for a range of
apparatus in the network. In zone substations the controllable apparatus includes
circuit breakers and transformer tap changers.

This is the preferred operating location for all SCADA controllable apparatus.

On site operation will be required for all manually-operated apparatus such as

disconnectors, earth switches and racking circuit breakers.

Shown below in Figure 6-13 is a simplified SCADA system. The control room client
computers are connected to master station computer when then communicates to
the remote terminal units (RTUs) located at each substation. The RTUs are hard-
wired to the relay racks which can then control and obtain data from the associated
substation apparatus.

6-17
Switching Operator's Manual One

Control room Master station

client computers computers

Various communication
systems

Remote terminal
unit

Relay panel Relay panel

Substation apparatus Substation apparatus

Figure 6-16 The typical SCADA system (simplified)

In Figure 6-13, the red arrows show the path of the control signals to the substation
apparatus. The blue arrows show the path of the data from the substation such as
voltage, current, transformer tap position, circuit breaker status ON/OFF and
equipment alarms. The orange arrows represent the hard wiring in the substation
between the RTU, relay panel and substation apparatus.

Human Machine Interface (HMI) (Remote)

A human machine interface (HMI) is a local substation computer system with a

graphic interface which provides the switching operator a range of capabilities
including:

6-18
 Section Six – Substation Distribution Feeders

• single line representation showing of the substation apparatus status

• switching facilities for apparatus such as circuit breakers and transformer
controls.
• representation of quantities – voltage, current, power, tap position, etc.
• alarms – showing the status of substation apparatus
• events recorder – provides a timed list of events.

The substation operations must still be performed via HPCC except where authority
has been given by HPCC for local operation. Switching operators must make
themselves familiar with the operation of the screen, where these have been
installed in their area.

Figure 6-17 Typical substation human machine interface

6-19
Switching Operator's Manual One

Relay Room Feeder Panel (Remote)

Outdoor feeders circuit breakers may be operated remotely from the feeder control
panel.

Shown below in Figure 6-15 are the instruments that are most likely to be on a
feeder relay panel. They include TRIP-CLOSE control switch, ON-OFF indicators,
load current ammeter, sensitive earth fault control, auto-reclose control, protection
relay, control fuses and protection links.

Note: Interchangeable terms are used in descriptions, labels and circuit breaker
indicator and controls - 'Off/On', 'Open/Close' and 'Trip/Close'.

'Off', 'open' and 'trip' mean the circuit breaker contacts are open.

On' or 'close' means the circuit breaker contact are closed.

Circuit breaker
TRIP – CLOSE
control switch

Circuit breaker
Circuit breaker ON indicator
OFF indicator

Ammeter

Earth fault Auto reclose

control control

Control fuses Protection

links

Protection
relay

Figure 6-18 Outdoor feeder panel controls

The following procedures should be observed for operating outdoor circuit breakers
from remote relay panels and operating indoor circuit breakers from their control
panel:

6-20
 Section Six – Substation Distribution Feeders

• Before operating the circuit breaker, the feeder auto-reclose function (if fitted)
must be disabled (or placed in “manual”). (Where applicable the auto reclose
function must be re-enabled when the circuit breaker is return to service at
the end of switching.

Note: Some feeders have auto reclose permanently disabled because greater
than 50% of the feeder is cable.

• The circuit breaker control switch marked 'trip/close'. The switching operator
turns the knob to the left ('trip') or right ('close'), according to the operation
required. (When released, the switch always returns to a central position).
• Before and after operating the circuit breaker, the ammeter should be
checked. (This ensures that the required operation is complete. For example,
if the breaker is switched 'off', the load drop to zero is shown on the ammeter.

Switching operators should also check other ammeters in the substation that
may provide more information on changes of substation status such as
transfer or load to interconnected feeder).

The maximum demand indicator (MDI) is provided on some ammeters. This

requires an extra needle which stays in the highest position recorded by the
ammeter since the last reset. Be careful to distinguish the MDI needle from the
ammeter needle.

• Circuit breaker indicator lamps are red and green, according to the state of
the breaker:
• red glowing = 'on' (OCB closed)
• green glowing - 'off' (OCB open).
• Controls (and indicators) are provided to disable and enable the sensitive
earth fault and auto-reclose functions.
• Protection relays, links and control fuses are also mounted on the feeder
panel. They provide isolation and protection for the secondary control circuits.

Note: The ON–OFF indicator lamps can fail at any time, and the associated
indication circuit relies on circuit breaker mechanism box auxiliary switches which
can occasionally lose correct adjustment.

The switching operator must not rely on the first look at the lamps, and check all
available indicators such as ammeters and mechanical indicators.

The circuit breaker mechanism mechanical indicators are the most reliable
indicators of the circuit breaker status and should be used by the switching operator
to confirm the circuit breaker status.

The indoor switchgear control panel shown below in Figure 6-16. This circuit
breaker is currently in the ‘off’ position as indicated by the green light glowing.

6-21
Switching Operator's Manual One

Protection Circuit breaker

relay OFF indicator

Voltage Circuit breaker

indicator ON indicator

Circuit breaker Local / Remote

TRIP – CLOSE switch
control switch

Figure 6-19 Indoor switchgear feeder control panel

Circuit breaker mechanism box (local)

The local panel is intended for maintenance purposes and is not used in normal
switching.

To locally operate the breaker, the local /remote switch is to be set to local. This will
prevents operation from a remote position. There may also be mechanical ON and
OFF buttons or control switch; this interacts directly with the mechanical operating
mechanism. Electrical ON and OFF buttons or a control switch use the control
close/trip solenoids to activate the operating mechanism. (see Figure 6-17 below).

Electrical status indicator

Electrical ON and OFF
buttons Green O = OPEN (OFF)
Green = CLOSE (ON) Red = CLOSE (ON)
Red and Blue = OPEN (ON) Blue = spring is charged

Local / remote
switch

Mechanical status
indicator
Mechanical ON and OFF Green O = OPEN (OFF)
buttons
I = CLOSE (ON)
O = OPEN (ON)
I = CLOSE (ON)
Spring charge
status indicator

Spring charge
hand crank socket

Figure 6-20 Typical outdoor circuit breaker mechanism box

controls and indicators

6-22
 Section Six – Substation Distribution Feeders

6.3.6 Circuit breaker status indication

The switching operator should use the circuit breaker mechanical indicator to
confirm the status is “off” prior to operating an outdoor circuit breakers associated
disconnector or racking an indoor breaker. The electrical lamp indicators that are
also available use the circuit breaker’s auxiliary switches and are not considered as
reliable at the mechanical indicators. An example of the mechanical status
indicators is shown in Figure 6-17 above. In some cases the mechanical status
indicator is located on the outdoor circuit breaker poles.

6.4 Outdoor Substation Disconnectors

Air break disconnectors are installed in outdoor substations to provide:

• isolation points
• bus section switches, and
• transfer busbar switches.

Disconnectors are air break switches and have limited current switching capability,
therefore they are not to be used to make or break load current because of the risk
of a flashover.

Disconnector can be used to:

• make and break parallel of transformer secondaries provided the transformer

secondary voltages are equalised
• energise unload sections of busbar or apparatus, and
• make and break parallel feeders on the transfer busbar.

Disconnectors have a manual operating handle and therefore the speed of contact
movement is linked to the speed of the operating handle movement. To reduce the
risk of flashover during opening and closing operations the movement of the handle
must be brisk and continuous.

The pre and post checks conducted by the switching operator when operating a
disconnector are similar to the requirements for pole top switches.

In a switchyard the connection of the operating handle to the earth mat and the
connection to the main earth can be visually inspected by the switching operator
before operation, therefore the installation of a portable operator mat is not
required.

A disconnector can be used as an isolation point where the disconnector contacts

are visually confirmed as fully open and the operating handle is locked with a
Danger–Do Not Operate (D–DNO) tag.

6-23
Switching Operator's Manual One

Shown below in Figure 6-18 is an example of a feeder circuit disconnector and

another as a bus section disconnector.

Bus section Feeder

disconnector Busbar disconnector Circuit breaker

Feeder cable

Current
transformers

Disconnector
operating handle

Figure 6-21 Feeder circuit disconnector

6.5 Indoor switchgear safety features

Indoor switchgear has a number of features to improve switching operator safety.
The features include:

• switchgear interlocks
• busbar and circuit shutters, and
• circuit voltage indicators.

Switchgear Interlocks

Indoor switchgear interlocks are designed to prevent a number of unsafe

conditions. Interlock must not be forced or overridden unless specifically provided
for in the switchgear operating instructions.

Typical switchgear interlocks include:

• the circuit breaker can only be racked out when the circuit breaker is OFF
• the circuit breaker can only be racked in when the circuit breaker is OFF and
cubicle door is closed and secured

6-24
 Section Six – Substation Distribution Feeders

• the circuit breaker cubicle door can only be open when the circuit breaker is
racked out
• the earth switch cannot be closed unless the associated circuit breaker is
OFF and racked out
• the circuit breaker cannot be racked in if the earth switch is ON, and
• the cable cubicle door cannot be opened unless the earth switch is ON. The
means a VT (where fitted) cannot be racked out unless the earth switch is ON
• On some indoor switchboards with capacitor bank CB’s the umbilical cords
need to remain connected to maintain a supply for the Castell key or Sentry
key interlock system timer to operate.

Switchgear interlocks should be considered as a second level

safety measure and are not to be relied on to keep the
switching operator safe under all conditions.

! The first level safety measure requires the switching operator to

be proficient in operating the switchgear and to use the correct
operational sequence so that the interlocks are not normally
encountered.

Note that regardless of the above interlocks, it is still possible

! for a switching operator to earth a live circuit if it is being

backfed from another source of supply.

Bus and circuit shutters

Shown below in Figure 6-19 is the inside of the circuit breaker cubicle with the
busbar and circuit shutters. The busbar and circuit shutters move to cover the
busbar and circuit contacts as the circuit breaker is racked out.

When the circuit breaker is removed from the cubicle, inadvertent access to live
busbar and circuit contacts is prevented by locking and D–DNO tagging the busbar
and circuit shutters in the closed position.

In some cases it’s not always possible to lock and D DNO-tag the shutters to create
an isolation point, when this occurs the CB cubicle door needs to become the
isolation point with the cubicle door locked and D DNO-tag attached. E.g. if a CB
trolley is unavailable and more than one CB needs to be racked.

6-25
Switching Operator's Manual One

Shutter
covering
busbar contacts

Shutter
covering
circuit contacts

Shutter
mechanism locking

Figure 6-22 Shutters inside circuit breaker cubicle

To avoid damage, the shutter mechanism locks must be

! removed before attempting to insert the circuit breaker in the

cubicle and rack it in.

Circuit voltage indicators

Each circuit is provided with voltage indicators which are connected on the circuit
(cable side of the circuit breaker). These indicators are to be used to confirm the
cable is de-energised before the earth switch is closed.

A typical voltage indicator is shown in Figure 6-20.

Test sockets
Voltage indicators

Figure 6-23 Typical voltage indicator

Test sockets are also provided so a multimeter can be used to confirm de-
energisation. After testing to verify the test sockets secondary wiring is internally
connected to correct phase the sockets can use used to phase out using a
voltmeter.

6-26
 Section Six – Substation Distribution Feeders

6.6 Substation AC and DC Power Supplies

Substations requires both a 415V AC power supply to operate ancillary equipment
and a DC supply provided by batteries banks for the operation of protection and
alarms systems.

6.6.1 AC Local Supplies

Substations require a 415V AC supply to operate ancillary equipment such as

battery chargers, transformer tap changers, pumps and fans, circuit breaker spring
and hydraulic charging mechanisms.

For reliability, it is standard practice to have two incoming 415V AC supplies to the
main control panel which has automatic changeover relays. If the supply currently
supplying the substation fails, the change-over contactors swap the substation load
to the alternate healthy supply (see Figure 6-21).

415V 415V
incoming incoming
supply no.1 supply no.2

Changeover Changeover
contactor contactor

Changeover
415V control 415V
incoming fuses incoming
supply no.1 supply no.2

Changeover Changeover
contactor Changeover contactor
relay

Changeover
control
fuses

Figure 6-24 415V AC local supply changeover boards

with simplified circuit shown below.

6-27
Switching Operator's Manual One

As part of routine substation checks, both 415V supplies should be checked to be

healthy and the changeover function activated.

A range of sources is available to provide the 415V local supplies. These include:

• station transformer supplied from the substation busbar

• distribution transformer supplied from a distribution feeder, and
• local 415V generator.

Because of the importance of local supplies, it is a sound operational practice to

provide diversity in the source of local supply, so, where possible, a single fault
does not cause the loss of both local supplies.

Shown below in Figure 6-22 is a typical station transformer.

Figure 6-25 Typical substation transformer

The range of substation ancillary equipment using the 415V AC local supply and
the impact is dependent on a number of factors as indicated in Table 6-2 below.

6-28
 Section Six – Substation Distribution Feeders

415/240VAC Local Supply Usage

Purpose Implication of total loss of local supply

Battery chargers 2 x 110V Delayed impact pending battery discharge.

protection batteries and 1 x 50V
SCADA battery. If protection batteries are not in an adequately charged state, the protection
system
(Usually 2 x 110VDC and 1 x will not function and the switchyard primary circuits will have to be
50VDC, except old switchyards may deenergised
use (or remain deenergised if the switchyard is ‘black’).
2 x 32VDC)
If SCADA batteries go flat, the SCADA control, status indicators, and analog
values will not be available.

Transformer tap changer Immediate impact on voltage control.

control
The secondary distribution HV voltage will not be able to be regulated
automatically. Personnel will have to be dispatched to manually crank tap
changer mechanism.

Transformer cooling – Impact is transformer load-dependent.

oil pump and radiator fans
Dependent on present transformer temperature and pending load profile.
The transformer reverts to its ONAN rating without the availability of the
forced cooling of oil pump and radiator fans. Transformer offloading may be
required.

Relay room air conditioning Impact probably delayed to keep electronic apparatus (protection, SCADA,
etc.) within operating temperature range.

Circuit breaker – Immediate impact if stored closing charge is used.

Spring/hydraulic close charging
systems Spring charge closing – stored spring charge will not be replenished if used.

Hydraulic charge closing – loss of pressure will result in the circuit breaker
not being able to be closed.

General power outlets Immediate impact.

GPOs throughout the switchroom and switchyard will be unpowered.

Lighting Impact dependent on lighting system installed.

Switchyard and switchroom will be in darkness unless DC lighting system is

installed. DC lighting is not installed in old zone substations.

Panel status indicator lamps Immediate impact where indicator lamps supply is derived from the 240VAC
supply.
(ON-OFF indicators)

Table 6-2 Implications of losing substation local supply

Note: Spring charged and hydraulic operated switchgear have stored energy for a
trip-close-trip sequence, that is, the next close operation is stored within the
switchgear mechanism.

6.6.2 Battery Systems

Because the AC supply to a zone substation cannot be guaranteed under all

conditions (particularly during faults), it is essential multiple DC supplies are
provided for protection, alarm and SCADA systems. These systems are designed
to run on various DC voltages including 32V, 50V, 110V or higher.

6-29
Switching Operator's Manual One

Battery Banks

Shown in Figure 6-23 below is the battery charging arrangement. The 415V AC
local supply provides the energy for the battery chargers to charge the battery
banks. The protection, alarm and SCADA systems are connected to the batteries
via DC distribution panels.

Battery Battery DC supply

AC supply
charger bank to protection
from mains
or alarm circuits

Figure 6-26 Single line circuit

Because the protection, alarm, and SCADA systems are connected to the battery
banks they will continue to operate regards of the state of the 415V AC local
supplies.

The length of time the batteries can continue to supply their load without being
charged, depends upon the standing load and rating of the battery bank. Normally,
these banks are designed for a six- to eight-hour load without being charged.
Typically this enables most faults affecting battery charging to be investigated and
appropriate action taken before any battery voltage problems occur.

Different battery voltages are used for different purposes within a substation. The
voltages used may also differ with the age of a substation or the type of equipment
installed.

Newer substations are designed with more elaborate and secure protection
systems. Two 110V battery banks are used for the transmission system and
distribution system (in some case only one battery bank is used for distribution).
50V battery banks are used for alarm systems and SCADA apparatus. (see Figure
6-24.)

Microgrid substations and older substations typically use lower voltage battery
banks for most functions.

Because substation design has changed, switching operators now find different
combinations of battery banks in different substations. Field staff should familiarise
themselves with the types of battery systems used within their local area.

Note: Battery systems are the most important component within a substation. The
battery banks must be kept in good working order to ensure protection systems will
detect fault, and trip the associated circuit breakers under all conditions.

6-30
 Section Six – Substation Distribution Feeders

110V battery bank 110V battery bank 50V battery

and charger No.1 and charger No.2 and charger

Figure 6-27 Typical battery chargers and banks

Problems

The main problems experienced with battery systems are low DC voltage output,
battery earth faults, and loss of AC supply. Any of these problems may cause a
fleeting (intermittent) alarm.

• Low DC voltage output

This occurs for a number of reasons, mainly when the AC supply is removed
from the battery charger, or one or more battery cell fails.

To check the 415V AC supply, a voltmeter may be used, or checks can be

made on the LV fuses. A DC voltmeter must be used to check each cell of
the battery bank. If one or more cells are defective, the cell(s) will be detected
by the low readings on the meter.

• Battery earth faults

Gases are produced and emitted from the chemical reaction within batteries.
If these gases dry and crystallise, leakage current from the battery may track
along the path formed.

If the batteries have been insulated from the earth system of the battery
bank, meters can be installed to measure the leakage current. When the
leakage reaches a certain level, an alarm is triggered.

6-31
Switching Operator's Manual One

Batteries emit explosive flammable gases.

! Naked flames and sparks near battery systems must be avoided

at all times.

• Loss of AC supply

If there is a major dip on the incoming AC supply (for example, faults or LV

changeover board operation), the alarm system may detect this as a
permanent condition and trigger fleeting or transient alarms. If the alarms are
operated, the substation must be inspected and the battery charger must be
checked for operation.

Note: Do not leave a battery charger off for any length of time. If faults are
detected in any battery system, immediate steps must be taken to return the
system to full operation.

Testing

Most battery chargers have a built in test facility. This is usually a switch or push
button that is wired for two functions. When operated, it first removes the AC supply
to the charger and then places a load across the battery bank. This load normally is
a resistive element.

When the switch is put in the test position, the operator should check the voltage
across the battery bank. This can be done by inspecting the voltmeter on the front
of the charger or by placing a DC voltmeter across the battery bank. If the voltage
drops below the battery charger's rating, further investigation must be carried out.

Note: Test facilities on chargers must not be held 'on' for more than 15 seconds at
one time. If held on for longer periods, the load resistors may fail due to overload.

Because test switches remove the AC supply from the charger, an alarm may be
operated. Before any tests are carried out on battery systems, the HPCC should be
notified.

Battery-parallelling boards have been installed in some substations. These allow

isolation of the batteries for maintenance or back up. Where these are installed, an
operation guide is located on the inside door panel. If the battery parallelling board
is unavailable, a separate battery bank should be used to replace the one being
taken out of service.

6-32
 Section Six – Substation Distribution Feeders

110V DC Battery
parallelling switch
110V DC Battery 1 110V DC Battery 2

Voltmeter Voltmeter

Parallelling
instructions

Figure 6-28 Typical substation battery paralleling panel

6.7 Alarm Panels

A variety of alarm panels are used by Horizon Power ranging from local HMI
comprehensive alarm systems used in the microgrid system to minimal local
systems at substation as the alarms are monitored by HPCC.

In many cases the alarms presented to HPCC are grouped or general in description
and a switching operator or other maintenance or protection personnel are required
to attend the substation to determine the specific source of the alarm.

6.8 Voltage Regulation

Voltage regulation is required to maintain relatively constant high voltage feeder
voltages irrespective of variation in transmission voltages and load. On the
transmission system, voltages can vary by up to 10% dependent on load and
system conditions.

Also the feeder voltage drop is caused by the feeder load and the length which
affects the line resistance and reactance. For a heavy load current, the voltage
drop over the feeder is large. For example, a 22kV feeder may have a voltage of
only 21kV after it has travelled 5km from the substation.

6-33
Switching Operator's Manual One

6.8.1 Voltage Regulation Principles

Voltage control requires several components:

• tap changing transformer

• automatic voltage regulating relay, and
• line drop compensation.

The voltage control method used has a voltage transformer (VT) connected to the
secondary side of the transformer which supplies a proportional voltage (around
110V) to the Automatic Voltage Regulating (AVR) relay. The AVR measures this
voltage against a reference set point and if required will activate the tap changer
mechanism to raise or lower the tap position to adjust the secondary voltage.

Typical settings on AVR is 112.5V, which on a 22kV system is 22000/110*112.5 =

22500V.

Primary
132kV – 66 kV

Tap Tap changer

changer mechanism
(TCM) box

Raise Lower
Automatic
Voltage
VT Regulating
22kV/110V Relay (AVR)

110V

Secondary
22kV

Figure 6-29 Circuit showing the principle of automatic voltage regulation

6.8.2 Tap Changing Transformers

The secondary voltages of a transformer can be controlled by changing the ratio of

number of turns between the primary and secondary windings. This involves using
a tap changer to switch in sections of a winding.

Usually, tapping takes place on the higher voltage winding because this is the low
current side compared to the higher current on the low voltage side of the
transformer.

6-34
 Section Six – Substation Distribution Feeders

There are two types of tap changing transformers:

• off-load is used on distribution transformers (pole top and ground mounted

transformers), and
• on-load is used on substation transformers.

The off-load transformer must be disconnected from all sources of supply before
the tap change is made. The tap change is usually done by some operating device,
such as a wheel or handle which is external to the unit.

On-load tap changing transformer circuits are designed to be operated at full load
without interruption to the supply as the tap change occurs. To achieve this, a
special high speed change-over switch is used to move from one tap the next
without interrupting the flow of current.

Shown below in Figure 6-27 is a zone substation transformer with an on-load tap
changer built into the tank. The tap changer mechanism box contains a 415V three-
phase AC motor which can turn in either direction to tap up or down.

Overhead conductors
connected through
bushings to transformer
primary side

Cable box and

cables connected
to transformer
secondary side Tap changer
drive shaft to tap
changer inside
transformer tank

Tap changer
mechanism box
– has mechanical
tap position
indicator

Figure 6-30 Substation transformer showing tap changer mechanism box

This means that some form of compensation is necessary for variations in both the
substation voltage and line voltage.

6-35
Switching Operator's Manual One

Voltage regulating relays may be used in conjunction with line drop compensation,
to give automatic control for on-load tap changing transformers (and distribution
line regulators). Electric control of the tap changer is normally used, however
manual operation of the tap changing mechanisms is also possible, by using a
manually-controlled electric motor or hand-cranked lever. A tap changing
mechanism box with its main component parts is shown in Figure 6-28.

Crank handle
socket

Manual crank
Mechanical tap handle
position indicator
(blank pointer) with
maximum and minimum
tap position indicators (red)
Raise / Lower
switch

Local / Remote
switch

Figure 6-31 Tap changer mechanism box showing controls

Note: When hand cranking, the switching operator must check the motor is
isolated. Before any operation is carried out, the operator must remove the fuses or
turn the motor switch 'off’.

Shown in Figure 6-29 is an automatic voltage regulator/tap changer control panel

located in the relay room. The panel has a solid-state automatic voltage regulator
(AVR) and a digital remote tap position indicator. There are a number of switches
for controlling the operation of the tap changer, including:

• the master / slave / independent / lockout switch, for selecting the operating
mode of the tap changer
• the raise / lower switch, to manually adjust the tap position, and
• the automatic / manual mode switch is used to select the control from the
AVR relay or the manual raise / lower switches.

6-36
 Section Six – Substation Distribution Feeders

AVR relay Tap position

indicator

Out Of Step
indicator
Auto / Manual
switch

Master / Slave / Raise / Lower

Independent / Lockout switch
switch

Figure 6-32 Automatic voltage regulator / tap change panel

6.8.3 Regulating Relays and Line Drop Compensation

A range of electronic automatic voltage regulating relays are used; an example is

shown in Figure 6-30 below.

The AVR relay compares the actual distribution system voltage against the
reference set point which has been stored in the relay. The relay also has a voltage
band setting which allows small changes in the actual voltage either side of the
reference setting without initiating a tap change.

When the voltage moves outside the band the relay starts a timer. If the voltage
remains outside the band for the timer setting (typically around 60 seconds) one or
more tap changes are initiated. This will return the voltage to within the band
around the reference set point. The purpose of the band setting and the timer
reduce unnecessary tap changer operations.

An under-voltage blocking function is used to prevent the automatic voltage

regulating relay driving the tap changer to the top tap when the transformer is
switched off.

These relays also have line drop compensation and metering and event recording.

Line drop compensation (LDC) is a function provided in electronic AVR relays to

adjust the substation voltage to counteract for the feeder voltage drop.

6-37
Switching Operator's Manual One

Figure 6-33 Typical AVR relay

Line drop compensation settings representing the resistance and reactance of the
feeder line are applied to the AVR relay settings. This ensures the line voltage drop
with respect to current is correctly modelled.

For example, as the feeder line voltage drop increases with increasing load, the
LDC function will proportionally reduce the voltage seen by the AVR voltage
sensing circuit. This will cause the AVR to see low voltage, causing the tap changer
to tap up, boosting the substation voltage to compensate for the line voltage drop.

6.9 Under Frequency Load Shedding

Stable power system operation requires the system frequency to be maintained at
nominal 50 cycles per second (49.75-50.50Hz). An imbalance of the power
generated and the load demand will cause the system frequency to deviate from
the nominal. Excess generation causes the frequency to rise and a shortage of
generation will cause the frequency to drop.

6-38
 Section Six – Substation Distribution Feeders

With the loss of a significant amount of generation which cannot be compensated

for by the remaining online generators, the frequency will begin to drop. When the
frequency drops more than a few cycles, serious damage can occur to power
station generation units and the power system can become unstable. Therefore, to
restore the generation/load balance and stabilise the frequency, the load must be
dropped off or shed. This is called under frequency load shedding (UFLS).

The UFLS function is typically incorporated into the electronic feeder protection
relays. The relay settings specify the frequency at which the feeder trips. UFLS
occurs in stages such that additional feeders will trip as the frequency drops lower.

6.9.1 HPCC Operation

HPCC dispatches generation to cater for the expected load and, in unusual
circumstances where a shortage of generation will occur, feeders can be shed by
HPCC to maintain stable system operation. It is normal practice to rotate the
feeders which are off at regular intervals to minimise customer inconvenience
where the generation shortage continues for an expended time.

HPCC must be aware of the substation local supply arrangements to ensure the
local supply is not affected by the load shedding.

6.9.2 Restoration Procedures

Following an UFLS event, HPCC will manage the feeder restoration to match the
available generation.

6.10 Zone Substation Interconnection

This section should be read in conjunction with Section 4.2.13. Interconnection of
zone substation transformers is an area that may be quite involved. The switching
operator must be familiar with the following principles and standard procedures
before attempting interconnection.

HPCC will manage the paralleling of zone substation transformers with the
switching operator carrying out any field switching activities which cannot be
performer remotely from HPCC, e.g. air break bus section switch. The following
material is provided as additional information and explanation.

6.10.1 Principles

Horizon Power transformers vary in size, tap selection and impedance. These
factors, together with feeder loads and capacitor banks, must be considered when
paralleling transformers. This is necessary in order to determine what current will
flow through the interconnecting switch.

6-39
Switching Operator's Manual One

HPCC will manage the paralleling of transformers including setting the taps,
however switching operators must be aware of the issues associated with the
paralleling of transformers.

Certain principles must be applied for the following interconnection tasks

paralleling:

• transformers with feeder load imbalance

• transformers with different tap positions (circulating current)
• different types of transformer
• transformers with capacitor banks in service.

Paralleling Transformers with Feeder Load Imbalance

When transformers are interconnected at a zone substation, the current flow will
change on each circuit, according to transformer impedance and secondary
voltage. When two transformers of equal impedance and voltage are paralleled,
their loads will balance (see Figure 6-31). Each transformer will feed half the total
load of the combined circuit. (The current flowing through the bus coupler is also
shown).

400A 200A 300A 300A

100A

Outgoing feeders Outgoing feeders

a. Unbalanced b. Balanced

Figure 6-34 Transformer interconnections

Paralleling Transformers with Different Tap Positions

(Circulating Current)

The previous principle holds only if both transformers have the same output
voltage. If the voltage is different, it is more difficult to calculate the load that each
transformer will supply. Circulating current will develop between the transformers
and increase with voltage difference. It also alters the current through the
interconnecting switch.

The circulating current's power factor is very different from the load current. This
means that operations on transformers with voltage differences must be limited.

6-40
 Section Six – Substation Distribution Feeders

Figure 6-32 shows two transformers connected together with different tap settings
(voltage outputs).

Circulating
current

22kV 23kV
Tap 5 Tap 6
300A 400A

See Note

Figure 6-35 Transformers with different tap settings

Note: The following values are presented as a guide to switching operators.

For 22kV zone substations, where transformers are one tap out of step,
approximately 50 amps circulating current flows between the transformers when
paralleled.

Therefore, if the transformer is three taps out of step, the circulating current will be
approximately 150 amps.

For 11kV zone substations, each tap difference results in approximately 100 amps,
when transformers are paralleled.

Paralleling Different Types of Transformers

Horizon Power uses different types of zone substation transformers in its

transmission network. The transformers vary in make, size, type of tap selection
and impedance. When paralleling zone substation transformers at the one location,
switching operators must be aware of the load transfer resulting from transformer
differences.

Case 1

Some zone substation transformers may have different tap change mechanisms or
different tap step ratios. (This may be due to different makes).

Before paralleling, switching operators must check each transformer to establish

any tap change differences of ratio or position. This is done by comparing the
nameplates of both transformers. The transformers may have to be switched to the
same ratio before paralleling can be attempted.

6-41
Switching Operator's Manual One

Case 2

Zone substations are normally designed to have two or three transformers of the
same size, for example, two 20/27 MVA or two 10/13 MVA units.

Where two transformers of different sizes are installed at the same substation,
transformer loads will not balance if they are paralleled. Depending upon feeder
loads, the imbalance may cause high currents to flow through the interconnecting
switch.

This imbalance may be calculated using the following mathematical formula. (MVA
and impedance values are indicated on each transformer's nameplate).

MVA1
Tx 1 impedance
Tx 1 load = Total load by
MVA1 MVA 2
+
Tx 1 impedance Tx 2 impedance

Example

Tx1 = 20MVA
Tx2 = 10MVA
Tx1 and Tx2 = 10% impedance
Substation Total Load (load between transformers being interconnected)
= 800 Amps

20
Tx load = 800 by 10 = 533.3 Amps
20 10
+
10 10
Therefore,

Tx1 20 MVA = 533.3 A

Tx 2 10 MVA = 266.6 A

Note: If three transformers are in service, the given substation total load refers
only to the load of the two transformers being interconnected.

Case 3

Different types of transformers may have different impedances. When switching,

the switching operator should check impedances by inspecting each transformer's
nameplate.

6-42
 Section Six – Substation Distribution Feeders

Switching operators may be required to parallel transformers with different

impedances. The previous formula indicates that the impedance difference of each
transformer affects the load each transformer will take when paralleled.

Example
Tx1 and Tx2 = 20 MVA
Tx1 = 8% impedance
Tx2 = 12% impedance
Total Substation Load = 800A

20
8
Tx 1 load = 800 A by = 480 A
20 20
+
8 12
Therefore,
Tx2 load = Total load – Tx1 load
= 800A – 480A
= 320 amps
This example shows the load expected on each transformer, given ideal conditions
of the same size and tap ratio for each transformer. However, this condition may
not occur as there may be out of step tap changers.

Note: Cases 1, 2 and 3 demonstrate that transformers may not evenly share load
when paralleled. This may cause higher than normal currents to pass through the
interconnecting switch.

Capacitor Banks

Where paralleling is being carried out on an outdoor 22kV air break bus section
switch, the switching operator may have to remove the capacitor from service
before commencing any switching operation. This is necessary only when the load
on the section of transformer bus (with the capacitor installed) is less than 8 MVA
(209 amps at 22kV).

This action must be carried out to make sure that the power factor of the bus
section load with the capacitor does not differ significantly from the other section.

Note: Capacitor operation is of no concern in substations that have circuit breaker

bus section switches.

6-43
Switching Operator's Manual One

6.10.2 Standard Procedures

Circulating current, out-of-balance current and transformer characteristics must all

be considered when interconnecting transformers. The switching operator must
also select which interconnection point is best suited for the particular purpose.

Interconnection of Two Zone Substation Transformers at

Different Substations

Distribution interconnection is usually carried out for load movement on feeders.

Normally, substations are some distance apart (over 2km on each feeder).
Experience demonstrates that the overhead lines, used during the interconnection,
have enough impedance to limit any circulating current or out-of-balance current.
Therefore, when carrying out this operation, it is not necessary to alter, or set to
manual, the tap setting on each zone substation transformer. (Extreme voltage
differences may require tap adjustment).

The exception to this is when feeders which are 50% or more cable are being used
for interconnection. Tap changers at both substations must be put in manual.
Voltage checks should be made to determine whether both feeds have
approximately equal voltages.

Interconnection of Two Zone Substation Transformers at the

Same Substation

If interconnection is carried out in areas more than two kilometres out on each
feeder, the previous principle still applies.

If interconnection is close to the substation (within two kilometres), the switching

operator must consider circulating current, out-of-balance current and voltage
difference.

Shown in Figure 6-33 are two ways of interconnecting transformers at the same
substation:

• a bus coupler/bus section switch, and

• a pole top switch.

6-44
 Section Six – Substation Distribution Feeders

300A 300A

Bus coupler
1
Bus section switch

2 Pole top switch

2
between feeders

Figure 6-36 Two ways of interconnecting transformers

Pole Top Switch

Because of the problems already identified, there are limitations on how a pole top
switch can be used within two kilometres of a substation. However, if the following
three circumstances apply, pole top switches may be used:

• Both zone substation transformers are put on 'manual' and set to equivalent
tap or voltage output. (Transformer nameplates should be checked if the
switching operator is unsure of voltage outputs. This ensures the same
voltage output when transformers are paralleled).
• Both zone substation transformers have approximately the same load.
• Any out-of-balance transformer load can be easily picked up on the
interconnecting feeders with no overloading occurring.

Bus Coupler/Bus Section Switch

If the above circumstances do not apply, the bus coupler/bus section switch must
be used to interconnect and break interconnection during operations.

This means that any circulating current, or high out-of-balance current, will flow
through the busbar and not a feeder circuit. The following procedure should then be
adopted:

1. set the tap change switches to 'manual'

2. manually set taps to the appropriate tap setting
3. close the bus coupler/bus section switch
4. close the normally open point pole top switch
5. open the new pole top switch for the work required
6. open the bus coupler/bus section switch
7. set the tap change switch back to 'auto', and make sure that the voltage
levels stabilise.

6-45
Switching Operator's Manual One

When manually setting taps, switching operators should remember that the
substation output voltage changes with changing tap position. It may be necessary
for the operator to reduce the taps on one transformer and increase the taps on the
other, to be able to parallel successfully. This action changes the voltage on the
outgoing feeders.

Note: When adjusting taps, switching operators should not change the tap setting
by more than two taps either way.

Circulating current occurs if the taps are not exactly equal. To limit this,
transformers should not be paralleled, if their final tap selection is more than two
taps out for 22kV or one tap for 11kV. This, together with the tap limit above, results
in the following overall guide.

Note: If transformers are six taps out of step for 22kV, or five taps out for 11kV,
the switching operator should not interconnect until alterations to the system are
completed.

Taps can be brought closer together by either altering the load on the transformers
(load movement) or by switching out capacitor banks. In most circumstances, it is
better to move the load.

6.11 Zone Substation Fault Switching

Depending on the design of the zone substation, operators are likely to find a large
variety of different fault situations to handle. Only those areas directly concerned
with distribution feeders are examined here. Areas affected by transmission circuit
problems are examined in the Horizon Power Switching Operator’s Manual Two.

The procedures for fault switching examined here include:

• faults in a feeder
• recharging a spring assisted circuit breaker
• faulty operation of a circuit breaker.

6.11.1 Faults on a Feeder

All feeder faults are managed by HPCC.

If switching operators are concerned about any operations on feeder switchgear for
any reason (fear of flashover, etc.), the operation should not be attempted. The
feeder circuit breaker should be tripped and the switchgear should be operated in a

6-46
 Section Six – Substation Distribution Feeders

de-energised condition. (Switchgear includes pole top switches, ring main units,
etc.).

Because most of Horizon Power switchgear is rated for fault switching (to
sectionalise and test for fault location), it should not normally be necessary to trip
feeders under these conditions.

If a transient fault is suspected, a trial reclose may be carried out. The procedure
for this is given in Section 4.5.2

6.11.2 Recharge Spring Charged Circuit Breakers

Spring charged circuit breakers have a trip-close-trip function. If the circuit breaker
trips on fault, it still has close and trip functions in reserve before its springs need
recharging.

If the trip-close-trip function has been used, and no LV supply is available, the
operator must recharge the springs manually. Normally, a crank handle is inserted
into the appropriate socket and winding (in the direction indicated on the gear
wheel), until the handle runs free or the spring latches. The circuit breaker may
then be operated normally.

The switching operator should consult the Switchgear Instruction Manual (SIM) as
required if this hand charging is required.

Note: Spring charging can be carried out with the busbar or circuit energised.
After the springs are fully charged the circuit breaker can be operated normally
from a remote location.

6.11.3 Faulty Operation of Circuit Breakers

At times, switching operators find that a circuit breaker malfunctions during

operation. The breaker may fail to operate at all, or close and trip (fire through) in
the one operation.

If the breaker fails to operate, the following checklist may be used to solve the
problem.

6-47
Switching Operator's Manual One

Outdoor Spring Charged Breakers

1. If the breaker does not operate, check the auto reclose switch is on 'manual'.

2. Check whether the springs are charged within the breaker drive box. If
discharged, check the AC motor fuses. Manual charging may be needed.

3. If the operation still does not work, check the control supply fuses.

4. If the circuit breaker fires through (does not latch closed and trips) during the
close operation, check the relay panel for flags which have not been reset or
relays which may not reset themselves.

Indoor Spring Charged Breakers

1. Complete all checks for the outdoor spring charged circuit breakers.

2. Check the interlocks on the circuit breakers, to make sure they are fully home
in the correct position.

3. Check that the breaker is racked up into the correct position and the auxiliary
contacts are connected .

DC Drive Motor Spring Charged Breakers / Switches.

1. Ensure that the DC supply is healthy.

2. Ensure that the DC circuit isolator is closed.

6-48
Switching Operator's Manual One

 Labels on the cable circuits not conforming to the drawings

The switching operator must check whether the cable circuit labels conform
to the drawings. Before proceeding with switching, the operator must know
exactly what is being interconnected or isolated.

 Corroded connections

If the connection to be used for interconnection is corroded, poor

connections may result. This may cause fluctuating volts or loss of supply.
Before installing fuses/links, the operator must inspect the connections to
make sure they are serviceable.

 Fuses continuity

Before installation on underground systems, the operator must check fuse

continuity to ensure they are serviceable.

 Interconnected LV circuits

At the completion of a switching program, the switching operator must

ensure LV circuits have not been left interconnected.

 Installing more than one set of fuses along the LV underground circuit

Fuses must be installed only at the source of supply of LV underground

circuits. If fuses are graded along the length of the circuit, fault finding
becomes difficult.

 Air break LV circuit breakers

Where a circuit breaker is used on the LV side of a large transformer (see

Figure 3-15 above), the switching operator must check the mechanical
indication to verify the circuit breaker status as the internal contacts are not
visible. If the circuit breaker is rackable it must be racked out to create an
isolation point.

 Shorting busbars

When performing LV board switching operations, the switching operator

must ensure loose objects on the top of the switchboard or in pockets,
cannot fall and short circuit the busbars or contacts.

3-32
 SECTION SEVEN

Distribution Protection
Table of Contents
7. Distribution Protection ............................................................................ 7-1
7.1 Introduction ........................................................................................ 7-1
7.2 Protection Zones ................................................................................ 7-1
7.3 Distribution System Protection Equipment .......................................... 7-2
7.3.1 Fuses ............................................................................................ 7-3
7.3.2 Current and Voltage Transformers ................................................ 7-5
7.3.3 Relays ........................................................................................... 7-7
7.3.4 Principles of Time/Current Protection .......................................... 7-17
7.3.5 Reclosers .................................................................................... 7-18
7.3.6 Sectionalisers .............................................................................. 7-20
7.3.7 Operation of the Recloser Sectionaliser Combination .................. 7-20
7.4 Protection of Typical Distribution Feeders ........................................ 7-20
7.4.1 Fault on Single-phase Fuse Protected Spur Line ........................ 7-21
7.4.2 Fault on Section of Main Feeder Past Recloser........................... 7-22
7.4.3 Fault on Single-phase Recloser Protected Spur .......................... 7-22

i
Switching Operator’s Manual One

List of Figures
Figure 7-1 Zones of protection ........................................................................... 7-2
Figure 7-2 Location of protection equipment in distribution system..................... 7-3
Figure 7-3 Minimum operating current ................................................................ 7-4
Figure 7-4 Location of current transformer in feeder ........................................... 7-5
Figure 7-5 Current transformer ........................................................................... 7-6
Figure 7-6 Voltage transformer ........................................................................... 7-6
Figure 7-7 Relay single line diagram .................................................................. 7-7
Figure 7-8 Operation circuit for protection relay .................................................. 7-7
Figure 7-9 Digital relay – with multiple elements................................................. 7-9
Figure 7-10 Inverse time/current curve ............................................................. 7-10
Figure 7-11 Distribution feeder protection ......................................................... 7-11
Figure 7-12 Out-of-balance earth fault tripping ................................................. 7-12
Figure 7-13 Example of parallelling feeders ..................................................... 7-13
Figure 7-14 SEL351 relay................................................................................. 7-14
Figure 7-15 SEL351 protection indication ......................................................... 7-16
Figure 7-16 Correct discrimination.................................................................... 7-17
Figure 7-17 Inverse time/current operating characteristic grading .................... 7-18
Figure 7-18 Typical overcurrent curves for a recloser ....................................... 7-19
Figure 7-19 Protection of typical distribution feeder .......................................... 7-21
Figure 7-20 Time/current characteristics of a circuit breaker ............................ 7-22

List of Tables
Table 7-1 Typical minimum tripping currents ...................................................... 7-9
Table 7-2 SEL351 LED indicator interpretation and reporting ........................... 7-15

ii
7. Distribution Protection
7.1 Introduction
This section describes the principles and operation of distribution feeder protection.

Electrical power in Horizon Power's system is transmitted and distributed via a

three-phase system. In rural areas involving vast distances, a single-phase system
is often used for final distribution.

The phase conductors are insulated (normally done by insulators on poles) from
the ground and from each other. If the insulation fails, the power will not flow to the
load but will flow as an uncontrolled short circuit to earth or other phases. These
faults may cause damage to plant, interruption of power to customers and loss of
revenue.

Protection equipment is added to the system to limit the effects of these faults.
Various devices are designed to:

 protect personnel

 detect all faults quickly, so they can be disconnected from the system

 minimise damage to all apparatus, such as transformers, feeders, etc., and

 ensure maximum reliability of supply by removing only the faulted section of

the power system. This means the minimum number of customers are
affected by the fault.

7.2 Protection Zones

The whole power system must be protected. This is achieved by dividing it into
zones. If a fault occurs in a particular zone, only the protection system covering that
zone should operate. Those systems relating to other zones should not operate. In
some cases, adjacent zones may operate after a preset time-delay, to provide
backup.

Protection zones enable the protection equipment to disconnect only the faulted
zone. Any fault occurring within a zone will cause circuit breakers, reclosers or
fuses in that zone to operate and trip. When this happens, protection equipment in
other zones should not operate.

Zones of protection are shown in Figure 7-1. Earth fault protection for a zone
substation may extend through several zones.

7-1
Switching Operator’s Manual One

Busbar
protection
Feeder protection
Feeder circuit
Transformer
protection

Zone substation

Feeder spur
protection
Pole top
transformer
protection

Pole or pillar
fuse protection
(if fitted)

Meter fuse

Customer
protection

Figure 7-1 Zones of protection

7.3 Distribution System Protection

Equipment
The distribution system commences at the zone substation, where a number of
radial feeders start. Each distribution feeder picks up load through distribution
transformers (pole top or ground mounted). The main protection control for these
feeders is the circuit breaker at the zone substation.

The protection devices for feeders detect the existence of a fault, generally by
measuring overcurrent. (Overcurrent is a higher-than-normal current which is above
a preset value). Each device's operating time is determined by its operating
characteristic and the amount of fault current.

7-2
 Section Seven – Distribution Protection

Protection equipment for the distribution system includes current and voltage
transformers, circuit breakers, reclosers, sectionalisers, fuses and relays. Figure
7-2 shows the location of protection equipment in a distribution system.

415V Customer
main board

22kV

Substation
busbar

Current
Ring main
transformer
substation

Circuit Sectionaliser
breaker S

Recloser

DOF

Pole top
transformer

Open
Trip
O/C
timer
Counter Meter
O/C
O/C and 415V
E/F relay Trip fuse
and
and
E/F Trip close
relay relay
Customer
Counter Lock
out

Figure 7-2 Location of protection equipment in distribution system

7.3.1 Fuses

Fuses consist of:

 a fusible element

 an arc quenching medium, and

 a suitable enclosure.

The fuse operating time decreases as the overload or fault current increases. This
is called the inverse time/current characteristic (see Figure 7-3).

7-3
Switching Operator’s Manual One

Time

T2

I1 I2 Current

Figure 7-3 Minimum operating current

For current I1, the operating time is very high. This value is usually called the
minimum operating current.

For current I2, the corresponding fuse operating time is T2. This is the time taken
for the fuse element to clear the fault. The larger the current flowing through the
fuse, the faster the fuse operates.

Horizon Power uses different types of fuses, the most common being HV drop-out,
HV HRC fuses and LV HRC fuses.

High voltage expulsion drop-out fuse

This is the most common type of fuse found in Horizon Power's high voltage
overhead distribution system.

It consists of a fusible element inside an insulating barrel. A flexible tail is brought

through the opening at the lower end of the barrel and attached to a hinged
assembly.

Fault current will cause the fuse element to melt and the barrel assembly to swing
down.

High voltage HRC fuse

HV high rupturing capacity (HRC) fuses are used in the fuse switch of ring main
switchgear for transformer protection.

It is a porcelain tube containing a fuse element. The tube is filled with silica powder
and sealed.

When the operating current causes the fuse element to blow and the silica powder
surrounding it to melt, a glass shield forms around the element. The striker pin is

7-4
 Section Seven – Distribution Protection

released through the end cap. This is designed to trip the three-phase switch in the
fuse switch.

Low voltage HRC fuses

This fuse is also silica powder-filled but does not have a striker pin. Usually, its fuse
element is made from pure silver wire or strip.

HRC fuses are designed to operate very quickly and under extreme short circuit
conditions.

7.3.2 Current and Voltage Transformers

Horizon power’s high voltage system voltages range from 11kV to 220kV. Currents
extend up into hundreds of amps under normal conditions and thousands of amps
under fault conditions.

It is not possible to connect the small, delicate relays into these high voltage/high
current circuits. The currents and voltages must be reduced to manageable levels
before connection is possible. Current transformers reduce current. Voltage
transformers reduce voltage to acceptable levels.

Current transformers are inserted in series with the circuit. They develop a
secondary current that is a small fraction of the line current. (Under normal
conditions this secondary current is a few amps, but under fault conditions it will be
much higher – up to 100A).

The location current transformers on outdoor feeders is shown in Figure 7-4 and
the CT primary and secondary circuits in Figure 7-5.

Current Circuit
transformer breaker Disconnector

Busbar
Feeder
cable

CT secondary
wiring

Figure 7-4 Location of current transformer in feeder

7-5
Switching Operator’s Manual One

Voltage transformers are connected between phases or from phase to earth. They
reduce the phase to phase voltage to 110V (phase to earth 63.5V) .

Relays handle these reduced voltages and currents quite easily.

A voltage transformer is shown in Figure 7-6.

Primary 22kV
circuit

Current
transformer

Secondary
circuit wiring

Figure 7-5 Current transformer

Primary circuit
connections

Voltage
transformer

Secondary
circuit wiring
Fig 7-4 –– VT

Figure 7-6 Voltage transformer

7-6
 Section Seven – Distribution Protection

7.3.3 Relays

Most relays measure the current or voltage, or sometimes a combination of both, to

detect faults. Relays are also built to operate with gas pressure or electrical
frequency, for example, the transformer Buchholz relay or under frequency load
shedding (UFLS) relays.

The relay operates contacts when the input reaches a preset level or condition. The
circuit breaker is then directly tripped by the output contact or may be indirectly
tripped via the trip relay.

The electrical power required to trip the circuit breaker (or operate trip relays) and
alarms is supplied by a substation battery system.

Figure 7-7 shows the relay input and output functions.

Input Output

Battery
Voltage or current
being monitored
Alarm or
trip circuit

Coil Output
contact

Figure 7-7 Relay single line diagram

Figure 7-8 shows how the relay output contacts are wired to the circuit breaker trip
coil. Relay output contacts can also be used to activate alarms.

Substation

Circuit Current
breaker transformer
Feeder

Trip
coil
Overcurrent
relay
Battey

Trip circuit

Figure 7-8 Operation circuit for protection relay

7-7
Switching Operator’s Manual One

Overcurrent and earth fault protection schemes

Overcurrent protection is widely used in distribution feeder protection schemes. It

has two elements:

 the time-delay overcurrent element starts to operate with currents above the
level of the relay setting. The time delay has an inverse relationship with the
current magnitude (called inverse time relationship), this means the higher
the current the shorter the tripping time.
 the instantaneous (hiset) element operates without any introduced delay to
trip the circuit breaker when the current reached the level of the relay setting.
This is used to rapidly clear high current faults very close to the substation.

Overcurrent protection is used on each feeder phase and must be set above the
normal feeder load to avoid tripping under full load conditions. Typical setting are
shown in Table 7-1.

Overcurrent protection is also applied to detect earth faults. However, as a healthy

balanced three-phase feeder will have zero or near zero earth fault current the
relay earth fault element settings are set to small current values well below the
phase overcurrent settings. See Table 7-1.

The sensitive earth fault (SEF) is designed to detect low earth fault currents which
are not detected by the standard earth fault protection (e.g. HV conductors falling
across a dry bitumen road). The SEF has a very low current setting of several
amps and therefore is very sensitive to earth fault current, however it has a long
time delay of several seconds to allow the normal overcurrent and earth fault
operation for normal faults.

SEF protection is used in highly populated built up areas on HV overhead feeders

where the risk of contact with a fallen conductor is high. It is not applicable to
underground feeders (as earth fault protection adequately detects the high current
faults) or rural feeders (as the single-phase spurs unbalance the line).

When the overcurrent or earth fault elements in a digital relay operate, a visual
indication is provided on the face of the relay, using LEDs or text on a display. The
relay shown in Figure 7-9 has LED indicators showing the instantaneous, phase
overcurrent, earth fault (GND/NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT) as well LEDs for other
elements.

The older electro-mechanical relays have numbered flags drop to indicate relay
operation.

7-8
 Section Seven – Distribution Protection

Indicator
LEDs

Figure 7-9 Digital relay – with multiple elements

(overcurrent, earth fault, UFLS, CB failure)

Sensitive
Overcurrent Earth Fault Earth Fault
Amps (A) Amps (A) Amps (A)

Time-delay Instant- Time-delay Instant- Time-delay

Overcurrent aneous Relay Current Relay aneous Relay Current Relay
Relay (see Note)

Town Feeders

250-300 4000 40 not used 8A

(9 seconds)

Rural Feeders

50-200 1000 10-20 not used not used

Table 7-1 Typical minimum tripping currents

Note: Town feeders are generally fitted with sensitive earth fault relays to trip the
feeder for low current faults, such as a conductor on the ground.

These relays cannot be fitted to rural feeders because the single-phase spurs
unbalance the line.

7-9
Switching Operator’s Manual One

Figure 7-10 shows the curve for the inverse relationship between operating time
and current for a typical overcurrent relay element. The relay overcurrent element
settings allow the curve to be moved in both the horizontal direction (changing the
current) and the vertical direction (changing the time).

The minimum pick up current shown in Figure 7-10 is the current below which the
relay element will not operate. A temporary overcurrent may go above the minimum
pick-up level and then return to levels below the pickup level for durations less than
the tripping time shown on the curve without the tripping the circuit breaker. If
however, the temporary overcurrent time duration reaches the tripping time the
circuit breaker will trip.

In summary, the inverse curve shows the higher the fault current the shorter the
tripping time.

Time setting
Time adjustment
(seconds)

Current setting
adjustment
3

1 Time setting 2

Time setting 1

0 1 2 3
Pick-up Current (amperes)
current

Overload Fault
region region

Figure 7-10 Inverse time/current curve

Phase and earth fault detection

Figure 7-11 shows typical distribution feeder overcurrent and earth fault protection
at a substation. The operation of the protection for an overcurrent (F1) and earth
fault (F2) is shown.

7-10
 Section Seven – Distribution Protection

Substation
busbar
(three phases shown)
R W B
Circuit Current
breakers transformers Distribution feeder

F1
F1 F1 F1
F1

F1

SEF Direction of
F1 fault current
E A B C F1
A
Overcurrent
Overcurrent fault (F1) B relays
C
Substation E Earth fault
busbar relay
(three phases shown) SEF Sensitive earth
fault relay
R W B
Circuit Current
breakers transformers Distribution feeder

F2
SEF F2 F2

E F2 A B C Direction of
F2
fault current

Earth fault (F2)

Figure 7-11 Distribution feeder protection

In Figure 7-11 (top), the phase-to-phase fault F1 (W phase-to-B phase) flows

through the respective CTs produces equivalent fault level secondary currents to
flow in relay elements B and C causing them to operate. Notice the current flowing
out on W phase flows back through B phase and is balanced, therefore no
secondary current flows in elements A, E and SEF.

In Figure 7-11 (bottom), the phase-to-earth fault F2 (red phase) primary fault
current flows through the R CTs which produces equivalent fault level secondary
current to flow in elements A, E and SEF. In this case the E element will have the
shortest operating time tripping the circuit breaker. Notice the R phase current flows
back to the substation through the ground and not on the other phases creating an
out-of-balance on the phase conductors.

If the earth fault F2 was a low level fault and the current too low to be detected by
the E or A after of several seconds the SEF element will operate tripping the feeder
circuit breaker.

7-11
Switching Operator’s Manual One

Parallelling three-phase feeders on single-phase disconnectors

As stated before, earth fault protection is sensitive and detects an out balance on
the phase conductors. When two feeders are parallelled on single-phase
disconnectors, there is a significant risk of out-of-balance being detected and
operating the earth fault protection.

To eliminate this tripping risk, the earth fault protection must be disable before the
feeders are interconnected and returned to service after the feeders are separated.
Interconnection of three-phase feeders should be performed on three-phase
switchgear (e.g. pole top switch) wherever possible to avoid the necessity of
disabling earth fault protection.

Figure 7-12 shows the first phase of a set of single-phase disconnectors closing on
a feeder near a substation. This creates an out-of-balance load on the feeder.

The secondary current flows through both the overcurrent and the earth fault relay.
As the earth fault relay is set to be more sensitive, it will often operate under these
conditions. This differs from balanced loads, where the three phases cancel each
other out at the earth fault relay and prevent the relay from operating.

Substation
busbar
(three phases shown)
R W B
Circuit Current Distribution feeder
breakers transformers

I I load

Interconnection
point

E I A B C I
A
Overcurrent
B relays

E Earth fault
relay

Figure 7-12 Out-of-balance earth fault tripping

Trip relay

It can be seen that different relays pick up and operate for different types of faults.
To prevent too many relays firing into the trip coil of the protected circuit breaker, a
trip relay is used. This collects all relay operations and gives one signal to the
breaker.

7-12
 Section Seven – Distribution Protection

The relay works immediately. As soon as one input gives an operation signal, the
output is closed. This is necessary, for the timing of the complete operation from
fault to tripping should be determined by the protection relay characteristics, not
those of the trip relay.

Parallelling three-phase feeders with SEF protection

As described before, sensitive earth fault (SEF) relays are installed on overhead
distribution feeders to detect low current earth faults (high resistance faults) which
may do not produce enough fault current to operate the standard earth fault and
overcurrent relays.

Similar to standard earth fault protection, SEF detects the out-of-balance current in
the three-phase HV system That is, at all instants in time the current flowing out on
a phase must be balanced by currents returning on the other two phases. Where
current flows out on a phase but does not return on the other phases of that feeder,
this indicates an out-of-balance current and is seen by the protection as an earth
fault.

Shown in Figure 7-13 is a basic example with two HV feeders and their respective
loads before and after switching a pole top switch to parallel the feeders.

Slight differences
in the Red phases impedances
Before switching does not cause any problems.

R = 100A R = 200A

W = 100A W = 200A
Feeder 1 Feeder 2
B = 100A B = 200A
SEF = 0A SEF = 0A
FEEDERS HEALTHY

Red phase feeder currents not balance

the same as W and B phases – because of
After switching slightly different impedances in the Red phases.

R = 160A R = 140A

W = 150A W = 150A
Feeder 1 Feeder 2
B = 150A B = 150A
SEF = 10A TRIP SEF = 10A TRIP

Figure 7-13 Example of parallelling feeders

with sensitive earth fault.

Assume the SEF settings are an operating current of 8A with a delay of 9 seconds.

7-13
Switching Operator’s Manual One

Before the Feeders 1 and 2 are parallelled it can be seen the out-of-balance in the
SEF on both feeders is zero. After the feeders are parallelled, a slight imbalance in
the R phase line impedances causes Feeder 1 R current to increase by 10 amps
with respect to the W and B phases, and conversely the R phase current on Feeder
2 is reduced by 10 A with respect to W and B. The SEF relay element on both
Feeder 1 and 2 see the 10A out-of-balance. If the SEF setting are 8A then after the
time delay of 9 seconds one or both feeders will trip on SEF.

Therefore to prevent inadvertent out-of-balance SEF feeder trips when parallelling

three-phase feeders, the SEF protection is switched out of service (disabled).

The above is also applicable to reclosers with SEF protection. The basic rule is all
SEF protection devices inside a feeder loop created by switching must be disabled.

Feeder reclosing (auto reclosing)

Substations with outdoor feeders usually have protection relays with the auto
reclosing function enabled to improve system performance for transient faults.

The auto reclosing function operates to reclose the circuit breaker at a

predetermined time (about four seconds) after the circuit breaker trips for an
overcurrent or earth fault. In most cases, faults are temporary (transient faults) and
an auto reclose will permanently restore power to the feeder.

If the feeder is cable for more than half its length, auto reclosing is not used. (The
auto reclose function is either not installed or it is taken out of service). Cable faults
are usually permanent, and reclosing of the feeder will not restore the feeder but
further adds to any fault damage.

Multifunction solid state relays

Microprocessor based multifunctional relay incorporating overcurrent, earth fault,

SEF, auto reclose and UFLS elements, can be utilised in many protection schemes
such as transformer, busbar and feeder protection. Examples of multifunction
relays commonly used are the SEL-351 (shown in Figure 7-14) and the SEL-751A
(shown in Figure 7-9).

Indicator
LEDs

Figure 7-14 SEL351 relay

7-14
 Section Seven – Distribution Protection

The LEDs illuminated on the front panel provides detail of the relay elements which
operated. This information which consists of a combination of LEDs illuminated can
be equated to the flag numbering system shown in Table 7-2.

Interpretation and Reporting of LED Indications for SEL351 Relay

LED Phase LED Meaning Flag No

Trip+ 51+ A Overcurrent Time Red 1

B Overcurrent Time White 2

C Overcurrent Time Blue 3

G or N * Earth Fault Time 15

Trip+ 50+ A Overcurrent Instant Red 4

B Overcurrent Instant White 5

C Overcurrent Instant Blue 6

G or N * Sensitive Earth fault 14

Trip+81 - UFLS 850

* Either G or N indicates an earth fault. Phases (A, B or C) may also be indicated

but it does not affect the flag number.

Table 7-2 SEL351 LED indicator interpretation and reporting

The LEDs marked EN, INST, COM, SOTF, RS, CY, and LO do not impact on the
flag number and can be ignored.

Some examples of the interpretation of the LEDs is provided in Figure 7-15.

7-15
Switching Operator’s Manual One

Example 1 – White–Blue Phase Overcurrent Time (IDMT)

Example 2 – Red–White Phase Instantaneous

Example 3 – Sensitive Earth Fault

Example 4 – UFLS

LED On LED Off

Figure 7-15 SEL351 protection indication

7-16
 Section Seven – Distribution Protection

It is most important that all flags are accurately recorded before the relays are
reset. Do not reset the relays and then record the flags from memory.

The flag operation information may be checked at a later date to establish whether
the protection has operated according to its design specifications.)

7.3.4 Principles of Time/Current Protection

As previously indicated the most widely used form of protection on distribution

feeders is a relay with inverse time/current overcurrent and earth fault elements
which is represented in the graph shown in Figure 7-17.

Figure 7-16 shows circuit breaker A and recloser B and fault at location F1. Fault
F1 causes the fault current to flow through the circuit breaker A and recloser B. If
recloser B can be made to open before circuit breaker A, the fault would be de-
energised and circuit breaker A would remain closed.

The operation of the closest protective device to the fault operating first is called
correct discrimination. The customers from the circuit breaker A to the recloser B
remain energised and the customers in the faulted section downstream from
recloser B lose the supply.

Substation
busbar

Distribution
feeder

Circuit Recloser B
breaker A
F1

Figure 7-16 Correct discrimination

The circuit breaker A and recloser B have their individual protection relays. The
setting on these relays are shown in Figure 7-17 as the time/current curves relay A
and relay B.

The fault current is shown by the vertical dotted line. Relay B operates in time T1
for the value of fault current shown. If the fault current is not cleared, relay A would
operate in time T2. Usually, a margin of 0.3 seconds is allowed, to give the recloser
B time to operate and clear the fault. If the margin is too short, the fault current may
not cease before relay A operates and trips the entire feeder.

7-17
Switching Operator’s Manual One

10

Relay A
Time
(seconds)
Relay B
1
t2

Margin
0.3 secs
t1

0.1
Fault current F1

100 1000 10,000

Current (amperes)

Figure 7-17 Inverse time/current operating characteristic grading

7.3.5 Reclosers

High voltage distribution feeders frequently are protected by single-phase or three-

phase automatic reclosers. Reclosers are used to de-energise the faulted section
of circuit or spur line.

The recloser is a self-contained device that senses and interrupts distribution fault
currents. If the fault is temporary, it automatically reclose will be successful. If the
fault is permanent, the recloser locks out after two, three or four preset trip
operations (dependent on the setting applied). If the fault clears before lockout, the
recloser after a period of time will reset the count for another full cycle of reclose
operations.

The time interval the recloser remains closed before tripping can be set selecting
the appropriate fast or slow curve. See Figure 7-18.

The basic principle of recloser operation is that fast operations will clear temporary
faults before spur line fuses can blow. (However, this is not always possible. The
small spur fuses may operate to clear the fault before the recloser operates.)
Delayed openings allow time for fuses to clear so that a permanent fault can be
confined to smaller sections of the line. See Figure 7-18.

Figure 7-18 shows typical slow and fast time overcurrent curves for a recloser. The
options for slow close is ‘B’ and ‘C’ or ‘D’ and ‘E’.

7-18
 Section Seven – Distribution Protection

For a recloser set to four shots the range of possible combinations is:
 4 fast reclose attempts
 3 fast and 1 slow reclose attempts
 2 fast and 2 slow reclose attempts
 1 fast and 3 slow reclose attempts
 4 slow reclose attempts.
The typical sequence is 2 fast and 2 slow reclose attempts.

60 3600
50 3000

40 2400

30 1800

20 1200

10 600

8 480

6 360
5 300
4 240

3 180

2 120

Time (cycles) (60-hertz basis)

1 60
Time (seconds)

Curve A – Fast operation

0.8 48
Curve B
0.6 Curve C 36
Slow operation
Curve D
0.5 30
Curve E
0.4 24

0.3 18

0.2 12

0.1 C 6.0

0.08 B 4.8
E
0.06 3.6
D
0.05 A 3.0

0.04 2.4

0.03 1.8

0.02 1.2

0.01 0.6
50
60

80
100

200

300

400

500
600

800

2000

3000
1000

4000

5000
6000

8000

10000

20000

30000

40000

50000

Current (percentage of minimum trip)

Figure 7-18 Typical overcurrent curves for a recloser

7-19
Switching Operator’s Manual One

7.3.6 Sectionalisers

Sectionalisers are designed to work in conjunction with reclosers. Sectionalisers

have no fault-breaking capacity, therefore they are used on the load side of the
recloser and can only open after the recloser has opened to de-energised the
circuit.

The sectionaliser measures the current to determine if it is normal load or fault

current. The sectionaliser increments the counts each time fault current has passed
through it as recloser attempts reclose operations.

7.3.7 Operation of the Recloser Sectionaliser

Combination

A description of the operation of a recloser set for three shots and sectionaliser set
for two shots is given below.

When a fault occurs, the recloser opens the circuit. Simultaneously, both the
recloser and the sectionaliser register one fault. The recloser then closes and
restores supply. If the fault has cleared, the recloser and sectionaliser reset
automatically after a period of time reset the counts to zero. However, if the fault
still persists, the recloser trips again the recloser and sectionaliser increment their
counter to two.

At this point, a sectionaliser set to two shots automatically opens disconnecting the
faulted section of line. The recloser then closes a third time, restoring supply up to
the sectionaliser but not beyond.

The recloser shot setting must always be one or more greater than the sectionaliser
shot setting to ensure the recloser will reclose after the sectionaliser has opened
disconnecting the fault.

7.4 Protection of Typical Distribution

Feeders
The protection of a distribution feeder requires the coordination of different types of
equipment.

Each feeder has a main circuit breaker at the substation. The feeder circuit breaker
protects main feeder backbone up to the next downstream protective devices. A
fault in this backbone section will result in the entire loss of the feeder and all
customers.

The downstream protective devices include reclosers, sectionalisers and fuses.

These devices will operate for a fault in the zone they protect. This limits the size of
the outage area and the number of customers inconvenienced. The operation of
the local protective device to the fault also assists reducing the time to locate the
fault and restore supply to customers.

7-20
 Section Seven – Distribution Protection

The protection of a typical distribution feeder is shown in Figure 7-19.

Substation busbar

Circuit
breaker

Fault current

Recloser R1
(3-phase)
Sectionaliser

Recloser R1 S
Single phase
S
Sectionaliser

F2
F3

F1

Figure 7-19 Protection of typical distribution feeder

7.4.1 Fault on Single-phase Fuse Protected Spur Line

In Figure 7-19 fault F1 causes fault current to flow from the substation, through the
feeder circuit breaker, the three-phase recloser R1 and fuse A, to the fault.

Fuse A must detect the fault and operate in a time that limits the faults damage to
the feeder. The recloser and feeder circuit breaker's protection also “see” the fault.
However, what is finally required is the operation of fuse A only.

This is called grading of protection. It is carried out by selecting the required

time/current characteristics of each protection element.

Figure 7-20 shows the time/current characteristics of the circuit breaker, recloser
and fuse. At fault current F1, the lower fast trip curve of the recloser is below the
fuse curve. Therefore, the recloser will perform a fast trip and reclose. If the fault is
temporary, then the system may be fully restored without fuse A even operating.

7-21
Switching Operator’s Manual One

For a permanent fault, the recloser trips and closes again until the delayed trip
allows enough fault current to operate fuse A. The recloser then closes and
restores the rest of the line.

If however, the recloser fast curve is located above the curve A then fuse A will
operate before the recloser, even for a temporary fault.

Fuse at A

Time

Relay curve for substation

circuit breaker

Slow curve
Recloser
R1
Fast curve

Fault Current
F1

Figure 7-20 Time/current characteristics of a circuit breaker

and recloses and fuses

7.4.2 Fault on Section of Main Feeder Past Recloser

In Figure 7-19, fault F2 should cause the recloser R1 to open. If F2 is a permanent

fault, R1 closes, trips the set number of times and then locks out. The recloser R1
has isolated the fault to the last half of the feeder. If grading is correct, the fault will
be located between the recloser and any further fuses or reclosers.

7.4.3 Fault on Single-phase Recloser Protected Spur

Line with Sectionaliser

For temporary fault F3 in Figure 7-19, the single-phase recloser R2 trips and closes
successfully. For a permanent fault the single-phase recloser trips and closes up to
four times. The sectionaliser opens after the third trip of the recloser, if it is a three
shot sectionaliser. The recloser closes for the fourth time and stays closed, as fault
F3 is isolated beyond the sectionaliser.

7-22
 SECTION EIGHT

Switching for Safety

Table of Contents
8. Switching For Safety ............................................................................... 8-1

8.1 Introduction ........................................................................................ 8-1

8.2 Switching Safety-Related Documents................................................. 8-1
Electricity (Network Safety) Regulations 2015 ............................... 8-1
Electrical Safety Standards ........................................................... 8-2
Network Permit to Work Training Manual ...................................... 8-2
Field Instructions ........................................................................... 8-3
Switching Operator Manual ........................................................... 8-3
8.3 Authorities .......................................................................................... 8-3
8.4 Reporting of Incidents......................................................................... 8-3
8.5 Switching Roles and Responsibilities ................................................. 8-4
Horizon Power’s Control Centre .................................................... 8-4
Switching Operator ........................................................................ 8-4
Switching Operator in Charge ....................................................... 8-5
8.6 Personal Protective Equipment .......................................................... 8-5
8.7 Switching Operation Modes ................................................................ 8-5
Planned Switching ......................................................................... 8-5
Unplanned Switching..................................................................... 8-5
Emergency Switching .................................................................... 8-6
8.8 Isolation, Earthing and Safe Work Areas ............................................ 8-6
Overview ....................................................................................... 8-6
Fundamental Principles ................................................................. 8-7
Summary of Apparatus State ...................................................... 8-14
8.9 Distribution Isolation and Earthing .................................................... 8-15
Example 1 ................................................................................... 8-17
Example 2 ................................................................................... 8-19
Example 3 ................................................................................... 8-20
Example 4 ................................................................................... 8-21
8.10 Substation Safe Work Area Delineation ............................................ 8-21

i
Switching Operator's Manual One

8.11 Work Permits .................................................................................... 8-23

Network Permit to Work ............................................................... 8-23
Operating Agreements and Handover Certificates ....................... 8-32
8.12 Tagging, Locks and Barriers ............................................................. 8-35
Locks ........................................................................................... 8-38
8.13 Common Switching Operations ......................................................... 8-39
Proving De-energised .................................................................. 8-39
Applying Earths............................................................................ 8-39
Phasing Out ................................................................................. 8-40
Rack Out and Rack In .................................................................. 8-40
8.14 Switchgear Pre- and Post-switching Checks ..................................... 8-40
Pre-switching Checks .................................................................. 8-40
Post-switching Checks ................................................................. 8-42
8.15 Switching-related hazards ................................................................. 8-42
Electric Shock .............................................................................. 8-42
Switchgear Explosion................................................................... 8-42
Touch Potential ............................................................................ 8-42
Step Potential .............................................................................. 8-43
Toxic Fumes from Fire or Explosion ............................................. 8-44
Arc Flash and Arc Blast ............................................................... 8-44
Switchroom Egress ...................................................................... 8-46
Portable Equipotential Mat ........................................................... 8-46
Switching Tools and Test Equipment ........................................... 8-46
Switchgear Operation Competence ............................................. 8-47

ii
 Section Eight – Switching For Safety

List of Figures
Figure 8-1 Distribution safe work area ............................................................. 8-13
Figure 8-2 Transmission safe work area .......................................................... 8-14
Figure 8-3 Transition from live to earthed network state for EAP ..................... 8-14
Figure 8-4 Flowchart of planning process ........................................................ 8-16
Figure 8-5 Distribution isolation and earthing ................................................... 8-17
Figure 8-6 Earthing of rural distribution system with spurs ............................... 8-18
Figure 8-7 Single-phase spur earthing ............................................................. 8-19
Figure 8-8 Distribution system earthing ............................................................ 8-20
Figure 8-9 Distribution system earthing ............................................................ 8-21
Figure 8-10 Example of safe work area ........................................................... 8-22
Figure 8-11 Electrical Access Permit – Front ................................................... 8-25
Figure 8-12 Electrical Access Permit – Back.................................................... 8-26
Figure 8-13 Sanction To Test – Front .............................................................. 8-28
Figure 8-14 Sanction To Test – Back ............................................................... 8-29
Figure 8-15 Vicinity Authority ........................................................................... 8-31
Figure 8-16 Operating Agreement ................................................................... 8-33
Figure 8-17 Handover Certificate ..................................................................... 8-34
Figure 8-18 Danger–Do Not Operate tag ......................................................... 8-35
Figure 8-19 Caution–Vicinity Work in Progress warning tag ............................. 8-36
Figure 8-20 Danger–Restricted Use tag ........................................................... 8-37
Figure 8-21 Warning–Out of Service tag .......................................................... 8-37
Figure 8-22 Isolation locks used to isolate apparatus ....................................... 8-38
Figure 8-23 Touch potential ............................................................................. 8-43
Figure 8-24 Step potential................................................................................ 8-44
Figure 8-25 Indoor switchboard arc flash and arc blast .................................... 8-45

iii
Switching Operator's Manual One

List of Tables
Table 8-1 Western Australian and Horizon Power authorities ............................. 8-3
Table 8-2 Apparatus electrical state ................................................................... 8-7
Table 8-3 Switchgear isolation requirements ...................................................... 8-9
Table 8-4 Work stages and responsibilities ...................................................... 8-24
Table 8-5 Pre-switching visual checks .............................................................. 8-41

iv
8. Switching For Safety

8.1 Introduction
This section describes the safety requirements the switching operator must comply
with when undertaking switching, and providing access for others required to work
on the network.

8.2 Switching Safety-Related Documents

The following sections describe the documents related to the duties of the switching
operator.

Electricity (Network Safety) Regulations 2015

The Electricity (Network Safety) Regulations 2015 places specific requirements on

Horizon Power as the network operator and the persons (including contactors) who
undertake prescribed activities, such as switching on the network.

In relation to the switching operator role, Horizon Power is required to:

 develop, implement and maintain adequate work practices

 provide adequate instruction, training and supervision

 ensure compliance with work practices

 investigate any matter which is or may be a risk.

The switching operator is required to comply with Horizon Power’s standards and
work practices and must document and notify their supervisor if a procedure is not
followed. Notification is required to initiate procedure review and adjustments if
required.

Under these regulations, provisions exist for fines for non-compliance by Horizon
Power or the switching operator.

8-1
Switching Operator's Manual One

Electrical Safety Standards

Horizon Power’s Electrical Safety Standards (ESS) provide the basic safety
principles applicable to employees and contractors working on or in the vicinity of
electrical apparatus controlled by Horizon Power.

The ESS is designed primarily to:

 protect Horizon Power staff and contractors

 protect the general public

 prevent damage to Horizon Power assets and public and private property,
and

 maintain continuity of supply.

Personnel who are required to work on or near electrical apparatus must be

appropriately trained and authorised, in accordance with procedures and standards
established by Horizon Power.

In particular, personnel must:

 be aware of all hazards

 be trained in safe working practices

 apply adequate supervision and control

 communicate effectively, and

 think SAFETY.

No employee should allow or request any personnel to perform any work that is
known to be unsafe or which may expose the person to a hazard.

A hazard is the risk of danger to personnel untrained in safe working procedures.

The hazard ceases to be dangerous when trained personnel employ correct and
safe procedures.

An employee must not work on or be in the vicinity of live electrical apparatus

without the necessary instructions or permission. Work on HV apparatus must be
covered by the use of work permits issued by authorised personnel.

Network Permit to Work Training Manual

The Network Permit to Work Training Manual (NPWTM) describes the

responsibilities and procedures applicable to the permit to work process. Switching
operators must fully understand their responsibilities and be competent in the work
permit issue and cancellation process.

8-2
 Section Eight – Switching For Safety

Field Instructions

Horizon Power Field Instructions (FIs) contains a number of documents providing

descriptions of requirement and procedures when undertaking a range of field
activities. The switching operator must be familiar with the content of Field
Instructions which are related to switching. Reference to switching-related Field
Instructions have been made throughout this manual.

Switching Operator Manual

This Switching Operator Manual (SOM) is intended as a reference and training

manual for switching operations. It assembles switching-related information and
elaborates on the practical aspects of the switching operator role. The other
documents referenced in this section should be referred to by the switching
operator for additional switching-related information.

8.3 Authorities
Several Western Australian authorities are involved with safe switching procedures
in Horizon Power. The requirements of these authorities must be met when
switching. The table below summarises the role of each authority.

Authority Responsibility
WorkSafe WA Regulations to cover the occupational health, safety and welfare
in the workplace. This does not include electrical safety.
EnergySafety WA All aspects of electrical safety including investigation
of electrical incidents.
Horizon Power Control Controlling authority for all transmission and HV distribution switching
Centre (HPCC) on the Pilbara Grid and HV microgrids.
Construction or The group in control of electrical assets
commissioning authority before the authority is transferred to HPCC.
Regional depots The operating authority for the LV network within their area
of responsibility. The Works Delivery Coordinator
in these depots delegates responsibility for initiating programs
and all LV network switching to distribution workers.
Switching operators Conduct switching in accordance with procedures and instructions

Table 8-1 Western Australian and Horizon Power authorities

involved in safe switching

8.4 Reporting of Incidents

To improve the safety of its infrastructure and the safety of the public and electrical
workers, Horizon Power is required to investigate and report on incidents and
unsafe/defective work though the Cintellate reporting system.

8-3
Switching Operator's Manual One

Energy Safety regulations require that electrical incidents and accidents be

reported to their office within a given timeframe. For a comprehensive table on
reportable and notifiable incidents refer to Notifiable reportable definitions for
ENSMS – CS10 #4994236.

8.5 Switching Roles and Responsibilities

The main roles and responsibilities of HPCC and switching operators associated
with the execution of switching programs are described in the following sections.

Horizon Power’s Control Centre

HPCC controllers are authorised by Horizon Power and responsible for:

 coordinating all high voltage switching activities

 performing switching of SCADA controlled primary and secondary apparatus

 electronically recording work permit issue and cancellation, and

 ensuring the compatibility of work permits.

Switching Operator

Switching operators are authorised by Horizon Power and responsible for:

 field switching of non-SCADA controlled apparatus associated with:

 interconnection, creation of isolation points, program earthing

and the reverse sequence switching for restoration

 disabling remote or automatic operation of apparatus

 the issuing and cancellation of work permits

 the flagging and barricading of safe working areas inside switchyards, and

 installing appropriate signs.

8-4
 Section Eight – Switching For Safety

Switching Operator in Charge

The switching operator in charge is the nominated switching operator to manage

field switching operations. They are the person through which all communications
with HPCC are managed.

8.6 Personal Protective Equipment

The switching operator must at all times use the correct protective clothing and
equipment for the switching operation being undertaken.

Protective clothing which Horizon Power provides includes overalls, helmet,

switching gloves, boots, safety glasses, goggles, flash jackets and hoods. The
intent of protective clothing is to protect the switching operator against safety risks
which may occur during switching operations.

Specific information on the PPE requirements for distribution and transmission

switching can be found in Tables 1 and 2 in Field Instruction – Worksite Clothing /
Personal Protective Equipment Requirements.

8.7 Switching Operation Modes

The three switching operation modes are planned switching, unplanned switching
and emergency switching. Each of these modes occur in response to particular
circumstances and have the specific requirements as described below.

Planned Switching

Planned switching is the usual switching mode for all work that is scheduled in
advance. In this mode a switching program is written and checked by switching
operators and approved by HPCC in advance of the switching occurring. The
program is executed under the control of HPCC.

Unplanned Switching

Unplanned switching occurs in response to an unforeseen network event such as a

network asset failure, which does not result in an immediate threat to life or
property.

Where the unplanned event requires switching by a switching operator, a switching

program is required to be produced in collaboration and agreement between the
HPCC controller and the switching operator.

8-5
Switching Operator's Manual One

Where a switching program is subsequently required to provide access for repair of

the failed network asset, this will follow planned switching requirements. The
normal lead time for submission of programs for planned switching will be waivered
by HPCC in this instance.

Example

An excavator damages a feeder cable between two RMUs. The feeder circuit
breaker has tripped and the faulted cable is required to be isolated to enable power
restoration.

Emergency Switching

Emergency switching can occur in response to an unplanned event such as

network asset failure, which presents an immediate threat to life or property.
Emergency switching to remove an immediate threat may be undertaken without a
switching program.

Emergency switching to remove the immediate threat can be performed by a HPCC

controller or by a switching operator or other competent person directed by the
HPCC controller or switching operator.

It is preferred HPCC is notified prior to the action to remove the immediate threat
where possible. However, where this is not possible, HPCC is to be notified
immediately after the necessary action to remove the threat has been completed.

Where the emergency threat has been removed, further switching is to follow the
unplanned switching requirements.

Example

A severely injured passenger is trapped in a vehicle with wires dangerously close to

the vehicle. Medical advice is given that the passenger must be removed from the
vehicle immediately, to receive life-saving medical attention.

8.8 Isolation, Earthing and Safe Work Areas

Overview

This section details the isolation and earthing requirements to create a safe work
area surrounding the work site on the electrical apparatus.

8-6
 Section Eight – Switching For Safety

Fundamental Principles

The fundamental principle to work on HV apparatus is – the HV apparatus to be

worked on under an EAP must be securely disconnected and earthed from all
sources of electrical supply.

The apparatus to be worked on is called the work site. Depending on the nature of
the work, the work site could be a single point or a wide area covering the
outermost points of the network where work will be performed.

A secure disconnection point is required on each source of HV electrical supply into

the work site. These secure disconnection points are called isolation points. The
area of the network inside these isolation points is called the isolated area.

Earths must be installed between the work site and all sources of HV electrical
supply into the work site. These earths are called program earths. The area of the
network inside the program earths is called the safe work area.

For overhead networks, where any program earth is not visible from the work site, a
working earth which is visible from the work site must be added by the RIC
between the work site and that program earth. The work site is limited to the area
inside the visible earths.

The principles outlined above are described in more detail in the sections which
follow

Switchgear Electrical States

To understand the creation of isolation points and safe work areas it is necessary to
comprehend the different electrical states of switchgear.

Switchgear can have a number of unique electrical states as described in Table 8-2
below.

Electrical
State Description

ON Switchgear has its primary contacts closed which electrically connects

both sides of the switchgear together.

OFF Switchgear has its primary contacts open which electrically separates
each side of the switchgear.
ISOLATED Switchgear is securely OFF and requiring a deliberate physical act
to turn back ON. This state is not available on all switchgear.

EARTHED Switchgear has an internal earth applied to the circuit.

This state is not available on all switchgear.

Table 8-2 Apparatus electrical state

8-7
Switching Operator's Manual One

Each of the above electrical states have unique requirements, therefore terms such
as OFF and ISOLATED are not interchangeable. The switching operator must
understand the meaning of these terms and use the correct terms when describing
the electrical state of apparatus.

De-energised Area

A de-energised area in the network is created by having the switchgear on all

sources of supply into the area in the OFF state.

Isolation Points

Isolation points are switchgear in the network which can provide a safe and secure
disconnection from an electrical source.

For switchgear to be used as an isolation point the switchgear is required to be:

in the OFF state

AND rendered incapable of being inadvertently switched to the ON state
by one or more of the following:
 racking out/down
 removing conducting switchgear parts
 locking to prevent the isolation point requirements being changed
(where switchgear locking facilities are provided)
 fitting of insulating barriers
 other approved methods for specific switchgear type
AND capable of preventing access to live parts by the fitting of barriers
or other methods
AND fitted with a Danger–Do Not Operate tag to provide warning,
ensuring the isolation point requirements are not changed.

Some apparatus, whilst in the isolated state, may require further fitting of barriers or
other methods to prevent access to live parts.

The above requirements are general in nature and due to the large range of
switchgear types the actual implementation of these requirements will vary. Table
8-3 below describes the specific requirements for common types of switchgear to
be used as an isolation point. The switching operators must be able to correctly
create an isolation point for all switchgear they are required to switch .

8-8
 Section Eight – Switching For Safety

Electrical Apparatus Approved for Isolation

Isolation requirements
PoA
Apparatus code Condition Locking requirements

Pole top switch PTSD Off and attach D DNO Isolation lock applied
HV three-phase ISOL Off and attach D DNO Isolation lock applied
disconnector

HV single-phase ISOL Off and attach D DNO Cannot be locked

disconnector

HV Drop out fuse DOF Off – remove barrel Cannot be locked

and attach D DNO

Approved load break LBS Off and attach D DNO See FI – NULEC RL
switch (SF6) Load Break Switch
as an isolation point
RMU switch / fuse SWDC / Off and attach D DNO Isolation lock applied
switch FSSW

HV circuit breaker – CB Off, racked out, removed Isolation lock(s) applied

withdrawable and bus and circuit
shutters locked and attach Note 1: Isolations lock(s)
D DNO s and D DNO (s) must be
applied to ensure:
or
the CB cannot be racked
Off, racked out with cubicle in, and
door locked and attach D
DNO s
persons cannot access
or live parts.
Off, racked out, locked in
isolated position and
attach D DNO s
LV circuit breaker – CB Off, racked out, locked in Isolation lock(s) applied
withdrawable isolated position and
attach D DNO s See Note 1 above

HV live line clamps Disconnected (Off) and

Cannot be locked
attach D DNO to pole

Temporary
TEMP Off – and attach D DNO Cannot be locked
disconnector

LV disconnectors OFF barrier and attach D

Cannot be locked
DNO

LV fuses OFF barrier and attach D

Cannot be locked
DNO

Table 8-3 Switchgear isolation requirements

8-9
Switching Operator's Manual One

Not all switchgear meet the requirements of an isolation point. Examples of

switchgear which cannot be used as an isolation point includes:

 non-withdrawable circuit breakers (typically outdoor circuit breakers)

 reclosers

 sectionalisers with non-removable blades, and

 unapproved load break switches.

Where switchgear cannot be used as an isolation point it will be necessary to

isolate further back in the network at an approved isolation device.

Work Site

A work site is the location in the network where work is to be undertaken. A

worksite may be one specific point in the network or cover a wider area in the
network. Examples of a work site which is a specific point in the network is shown
in Figure 8-1 at the cable termination or a work site which cover a wider area is
shown in Figure 8-3 which may cover the entire transmission line for insulator
changes.

Isolated Area

An isolated area in the network is created by disconnecting all sources of supply

using isolation points. See the isolated area in Figure 8-1 and Figure 8-3.

Earthing

Earthing is applied for safety reasons to:

 limit the rise in potential difference in the work area and trigger the protection
equipment to disconnect the supply, if supply is inadvertently restored

 control induction when used in conjunction with equipotential bonding

techniques, and

 safely discharge electrical charges caused by lightning, wind, changes in

ambient conditions or altitude.

Each earth will short circuit all three-phase conductors together and connect them
to ground. Earthing may be in the form of switchgear earth switches or portable
earths.

8-10
 Section Eight – Switching For Safety

There are two types of earths, program earths and working earths and each has a
specific purpose.

Program earths are applied for the purpose of protecting against inadvertent
energisation into the work area through any isolation point. If an isolation point is
inadvertently energised, program earths will immediately cause the supply
protection device to operate, de-energising that supply. Program earths are applied
and removed as steps in the switching program by the switching operator. These
earths are required to be applied before the work permit is issued and removed
after the work permit is cancelled. The application and removal of program earths
must be noted on the EAP or STT. Depending on the location of program earths,
one program earth may cover more than one isolation point.

As switchgear earths are rated switchgear, where available they are preferred for
program earths over portable earths.

Working earths are additional earths fitted and removed within the safe work area
as required for the work being undertaken. The purpose of these earths is to:

 provide visible earths at the work site where the program earths cannot be
seen

 to manage induction

 protect against lightning and static charge

 ensure all conductors being worked on remain earthed even when

disconnected as part of the work.

These earths are managed by the Recipient in Charge or Tester in Charge and are
fitted after the work permit is accepted and removed before the work permit is
relinquished. The application and removal of working earths must be noted on the
EAP or STT.

Portable Earths

Portable earths can be used as program earths or working earths.

Overhead HV distribution systems do not have earth switches installed therefore

portable earths are required to be fitted. In the public space where the distribution
systems are located, a spike is required to be driven into the ground to provide the
main earth point. The spike must not interfere with other services. The pole
alignment is the preferred location.

For substations with overhead apparatus where portable earths are required the
earths must be connected to the main earth grid via the earth studs placed on the
structures at convenient intervals around the area.

8-11
Switching Operator's Manual One

Where a running earth is available, portable earths must be applied by bonding

each conductor to the running earth and to the portable earth spike in the ground.

All portable earth connections must be firmly attached to ensure good electrical
contact and also to ensure that the earth will remain effective if subjected to
inadvertent energisation.

Field Instruction Portable Earthing Requirements provides additional information on

using portable earths.

Earth Switches

Indoor switchboard circuit breakers typically have built in earth switches associated
with each circuit breaker. Similarly ring main units have a built in earth switch
associated with each switch and fuse switch. Due to the large range of switchgear
types the actual operations required for applying earths will vary. The switching
operator is required to be able to correctly apply earthing on each type of
switchgear.

There are several basic facts applicable to earth switches:

 Indoor switchgear interlocks require the circuit breaker to be racked out/down

before the earth can be applied.

 Ring main unit interlocks require the ring main switch/fuse switch to be OFF
before the earth can be applied. Similarly, the ring main switch/fuse switch
cannot be turned ON if the earth switch is ON.

 The earth switch on each circuit is connected on the cable side of the circuit
breaker or ring main switch or fuse switch.

Transmission outdoor disconnectors such as line circuit disconnectors usually have

an associated line earth switch. Before this earth switch can be closed the
associated disconnector must be opened and the line proved de-energised. (Also,
an interlock in the operating mechanism of the disconnector and earth switch
prevents the disconnector from being turned ON when the earth switch is ON.)

An earth switch when used as a program earth must be ON, locked and a Danger–
Do Not Operate tag attached.

Because earth switches are rated switchgear they are normally applied before
portable earths.

8-12
 Section Eight – Switching For Safety

Safe Work Area

A safe work area is the area within the isolated area and inside the program earths.
Therefore a safe work area has two electrical safety measures employed. The first
safety measure is all sources of electrical supply into the work area have been
securely disconnected at the isolation points and the second safety measure is the
program earths are applied to ensure the work area cannot be inadvertently
energised through the isolation points. The safe work area is commonly referred to
as being ‘boxed in’ by isolation points and program earths.

Figure 8-1 shows part of the distribution network, where a section of HV overhead
line connects to an underground cable at the cable termination pole. The work site
is cable termination pole. The two isolation points (IP1 and IP2) create the isolated
area and the earthing requires two program earths (Portable Earth PE1 and RMES
PE2) creating the safe work area. Inside the safe work area is the work location
(cable termination pole) and an EAP is issued for work on the cable termination.

Figure 8-1 Distribution safe work area

Figure 8-3 shows a transmission line connecting two substations. The transmission
line is the work site. There are isolation points IP1 and IP2 at each end of the line
creating an isolated area. The earthing requires program earths PE1 and PE2 at
each end of the line. This creates the safe work area as shown.

However, as the work party is required to work between visible earths, working
earths WE1 and WE2 (both portable earths) must be installed on each side of the
work site. If the work site progresses along the line, the working earths must be
moved by the work party, so they remain visible from the work site. If working near
one end of the line and program earth PE1 or PE2 is visible then only one working
earth will be required on the side of the worksite where the program earth is not
visible.

8-13
Switching Operator's Manual One

Figure 8-2 Transmission safe work area

Summary of Apparatus State

Figure 8-3 below shows the stages network apparatus progresses through from an
energised state to an isolated and then earthed state for the issue of an EAP. The
terms live, de-energised, isolated and earthed must be correctly used to describe
the specific state of the network.

Figure 8-3 Transition from live to earthed network state for EAP

8-14
 Section Eight – Switching For Safety

8.9 Distribution Isolation and Earthing

The overhead HV distribution system commonly will have one or more transformer
circuits between HV feeder switchgear, which can be used as isolation points. The
interconnectable transformers have a possible source of supply from the LV
network. The non-interconnectable transformers have an unlikely, but possible
source of LV supply from customers generation. This includes grid connected
inverters on renewable generation and defective backup generation wiring.

In each case if a LV back-feed does occur, the transformer will step the LV voltage
up and become a HV source of supply onto the HV feeder. Each transformer must
be appropriately isolated on the LV side and earthed on the HV depending on the
transformer type and location relative to the work site.

Below is a set of rules to assist in planning the creation of a safe work area on a HV
feeder. The first part covers the HV feeder isolation and earthing rules and the
second part deals with the transformer isolation and earthing rules for the
transformers connected between the HV feeder isolation points.

1. Rule for feeders:

1.1. All main feeder HV sources of supply into the work site must be isolated.

1.2. Program earth(s) must be fitted between step 1.1 isolation point(s) and
the work site AND as close as possible to the work site.

2. Rules for all transformers inside the isolated area defined by step 1:

2.1. for interconnectable transformers, the LV must be isolated.

2.2. for each transformer, there must be a program earth between the
transformer and the work site AND as close as possible to the work site.

2.3. Note: the placement of the program earths fitted in step 1.2 determines
the earthing needed for transformers in step 2.2.

The planning process for distribution feeder and associated transformer isolation
and earthing is shown in the flowchart below (Figure 8-4).

Note: Remember, when writing the switching program all HV feeder and
transformer isolations must be completed before the program earthing is
commenced.

8-15
Switching Operator's Manual One

3. Fit program earth(s)

2. Isolate the work between isolation point(s)
1. Identify
site from main feeder(s) and work site
the work site.
source(s) of supply. AND as close as possible
to work site.

4. Are
there any
transformers 5. No further isolation
between the No or earthing required.
isolation
points?

Yes

6. Isolate 7. Is it an
Yes
the LV side interconnectable
of the transformer. transformer?

No

8. No further
isolation needed –
May still need earthing!

10. Is there
Yes a program earth
9. No further
between each transformer
earthing required.
and the work site?

No

11. Fit program earth

between each transformer
and the work site
AND as close as possible
to work site.

13. Have Steps

12. Return to Step 4 4 to 11
and address been applied to every
each transformer. No transformer in the
isolated area?

Yes

14. Return to Step 2 15. Is the work site Yes 16. Continue
to check each isolation inside the safe with permit to work
and earth point. No procedure.
work area?

Figure 8-4 Flowchart of planning process

for distribution feeder and associated transformer isolation and earthing.

To illustrate the application of isolation and earthing principles and rules to create
safe work areas on the distribution network consider Figure 8-5.

8-16
 Section Eight – Switching For Safety

IP 3 IP 4

A PE 3
C
Work site

IP 1 IP 2
Safe work area

PE 1 PE 4 PE 2
B D

Figure 8-5 Distribution isolation and earthing

Figure 8-5 shows the work site on the main feeder which includes the HV
connections to transformer A and B. The two sources of feeder supply must be
isolated at IP1 and IP2. These sources of supply must have program earths PE1
and PE2 placed between these isolation points and the work site. Program earths
must be placed as close to the work site as practicable.

Each transformer between IP1 and IP2 must now be managed:

Transformer A is interconnectable and must be isolated on the LV side and a

program earth PE3 fitted on the transformer HV conductors into the work site.

Transformer B is non-interconnectable and must have a program earth PE4 fitted

on the transformer HV conductors into the work site.

Transformer C is interconnectable and must be isolated on the LV side. As program

earth PE2 will be fitted between the transformer and the work site no additional
earthing is required.

Transformer D is non-interconnectable and as program earth PE2 will be fitted

between the transformer and the work site no additional earthing is required.

The safe work area is between the program earths and surrounds the work site.

The switching program can now be written, remembering all isolations must occur
before program earthing is commenced.

Further examples of the practical application of isolation and earthing principles to

typical distribution networks are provided below.

Example 1

Figure 8-6 shows a three-phase overhead network, the work site, a three-phase
transformer X, and a number of single-phase spurs each with multiple transformers.

8-17
Switching Operator's Manual One

Single-phase Single-phase
spur 1 spur 2

Three-phase
main line
Safe work area

IP 1 Work site IP 2

PE 1 PE 2
X
PE 3

Single-phase
spur 3

Figure 8-6 Earthing of rural distribution system with spurs

In Figure 8-6, the work site on the main feeder requires isolation points IP1 and
IP2. These sources of supply must have program earths PE1 and PE2 placed
between these isolation points and the work site. Program earths must be placed
as close to the work site as practicable.

Each transformer between IP1 and IP2 must now be managed:

Transformer X is non-interconnectable and as program earth PE1 will be fitted

between the transformer and the work site no additional earthing is required.

Single-phase spur 1 has non-interconnectable transformers and as program earth

PE1 will be fitted between the transformers and the work site no additional earthing
is required.

Single-phase spur 2 has non-interconnectable transformers and as program earth

PE2 will be fitted between the transformers and the work site no additional earthing
is required.

Single-phase spur 3 has non-interconnectable transformers and must have a

program earth PE3 fitted on the transformer HV conductor into the work site.

The safe work area is between the program earths and surrounds the work site.

The switching program can now be written, remembering all isolations must occur
before program earthing is commenced.

8-18
 Section Eight – Switching For Safety

Example 2

Figure 8-7 shows a diagram of a three-phase overhead network with a single-

phase spur. The work site is part way along the single-phase spur.

Three-phase main line

IP 1
Single-phase spur

PE 1

Work site
Safe work area

PE 2

Figure 8-7 Single-phase spur earthing

The work site requires isolation from the feeder at isolation point IP1. This source of
supply must have program earth PE1 fitted between this isolation point and the
work site. Program earth must be placed as close to the work site as practicable.

All transformers in Figure 8-7 are non-interconnectable. Therefore PE1 provides

the earth required for the transformers between IP1 and PE1. Program earth PE2 is
required to be fitted to provide an earth between the work site and the remaining
transformers at the bottom end of the spur.

The safe work area is between the program earths and surrounds the work site.

The switching program can now be written, remembering all isolations must occur
before program earthing is commenced.

8-19
Switching Operator's Manual One

Example 3

Figure 8-8 shows a diagram of the work site on a three-phase overhead network
with three transformers.

X Safe work
area
PE 1 PE 2

IP 1 IP 3
PE 3
Work
site

Y Z

IP 2
IP 4 IP 5

Figure 8-8 Distribution system earthing

In Figure 8-8, the work site on the main feeder requires isolation points IP1, IP2
and IP3. These sources of supply must have program earths PE1 and PE2 placed
between the isolation points and the work site. Program earths must be placed as
close to the work site as practicable.

Each transformer between IP1, IP2 and IP3 must now be managed :

Transformer X is non-interconnectable and as program earth PE1 will be fitted

between the transformer and the work site no additional earthing is required.

Transformer Y is interconnectable and must be isolated on the LV side IP4 and a

program earth PE3 fitted on the transformer HV conductors into the work site.

Transformer Z is interconnectable and must be isolated on the LV side IP5, as

program earth PE2 will be fitted between the transformer and the work site no
additional earthing is required.

The safe work area is between the program earths and surrounds the work site.

The switching program can now be written, remembering all isolations must occur
before program earthing is commenced.

8-20
 Section Eight – Switching For Safety

Example 4

Figure 8-9 shows an HV overhead feeder with a cable head pole and cable
connecting to a ring main switch. The work site is at the cable head pole and
requires isolation and earthing on all three sources of HV supply. There is one
isolation point IP1 on the ring main switch and two overhead isolation points IP2
and IP3. Program earth PE1 is the ring main earth switch and program earths PE2
and PE3 are applied to the overhead line on each side of the work site.

The safe work area is between the program earths and surrounds the work site.

The switching program can now be written, remembering all isolations must occur
before program earthing is commenced.

PE 2 PE 3

Work site

IP 2 IP 3
Safe
work
area

PE 1

IP 1

Ring main unit

Figure 8-9 Distribution system earthing

8.10 Substation Safe Work Area Delineation

When work is to be carried out in a substation under a work permit, the switching
operator is required to mark out the safe work area by the installation of approved
insulated chain, rope flagging or the use of fixed barriers. The switching operator is
to ensure the following requirements are met:

 the barrier is to be highly visible and at a height that a person cannot

inadvertently cross over or under the barrier

 the barrier is to be arranged with a visible opening so the equipment to be

worked on is accessible without interfering with or crossing over, or under the
barrier

8-21
Switching Operator's Manual One

 walls, fences or other impassable permanent barriers can be used as part of

the boundary for the safe work area, and

 perimeter signs identifying the controlling authority shall be erected (free

standing or attached to rope) adjacent to the visible opening and to all sides
of the work area.

Refer to ESS for specific clearance zones and safe working distances.

An example of a safe work area is shown in Figure 8-10 below.

Isolation Isolation
point Substation fence point

Safe
work
area

Access
to work site

Figure 8-10 Example of safe work area

8-22
 Section Eight – Switching For Safety

8.11 Work Permits

Network Permit to Work

The Network Permit to Work Training Manual describes the following topics relating
to work permits and procedures:

 roles and responsibilities

 work permits

 tags

 locks

 application of work permits, and

 work permit procedural flowcharts.

The switching operator is required to fully understand the Network Permit to Work
procedures.

This manual includes an overview of work permits and activities specifically

applicable to switching operators.

Work Permits

Access on or near the network to carry out work requires the issue of a work
permit. Work permits provide a written record of the safety information transferred
between the switching operator and the work party.

Three work permits are provided to cover the range of access requirements and
types of work to be undertaken. The three work permits are:

 Electrical Access Permit (EAP)

 Sanction to Test (STT)

 Vicinity Authority (VA).

8-23
Switching Operator's Manual One

Work Permit Stages

All work permits progress through several stages involving the switching operator,
Recipient in Charge or Tester in Charge and the Recipients. The table below
provides a description of the activities, the responsible role and the name of the
work permit stage.

Responsible
Description Stage
role

Preparation of work permit

Switching
Work permit issued to RIC/TIC ISSUE
Operator
(Work permit registered with HPCC)
Work permit is accepted RIC or TIC ACCEPTANCE

RIC/TIC manages Recipients’ work permit sign on RIC or TIC SIGN ON

Recipients

Work proceeds under the supervision of the RIC or TIC WORK

RIC/TIC
Recipients
RIC/TIC manages Recipients work permit RIC or TIC SIGN OFF
sign off on work completion
Recipients

Work permit is relinquished RIC or TIC RELINQUISH-

MENT

Work permit is cancelled Switching CANCELLATION

Operator
(Work permit registered with HPCC)

Table 8-4 Work stages and responsibilities

Electrical Access Permit

An Electrical Access Permit (EAP) is a work permit required for work which involves
direct access to network apparatus.

To work on network apparatus under an EAP, a safe work area is required to be

formed surrounding the apparatus. An example of a safe work area for the issue of
an EAP for work on the cable termination pole is shown in Figure 8-1.

The EAP document is shown in Figure 8-11 and Figure 8-12 below. The diagram
has annotations to show the stage and the responsible role for completing the
written details.

8-24
 Section Eight – Switching For Safety

Details
completed
by
switching
operator

Issue
of
Details
work entered
permit by RIC
as working
earths are
applied and
removed

Details
completed
by
switching
operator

Details
Acceptance completed
by RIC

Figure 8-11 Electrical Access Permit – Front

showing the sections of the permit and the people responsible
for completing those sections.

8-25
 Switching Operator's Manual One

Transfer Details
completed
of permit by RICs
between changing
RICs responsibility

Managing Recipients
sign on before
Recipients starting work –
Sign on – sign off when
sign off finished their work

RIC checks
all conditions
Relinquish- are complete
ment by RIC then relinquishes
work permit

Cancellation
by switching
operator

Figure 8-12 Electrical Access Permit – Back

showing the sections of the permit and the people responsible
for completing those sections.

8-26
 Section Eight – Switching For Safety

Sanction To Test

A Sanction to Test (STT) is a work permit required to perform testing work on

network apparatus. The apparatus electrical state required for the issue of a STT is
variable and dependent on the nature of intended testing as requested by the
Tester in Charge.

This variable nature of the apparatus electrical state allows a wide range of test
types, and includes apparatus which is initially isolated and earthed or isolated and
not earthed, de-energised or in the energised state. Typically for distribution testing
(such as VLF testing) the initial state is isolated and earthed, this allows the
connection of test equipment. The earths are removed for the testing and then
reapplied for removal of test equipment. Transmission testing work involves a wider
range of test types and therefore STT may be required to be issued in one of the
several states described above.

Note: The STT is shown in Figure 8-13 and Figure 8-14 below.

The diagram has annotations to show the stage and the responsible role for
completing the written details.

An EAP and STT cannot be issued at the same time, on the same apparatus, due
to the conflicting requirements of the EAP to have a safe work area which is
isolated and earthed and the STT to apply test voltages to apparatus.

8-27
 Switching Operator's Manual One

Details
Issue completed
of by
work switching
operator
permit

Accepted
Acceptance
by TIC

Figure 8-13 Sanction To Test – Front

showing the sections of the permit and the people responsible
for completing those sections.

8-28
 Section Eight – Switching For Safety

Transfer Details
of permit completed
between by TICs
changing
TICs
responsibility

Managing
Recipients
Recipients sign on before
Sign on – starting work –
sign off sign off when
finished their work

TIC checks
all conditions
Relinquish- are complete
ment by TIC then relinquishes
work permit

Cancellation
by switching
operator

Figure 8-14 Sanction To Test – Back

showing the sections of the permit and the people responsible
for completing those sections.

8-29
Switching Operator's Manual One

Vicinity Authority

A Vicinity Authority (VA) is the work permit required to perform work near energised
electrical apparatus. The safe approach distance which must be maintained at all
times from the apparatus is specified in Field Instruction Safe Approach Distances.

Where the required safe approach distance cannot be maintained during the work,
the apparatus must have a safe work area created by being isolated and earthed
and an EAP issued.

An EAP and VA can be issued on the same apparatus at the same time, as the
EAP requires the apparatus to be isolated and earthed, whilst the VA requires the
same apparatus to be treated as alive and the required safe approach distance
maintained at all times.

8-30
 Section Eight – Switching For Safety

Issue Details
of completed
by
work switching
permit operator

Accepted
Acceptance
by RIC

Managing Recipients
Recipients sign on before
starting work –
Sign on – sign off when
sign off finished their work

Relinquish-
ment by RIC
Cancellation
by switching
operator

Figure 8-15 Vicinity Authority

showing the sections of the permit and the people responsible
for completing those sections.

8-31
Switching Operator's Manual One

Operating Agreements and Handover Certificates

Two additional documents which do not give authority to undertake any work on the
network are used to formalise agreements made between different authorities.

These documents are:

 Operating Agreements

 Handover Certificates

Operating Agreement

An Operating Agreement (OA) is an agreement between two operating authorities,

declaring the operational state in which electrical apparatus will be held for the
duration of the OA.

An OA is used when:

 one party needs to work on an item of plant or electrical apparatus which

requires isolation and/or earthing from the adjacent Operating Authority, or

 work on secondary systems or mechanisms requiring the primary electrical

apparatus to be held in a particular state for safety reasons.

An OA is not a work permit, and does not authorise any work to be undertaken. The
appropriate work permit must be issued to allow work to take place. The conditions
stated on the work permit must reference the OA in place. An OA is issued by a
switching operator or Issuing Officer.

Additional information on Operating Agreement requirements is provided in the

Field Instruction Operating Agreement.

8-32
 Section Eight – Switching For Safety

Details
of apparatus
Issue and conditions
of of Agreement
document

Acceptance

Relinquish-
ment by
authorised
person

Cancellation
by authorised
person

Figure 8-16 Operating Agreement

Handover Certificate

Handover Certificates are used where the responsibility for electrical apparatus is
transferred from one authority to another. An example of this is where network
apparatus is constructed and then transferred from the construction authority to the
Operating Authority, who subsequently energises and is responsible for the
apparatus operation. Any future access to this apparatus will require a work permit
provided by the Operating Authority.

8-33
Switching Operator's Manual One

It is a requirement all persons working in the construction phase sign the Handover
Certificate to acknowledge they will treat the apparatus as energised and will need
a work permit for future access to the apparatus.

Details of
apparatus
and conditions

Acknowledge-
ment by parties
of apparatus
and conditions

Figure 8-17 Handover Certificate

8-34
 Section Eight – Switching For Safety

8.12 Tagging, Locks and Barriers

Control and warning tags, locks and barriers are methods used to warn against and
prevent the operation of electrical switching devices.

Note: The formal term used by Horizon Power is tag, however the term label is
interchangeable and often used.

The following tags are used by Horizon Power:

 Danger–Do Not Operate

 Caution–Vicinity Work in Progress
 Danger–Restricted Use
 Warning–Out of Service.

Danger–Do Not Operate

The Danger–Do Not Operate tag is an approved tag attached to electrical

apparatus as an instruction against the operation of that electrical apparatus. It is
used to protect all parties from inadvertent operation of the apparatus at the
isolation points.

Danger–Do Not Operate tags shall only be used in conjunction with switching
programs and electrical apparatus access requirements.

Each Danger–Do Not Operate tag shall be securely attached in a prominent

position to the electrical apparatus being used as a point of isolation. The electrical
apparatus to be worked on must not have a Danger–Do Not Operate tag attached.

Figure 8-18 Danger–Do Not Operate tag

8-35
Switching Operator's Manual One

Caution–Vicinity Work in Progress

The Caution–Vicinity Work in Progress tag is used with the VA and its associated
switching program. It is attached to apparatus listed on the VA, for example, auto-
reclose devices, circuit breakers.

The Caution–Vicinity Work in Progress tag is attached by an appropriately

authorised person to the point of control for that protection equipment. Electrical
apparatus with a Caution–Vicinity Work in Progress tag attached shall not be
operated, altered, or removed by any person other than the switching operator or,
for remote operation, the RIC who attached the tag. Where that switching operator
or RIC is unavailable, another authorised switching operator or RIC can operate,
alter, or remove that tag in accordance with Horizon Power's switching operation
procedures.

Figure 8-19 Caution–Vicinity Work in Progress warning tag

Danger–Restricted Use

The Danger–Restricted Use tag can be used with the STT permit. It is attached by
the switching operator to the apparatus in a prominent position and listed on the
STT permit. This apparatus may be operated in a restricted capacity by the RIC or
TIC under the work permit.

The Danger–Restricted Use tag shall only be permanently removed by an

authorised switching operator. The Danger–Restricted Use tag can be temporary
removed by the RIC/TIC when operating the apparatus and then immediately
replaced.

Specific information shown on the Danger–Restricted Use tag is:

 the item of plant to which the tag is attached

 the PoA work permit or switching program number

 the switching operator and their authorisation number

 the date the STT has been issued

 the telephone number of the person who attached the tag.

8-36
 Section Eight – Switching For Safety

Figure 8-20 Danger–Restricted Use tag

Warning–Out of Service

Where a Warning–Out of Service tag and Danger–Do Not Operate tag is attached
to the same electrical apparatus, the Warning–Out of Service tag shall be removed
before the Danger–Do Not Operate tag is removed. The Warning–Out of Service
tag shall not be removed until that apparatus is ready for service.

Figure 8-21 Warning–Out of Service tag

The only exception to this is under emergency switching conditions where the
appropriate authority permits the Danger–Do Not Operate tag to be removed while
the Warning–Out of Service tag is still attached.

Each Warning–Out of Service tag shall be securely attached in a prominent

position to the electrical apparatus.

Specific information shown on the Warning–Out of Service tag is:

 the electrical apparatus covered by the tag

 the reason for attaching the tag

 a reference number, e.g. the apparatus ID number or serial number

 the name of person attaching the tag, and

8-37
Switching Operator's Manual One

 the date tag is fitted and the telephone number of the person attaching the
tag.

Further details on tags is available in Field Instruction Network Tags.

Locks

Horizon Power uses a Lock Out Tag Out (LOTO) procedure which includes
tagging when isolating HV electrical apparatus. The lock out process includes
dedicated isolation locks incorporated with control and individual personal locks to
create a safe and secure working environment.

Isolation lock Control lock Personal lock

Used by the switching Used by the switching Fitted to the lockout station
operator to isolate operator as a control lock by individual Recipients
apparatus on the lockout station as their personal lock

Figure 8-22 Isolation locks used to isolate apparatus

When isolating a part of the electrical network all network security locks are
replaced with isolation locks and the isolation lock keys are placed in a lockout
station. The lockout station is locked with a control lock and all members of the
work party fit their personal lock to the lockout station.

8-38
 Section Eight – Switching For Safety

8.13 Common Switching Operations

Switching programs have many single step tasks which may require the switching
operator to complete several actions for each step. Examples of these single step
tasks are ‘check off and rack out’, ‘phase out’ and ‘prove de-energised and apply
earths’.

When the switching operator undertakes a single step task it is important the
actions are performed in a systematic and sequential manner to correctly achieve
the required outcome. The following sections elaborate on the actions and
sequence required to complete some of the common single step tasks.

Proving De-energised

Proving de-energised requires the following activities:

1. Prove the test instrument is working.

2. Test instrument is used to prove each phase of the circuit under test is de-
energised.

3. Prove the test instrument is working.

This ensures the test is valid and must be performed at each location where earths
are to be applied.

Applying Earths

Portable Earths

Each set of earths to be applied requires the following activities.

1. Inspect the portable earth leads and connections to ensure they are in good
working order and appropriately rated.

2. Layout the portable earths on the ground at the location where the earths are
to be applied.

3. Connect the main earth to the appropriate earthing point:

a. inside substations use the earth studs on the structures which are
connected the main earth grid

b. outside substations a spike is driven in the ground a minimum of

600mm in the pole alignment, usually one pole from the work site.

8-39
Switching Operator's Manual One

4. Prove de-energised at the location the earths are to be applied.

5. Remain clear of the earth leads and apply to each phase earth with a positive
action. Ensure the phase connections are firmly made and the clamps are
tight.

Earth Switches

Each earth switch to be applied requires the following activities.

1. Prove de-energised at the location the earths are to be applied using a

Modiewark for outdoor switchgear or the voltage indicators provided on
indoor switchgear and ring main units. In many cases the voltage indicators
are non-removable and therefore they must be checked working prior to de-
energisation.

2. Confirm the earth switch is in the ON state, lock and apply danger tag.

Phasing Out

The procedure for LV and HV phasing out has been described in Section 10.

Rack Out and Rack In

Racking out and racking in of indoor switchgear requires a full understanding of the
operation of the interlocks. The typical range of interlocks and their features is
provided in Section 6.5 – Indoor Switchgear Safety Features – Switchgear
Interlocks.

8.14 Switchgear Pre- and Post-switching

Checks
When approaching switchgear the switching operator should always perform the
look, listen and smell checks. Pre-switching checks are performed before switching
operation is undertaken and post-switching checks are performed after the
switching operation is completed.

Pre-switching Checks

The look, listen and smell checks which can be performed before a switching
operation is undertaken are given below.

8-40
 Section Eight – Switching For Safety

LOOK

The switching operator should look and visually check the mechanical and
electrical condition of the switchgear which is to be operated. This is to confirm as
far as practically possible that the switchgear is fit for switching and is in the
expected electrical state. The actual switchgear type will determine which of the
visual checks listed in Table 8-5 can actually be performed.

Checks Description Example of possible problems

Earthing system Check earthing conductors and Missing or damaged sections of

connections are present and in good earthing conductor. (Copper
order. Particular emphasis on the earthing conductor theft has
operating handle and earth mat occurred in the past.)
connections.
Corroded earthing braids on
operating handles.
Operating Check the operating linkages appear Faulty or bent linkages.
mechanism in good order.

Insulators Check the insulators appear in good Broken or cracked insulators.

order.

Contacts Primary contacts appear to be in Burnt or welded in contacts.

good order and not burnt. Contacts
are in the correct open or closed
position. Conducting braids are in
good order.

Status indicators Check ON and OFF mechanical and Outdoor circuit breaker electrical
– mechanical electrical indicators confirm the indicator driven from the mech box
and electrical expected electrical state. auxiliary switches may show OFF
whilst mechanical indicator shows
ON due to a broken drive shaft.
Instrumentation Voltmeter and ammeter instruments Voltmeter and ammeter indications
show expected electrical state concur do not agree with status.
with the status indicators.
Insulation SF6 gas pressure checks. Switchgear leaking insulation
medium material depending on the amount
condition Oil level checks. may prevent the switchgear being
operated.

Table 8-5 Pre-switching visual checks

LISTEN

The switching operator should listen for the abnormal sound of arcing. It should be
noted that dependent on the humidity and level of insulator pollution, outdoor
transmission HV switchyards can have a low sound level which is not considered
abnormal.

8-41
Switching Operator's Manual One

SMELL

The switching operator should be aware if the smell of insulation burning or the
pungent smell of ozone is detected, it is an indication of abnormal electrical arcing
or tracking. Consideration must be given to de-energising the switchgear, pending
further investigation.

Post-switching Checks

After performing the required switching operation the switching operator should
undertake a subset of the look, listen and smell checks as described in the pre-
switching checks. In Table 8-5 the operating mechanism, insulators, contacts,
status indicators and instrumentation checks are applicable. Listening for arcing
after switching is also appropriate, however the smell check may not be effective
because it can take time for the smell to accumulate.

8.15 Switching-related hazards

Switching is a task that has various potential hazards that switching operators
should be aware of and consider. The correct application of PPE and switching
procedures assist in reducing the risk to the switching operator of the hazard.

Electric Shock

Due to the proximity of live exposed apparatus the switching operator must always
be aware of the risk of electric shock and ensure that safe approach distances are
maintained. Details of safe approach distances is given in Field Instruction Safe
Approach Distances.

Switchgear Explosion

Due to the possible, albeit unlikely risk of an unexpected switchgear explosion, it is

normal practice to operate switchgear from a remote location where ever possible.
Furthermore, as remote operation is usually from HPCC, the switching operator
must not be in the immediate vicinity of the switchgear when operated by HPCC.

Touch Potential

When switchgear fails resulting in fault current flowing into the ground via the
earthing system, this will create a risk of touch potential to the switching operator.
This fault current and related touch potential risk will be removed when the
associated protective device operates.

8-42
 Section Eight – Switching For Safety

Touch potential is the voltage difference between the switching device earthing and
the surrounding earth (ground). This voltage is graded and decreases as the
distance from the switch increases as shown below.

12.7 kV

Touch potential
12.7 kV – 10 kV =
Electric shock of 2.7 kV

12.7 kV

10 kV

8 kV Both feet
in the 10 kV zone
6 kV

Figure 8-23 Touch potential

To mitigate the risk of touch potential the switching operator must wear switching
gloves and insulated footwear. Where the installed earth mat may not be effective
(such as a pole top switch) an equipotential mat is placed at the foot of a switch
and connected to the earthing conductor of the switch. This places the operator’s
hands and feet at the same potential.

Step Potential

When switchgear fails resulting in fault current flowing into the ground via the
earthing system this will create a risk of step potential to the switching operator.
This fault current and related step potential risk will be removed when the
associated protective device operates.

Step potential is an electric shock hazard that occurs when a person’s feet are
exposed to voltage differential created by the fault current flowing in the ground.

To mitigate the risk of step potential the switching operator must wear insulated
footwear. Where the installed earth mat may not be effective (such as a pole top
switch) an equipotential mat is placed at the foot of a switch and connected to the
earthing conductor of the switch. Provided the switching operator remains with both
feet on the equipotential mat during the switching operation the risk of step
potential is removed as both feet will be at the same potential.

For this reason the switching operator must inspect the switch prior to approaching
the site for loose or broken switch connection, conductors or insulators.

8-43
Switching Operator's Manual One

12.7 kV

Step potential
8 kV – 6 kV =
Electric shock of 2 kV
12.7 kV

10 kV

8 kV Left foot
in the 6 kV zone
6 kV
Right foot
in the 8 kV zone

Figure 8-24 Step potential

Toxic Fumes from Fire or Explosion

In the event of a fire or explosion involving electrical apparatus and insulating

materials, the switching operator must be aware that toxic gases may result from
burning materials. It is essential for the operator to fully ventilate enclosed spaces
before entering the area.

Substances that may emit toxic fumes when heated or burning are:

 plastic insulated cable

 PILCSWA cable

 insulating oil

 SF6 gas.

Arc Flash and Arc Blast

One of the most dangerous consequences of a switching incident is an arc flash

and the accompanying arc blast. A description of arc flash and arc blast and the
possible impact to the switching operator is provided below.

8-44
 Section Eight – Switching For Safety

Arc Flash

An arc flash is the heat and light energy released when an arc occurs and current
flows through a normally nonconductive medium such as air. An arc flash can
happen in less than one millisecond (1/1000 of a second).

Causes of arc flash can include inadvertent bridging of energised electrical

contacts, breaking current on contacts not designed to interrupt current, dropped
tools, corrosion of materials or a failure of insulation.

The flash produced because of this breakdown is similar to the light radiation
emitted by a commercial electrical arc welder. The heat that is released from an arc
flash can be in excess of 20,000°C. Such temperatures will vaporise any known
material on earth. Obviously, any unprotected flesh or eyes of a switching operator
may be severely burned if exposed to an arc flash.

Arc Blast

The arc flash produces an arc blast which is an explosion where the massive
amount of energy rapidly vaporises metal conductors, blasting molten metal and
superheated material (plasma) outward with extreme force.

This violent event can cause the destruction of switchgear and nearby equipment.
The high velocities of molten metal particles can cause severe and possibly fatal
burns, or blindness, internal organ damage or death through inhalation of the
superheated air or fumes.

Figure 8-25 below shows an arc flash on an indoor switchboard.

Figure 8-25 Indoor switchboard arc flash and arc blast

8-45
Switching Operator's Manual One

The switching operator must always wear the PPE appropriate to the switching task
as detailed in Field Instruction Worksite Clothing / Personal Protective Equipment
Requirements.

Switchroom Egress

Before switching begins in switchroom buildings and other confined spaces, the
switching operator must ensure all available exits are functioning and unobstructed
to allow rapid egress if required.

All persons not required to be present during switching operations should vacate
the switchroom building.

Portable Equipotential Mat

Due to the risk of damaged earthing which will not be discovered by visual
inspection the switching operator is to fit an equipotential mat when switching pole
top switches. Together with appropriate PPE this will minimise the risk of touch and
step potential. Full details of the requirements and procedures for the use of
equipotential mats are provided in Field Instruction Use of Portable Equipotential
Mat for Switching.

Switching Tools and Test Equipment

The switching operator must ensure switching tools and test equipment are
appropriately rated for the task intended to be performed.

Before use by the switching operator, all switching tools and test equipment must
be checked to ensure they are in good working order and up-to-date if a routine test
date is applicable. Where provided, built-in or self-test accessories are to be used
by the switching operator to prove the test equipment is functional.

For example, the HV insulated operating stick (also known as ‘hot sticks’ or HV live
line sticks) may be used for HV and LV switching. Six monthly HV insulation tests
are required and the sticks marked to show the expiry date. Where the date has
expired, re-testing must be completed before the sticks can be used for HV
switching.

Refer to Field Instruction Testing and Use of High Voltage Insulated Equipment for
further information.

8-46
 Section Eight – Switching For Safety

Switchgear Operation Competence

Switchgear operation can involve many individual sequenced steps which are
specific to the switchgear make and type. Therefore, a switching operator must only
operate switchgear they have previously operated and are competent in its
operation.

The Switchgear Instruction Manual provides visual images of switchgear operation

and it is intended to be used as a reminder for switching operators that may not
have operated that type of switchgear for some time.

Where a switching operator has not previously operated switchgear of a particular

make and type or do not feel competent in its operation, they must be instructed by
an experienced switching operator competent in the switchgear operation.

An opportunity to become familiar with particular switchgear operation (including

newly introduced switchgear) also exists during the construction stage before the
switchgear is connected to the network and the reading of switchgear manuals.

8-47
 SECTION NINE

Distribution Switching
Programs

Table of Contents
9. Distribution Switching Programs ........................................................... 9-1

9.1 Introduction......................................................................................... 9-1

9.2 Roles and Responsibilities .................................................................. 9-1
9.2.1 Program Writer .............................................................................. 9-2
9.2.2 Program Checker .......................................................................... 9-2
9.2.3 HPCC Controller ............................................................................ 9-2
9.3 Program Writing Tools and Software .................................................. 9-2
9.3.1 PowerOn Advantage ..................................................................... 9-3
9.4 Switching Program Overview .............................................................. 9-4
9.4.1 Purpose ......................................................................................... 9-4
9.4.2 Requirement for a Switching Program ........................................... 9-4
9.4.3 Switching Program Structure ......................................................... 9-5
9.5 PoA Switching Programs .................................................................... 9-7
9.5.1 Switching Program Header ............................................................ 9-8
9.5.2 Switching Program Steps ............................................................ 9-10
9.6 Program Writing Considerations ....................................................... 9-14
9.6.1 Load ............................................................................................ 9-14
9.6.2 Voltage Levels ............................................................................. 9-15
9.6.3 HV Tap Removal to Create an Isolation Point.............................. 9-15
9.6.4 Switching using Single-Phase Devices ........................................ 9-19
9.6.5 Constraint with Live Line Tap Removal ....................................... 9-19
9.6.6 Paralleling of Feeders and Transformers ..................................... 9-19
9.6.7 For LV interconnection, only the minimum number of
transformers required to supply the load should be interconnected. It is
desirable the interconnected transformers should be on the same HV
feeder where possible.LV Isolation and Distribution Transformer
Management ............................................................................................ 9-20
9.6.8 Phasing Out ................................................................................ 9-20

i
Switching Operator's Manual One

9.6.9 Ferroresonance ........................................................................... 9-21

9.6.10 Use of LV Fused Jumpers ........................................................... 9-21
9.6.11 Switchgear Ratings ..................................................................... 9-21
9.6.12 Customer Outages ...................................................................... 9-22
9.6.13 Efficient Switching Program Sequence ........................................ 9-22
9.6.14 Preparation of System Change Documentation ........................... 9-22
9.7 Running a Switching Program .......................................................... 9-22
9.7.1 Commencement of Switching ...................................................... 9-23
9.7.2 Sequence of Instructions ............................................................. 9-23
9.8 Backup Process. Job dispatch via phone and using paper copy of
the Switching Schedule. ............................................................................... 9-23
9.8.1 Paper Switching Schedule ........................................................... 9-24
9.8.2 Actions by SWOP before contacting HPSC for Operating
Instructions (initially and for multiple switching locations). ........................ 9-25
9.8.3 Place keeping practises when using the Backup Process. .......... 9-25
9.8.4 Recording of Operating Times. .................................................... 9-26
9.8.5 Error Correction. .......................................................................... 9-26

ii
 Section Nine – Distribution Switching Programs

List of Figures
Figure 9-1 PoA virtual client and mobile tablet .................................................. 9-3
Figure 9-3 PoA Switching Program Header ...................................................... 9-9
Figure 9-4 The fields in the PoA switching program ........................................ 9-10
Figure 9-5 Sample of a PoA switching program .............................................. 9-12
Figure 9-6 Network diagram before commencing the switching program ........ 9-13
Figure 9-7 Network diagram showing worksite isolated................................... 9-13
Figure 9-8 Network diagram showing worksite ................................................ 9-14

iii
Switching Operator's Manual One

List of Tables
Table 9-1 Recommended switching program notification period for work permits 9-
4
Table 9-2 Typical EAP switching program outline .............................................. 9-7

iv
9. Distribution Switching
Programs

9.1 Introduction
The switching program is one of the most important parts of safe and successful
switching on the Horizon Power network. It is a list of switching operations that are
placed in a logical sequence to ensure the operation of electrical apparatus is
carried out safely, and includes:

 remote switching by the HPCC controller

 field switching by the switching operator, and

 issue and cancellation of work permits.

The switching program is a means of communication between switching operators

and HPCC. It states what is to be done and the exact sequence of operations, thus
reducing possibilities for error.

Switching programs are required whenever switching operators perform switching

operations on the network. This switching is most frequently carried out to provide
access to network apparatus for the issue of a work permit, however there are also
occasions where a switching program does not involve a work permit.

9.2 Roles and Responsibilities

A planned switching program is prepared and approved through a sequence that
includes a program writer, a program checker and a final network compatibility
check by the HPCC controller prior to commencement of the program.

When unplanned switching is required due to fault or overload conditions the

switching program is prepared by the HPCC controller in collaboration with the on-
site switching operator. These programs will be prepared by the HPCC controller
and checked by the switching operator.

9-1
Switching Operator's Manual One

9.2.1 Program Writer

The program writer is the person who initiates and prepares the switching program.
This person must be authorised and hold the appropriate switching operator’s
authority for the task involved.

The program writer must have a clear understanding of what is required when they
prepare a program. They must be aware of the scope of work to be undertaken and
the switching operations required to safely allow the work to be completed.

As switching programs are most frequently written to provide access to network

apparatus for the issue of a work permit, the program writer must ensure the
switching program contains the necessary switching operations to place network
apparatus in the appropriate electrical state for the required work permit.

9.2.2 Program Checker

The program checker is the person who reviews the switching program for errors
and to verify that it is fit for purpose. They must be authorised and hold the
appropriate switching operator’s authority for the task involved.

The program checker must have a clear understanding of what is required when
they check a program. They must be aware of the scope of work to be undertaken
and the switching operations required to safely allow the work to be completed.

9.2.3 HPCC Controller

The HPCC controller is the final authority to review a switching program. They must
be authorised at the appropriate switching authorisation level.

Prior to execution of a switching program the HPCC controller is responsible for

conducting a final check to verify network compatibility and for conflicts with other
switching programs.

In the event of unplanned network conditions (e.g. a fault or overload), the HPCC
controller will prepare a program in collaboration with the on-site switching
operator. In these situations the HPCC controller will be the program writer and the
program checker will be the on-site switching operator.

9.3 Program Writing Tools and Software

Switching programs are prepared using the PowerOn Advantage (PoA) Network
Management System (NMS).

9-2
 Section Nine – Distribution Switching Programs

9.3.1 PowerOn Advantage

PowerOn Advantage (PoA) is a computer-based SCADA system that allows for

switching programs to be electronically compiled in list form. PoA clients are used
in HPCC and in the regional depots for the preparation of switching programs.

Switching programs are normally executed using PowerOn Advantage mobile

which allows the switching operator to accept and confirm switching operations
using a mobile tablet. Where mobile tablet technology is available, it is used by
both the HPCC controller and the switching operator to execute and communicate
the instruction and completion of each step in the switching program.

If mobile tablet program delivery is unavailable, a paper copy of the program is

used in the field by the switching operator. (See section 9.8 for more information in
this regard).

Some of the many functions contained in PoA are:

 remote control and operation of telemetered devices from HPCC

 recording of switching programs with work permits displayed on the network

diagram

 maintaining Horizon Power’s network model in real time, and

 remote network monitoring with associated alarm processing.

The PoA system includes Geo Viewer (a geocentric distribution database) and
Trouble Call System (TCS) which models the network diagram with real time
accurate information as switching and network outages occur.

Figure 9-1 PoA virtual client and mobile tablet

9-3
Switching Operator's Manual One

9.4 Switching Program Overview

9.4.1 Purpose

The primary concerns when writing a switching program are:

• safety of the switching operator, staff and contractors

• safety of the general public

• welfare of Horizon Power apparatus, public and private property, and

• where possible, to maintain supply to customers.

9.4.2 Requirement for a Switching Program

Switching programs are required whenever switching operators perform switching

operations on the network. This switching is most frequently carried out to provide
access to network apparatus for the issue of a work permit, however there are also
occasions where switching does not involve a work permit.

Notification Period for a Switching Program

To ensure there is sufficient time for HPCC to perform compatibility checks on

programs, switching programs are required to be sent to HPCC 3 days in advance
of the planned work start date.

Network changes that require the creation of a “patch” in PowerOn will need to be
sent to HPCC 10 days in advance of the planned work start date.

Recommended
notification
Type of work permit period
or document (days)

Planned work 3

System Change 10

Table 9-1 Recommended switching program notification period.

9-4
 Section Nine – Distribution Switching Programs

Work Permit Switching

Switching programs are required to establish network apparatus in an appropriate

electrical state for the issue of work permits. The switching program will also
include steps for the issue and cancellation of the work permit. Details of the
switching program requirements for the three work permits which Horizon Power
use are described below.

Electrical Access Permit

Direct access to network apparatus for construction, maintenance and repair work
requires an Electrical Access Permit (EAP). The switching program must create a
safe work area by establishing isolation points and applying program earths on
each possible source of supply into the work area.

Sanction to Test

Testing and commissioning access to network apparatus requires a Sanction To

Test (STT) work permit. For this permit, the switching program provides the
network apparatus in the state requested by the Tester in Charge.

For example, when VLF insulation testing is required, the switching program will
provide the apparatus with established and unchangeable isolation points, however
the earths which were initially applied for access to the cable connections, may be
operated as required by the test procedure.

Vicinity Authority

A Vicinity Authority (VA) authorises work near live network apparatus whilst
remaining outside the safe approach distance for the voltage concerned. The
switching program will include steps to disable any installed auto-reclose on the
protection apparatus on the supply side of the work area.

Non-work permit switching

Switching programs are also required for switching which does not involve the
issue of a work permit. An example of this is where distribution feeders require load
balancing by a permanent change in the location of a network normally open point.

9.4.3 Switching Program Structure

A switching program has a defined structure and usually consists of an isolation

and restoration stage, each of which have many steps. These individual steps can
be broadly classified into three groups, namely communication, switching and work
permit steps.

9-5
 Switching Operator's Manual One

Communication Steps

Communication steps occur between the HPCC controller and the switching
operator at the commencement and completion of both the isolation and restoration
stages. Work permit issue and cancellation is also communicated as part of
isolation and restoration stages.

Switching Steps

HPCC controller switching steps are required to operate remotely-controlled

primary apparatus remotely controlled secondary protection and equipment control
systems.

Switching operator switching steps are required to operate non-telemetered and

manually operated primary apparatus and the application and removal of portable
earths. The switching operator steps will also include the fitting of barriers and tags
such as Danger–Do Not Operate tags on isolation points.

Depending on the nature of the work, testing and commissioning steps

may also be included in the program.Work Permit Steps

Switching operator steps are also included for work permit issue and cancellation.

An outline of the typical distribution switching program steps for the creation of a
safe work area and issue of an EAP is provided in the left hand column in Table 9-2
the other columns indicate the program step type.

Switching program contents Step type

Comms Switching Permit

Isolation
Switching operator – Contact HPCC and request

permission to proceed

HPCC and switching operator switching to:

 HPCC set conditions as required

(e.g. disable auto-reclose, SEF)
 interconnection/back feed as required
to maintain supply (e.g. closing open points) 
 establish de-energised area 
Switching operator – establish isolated area 
Switching operator – establish safe work area
by proving de-energised and applying program earths 

Switching operator – Advise HPCC isolation complete

 
and issue of work permit (EAP).
Restoration

9-6
 Section Nine – Distribution Switching Programs

Switching operator – advise HPCC of work complete

and cancellation of work permit (EAP).  

Switching operator – removes program earths 

Switching operator – restores isolations 

HPCC and switching operator switching to:

 re-energise area
 remove interconnection / back feed established 
in the isolation
HPCC restore conditions as required
(e.g. enable auto-reclose, SEF) 

HPCC and switching operator confirm program

complete 

Table 9-2 Typical EAP switching program outline

9.5 PoA Switching Programs

PoA provides the program writer with facilities to write and safety check switching
programs. Switching programs are written as switching schedules in PoA which
then allows the PoA inbuilt safety logic to provide a basic safety check of the
switching program.

To write a switching program in PoA the program writer populates the fields in the
switching program by selecting on-screen apparatus and selecting the appropriate
operation options from drop down menus.

Writing a PoA switching program requires the completion of the header page and
the switching steps to provide:

 interconnection of HV and LV (where necessary)

 isolating the required work area

 proving de-energised and earthing

 issuing the permit, and

 restoration steps.

A PowerOn Advantage Introduction Program Writer Training Manual is included in

the Appendices.

9-7
Switching Operator's Manual One

9.5.1 Switching Program Header

The header provides a summary of the purpose of the switching program and
allows the HPCC controller a quick reference when conducting compatibility
checks between programs and during fault activity.

The program header Job Name/Description should be completed by the switching

operator in the concise format below (see Figure 9-3):

VERSION –– DD/MM/YYYY – CIRCUIT – JOB DESCRIPTION – SWITCHING

OPERATOR

Switching programs are stored as individually numbered jobs in the Work Package
Manager module in PoA.

Information such as supply interruptions and customer notifications are populated

in the appropriate fields relevant to the required work task.

Further information is included in the header to provide clear reference to who

created, checked and approved the program.

9-8
 Section Nine – Distribution Switching Programs

Request No.37015
Job No.J17-3836-v
Job Status Running
View detailed version (not suitable for printed programs)

Job Name/Purpose of V1 - 24/05/2017 - EHR 304 - POLE REPLACEMENT - COREY BENNIER

Work

Start Date/Time 24-May-2017 Created by Corey Bennier Date/Time 24-May-2017

09:00 10:36

End Date/Time 24-May-2017 Checked by Carl Weinert Date/Time 24-May-2017

17:00 10:41

Plan Duration (hrs) 8 Approved by Brett Taylor Date/Time 24-May-2017

11:24

Requested By

Switch Operator IC BENNIER,COREY- Telephone No. 0419812050 Radio No.

0419812050(1to6)

Switch Operator Telephone No.

Operation District/Zone Esperance Desk Contact No. 9159 7244

Comments/Notes

Substation/Feeders/Reclosers Limits of Isolation

EHR 304.0 , EHR 307.0 , GLADSTONE ST,4 N CNR WINDICH

ST,CHADWICK, 11kV DOF ESP0112
Supply Interruption No (DOF)

Involves Permanent No NORSEMAN RD,3 NE CNR

System Change GLADSTONE ST,CHADWICK, 11kV
PTSD 2022
Customer No
Notification DEMPSTER ST SOUTH SIDE,CNR
GLADSTONE ST,ESPERANC, 11kV
DOF ESP0011 (DOF)

BRAZIER ST,7 E CNR RANDELL

ST,CHADWICK, 11kV PTSD 2085

Limits of Work Area

DEMPSTER ST SOUTH SIDE,CNR

GLADSTONE ST,ESPERANC, 11kV
DOF ESP0011 (DOF)

Work Site, 11kV Junction 2421578

Work Site, 11kV Junction 2812660

Figure 9-2 PoA Switching Program Header

9-9
Switching Operator's Manual One

9.5.2 Switching Program Steps

In this area of the switching program the program writer must include the steps for
communication, HPCC and switching operator switching, and permit management.

Program writers should attempt to keep the size of the isolated area to a minimum.
However, there may be instances where the isolated area will need to be expanded
to accommodate larger clearances, e.g. for cranes and other work site vehicles.

Furthermore when writing the switching program steps, consideration needs to be

given to maintaining supply by interconnection (back feeds) of circuits when
necessary before creating the isolated area.

Figure 9-3 shows the fields in a PoA switching program for the switching steps and
their purpose. These fields are required to uniquely identify who, where and what
needs to be done.

The Item field

identifies each
unique step The Location field
and is useful identifies the physical The Action field
in communication location of the identifies the status
between HPCC component (apparatus) or action
and switching operators. to be operated. to be undertaken.

Item Operator Location Component (Volt, Type, ID) Action System Date / Time

The Operator field The Component field The System Date / Time
identifies the role identifies the voltage, type, field provides space
responsible and identification for the time of the completion
for performing the Item. of the component of the Item.
(apparatus)
to be operated.

Figure 9-3 The fields in the PoA switching program

PoA Switching Program Example

A typical PoA switching program is shown below and the series of figures
which follow illustrate the network diagram at particular stages of running the
switching program.

Note: The formal term used by Horizon Power is tag, however the term label is
interchangeable and often used.

9-10
 Section Nine – Distribution Switching Programs

Item Operator Location Component Action System

(Volt, Type, ID) Date /
Time

1 Schedule

2 BENNIER,COREY- Contact HPDC,Req

0419812050(1to6) Perm to Commence

3 BENNIER,COREY- GLADSTONE ST,4 N 11kV TX ESP0112 LV Apply

0419812050(1to6) CNR WINDICH Backfeed/Interconnect
ST,CHADWICK LV

4 BENNIER,COREY- GLADSTONE ST,4 N 11kV TX ESP0112 LV LV DISO OFF, Fit

0419812050(1to6) CNR WINDICH Barriers & DL
ST,CHADWICK

5 BENNIER,COREY- NORSEMAN RD,L223, 11kV TX ESP0011 LV Apply

0419812050(1to6) A/4 DEMPSTER Backfeed/Interconnect
ST,ESPERANCE LV

6 BENNIER,COREY- NORSEMAN RD,L223, 11kV TX ESP0011 LV LV DISO OFF, Fit

0419812050(1to6) A/4 DEMPSTER Barriers & DL
ST,ESPERANCE

7 HPDC EHR Circuit 307 A/R Tele Set Disable

8 HPDC EHR Circuit 304 A/R Tele Set Disable

9 BENNIER,COREY- DEMPSTER ST SOUTH 11kV DOF ESP0011 Off & Attach DL

0419812050(1to6) SIDE,CNR GLADSTONE (DOF)
ST,ESPERANC

10 BENNIER,COREY- GLADSTONE ST,4 N 11kV DOF ESP0112 Off & Attach DL

0419812050(1to6) CNR WINDICH (DOF)
ST,CHADWICK

11 BENNIER,COREY- NORSEMAN RD,5S 11kV PTSD 2019 On

0419812050(1to6) IRENE
ST,CASTLETOWN

12 BENNIER,COREY- NORSEMAN RD,3 NE 11kV PTSD 2022 Off & Attach DL

0419812050(1to6) CNR GLADSTONE
ST,CHADWICK

13 BENNIER,COREY- BRAZIER ST,7 E CNR 11kV PTSD 2085 Off & Attach DL
0419812050(1to6) RANDELL
ST,CHADWICK

14 BENNIER,COREY- Work Site 11kV Junction 2812660 Prove De-energise,

0419812050(1to6) Attach Earth

15 BENNIER,COREY- Work Site 11kV Junction 2421578 Prove De-energise,

0419812050(1to6) Attach Earth

16 BENNIER,COREY- Permit Issue Details Comments

0419812050(1to6)

17 BENNIER,COREY- EAP-5691-v on/at O/H Issue EAP

0419812050(1to6) Main between Work Site,
11kV Junction 2421578
and Work Site, 11kV
Junction 2812660

18 HPDC EHR Circuit 307 A/R Tele Set Enable

19 HPDC EHR Circuit 304 A/R Tele Set Enable

20 BENNIER,COREY- Advise HPDC Isolation

0419812050(1to6) Complete

21 BENNIER,COREY- Advise HPDC

0419812050(1to6) Restoration to Start

9-11
 Switching Operator's Manual One

Item Operator Location Component Action System

(Volt, Type, ID) Date /
Time

22 BENNIER,COREY- Check Staff &

0419812050(1to6) Equipment Clear

23 BENNIER,COREY- Cancel EA No#

0419812050(1to6)

24 BENNIER,COREY- Work Site 11kV Junction 2421578 Remove Earth

0419812050(1to6)

25 BENNIER,COREY- Work Site 11kV Junction 2812660 Remove Earth

0419812050(1to6)

26 EHR Circuit 304 A/R Tele Set Disable

27 EHR Circuit 307 A/R Tele Set Disable

28 BENNIER,COREY- BRAZIER ST,7 E CNR 11kV PTSD 2085 Remove DL & On

0419812050(1to6) RANDELL
ST,CHADWICK

29 BENNIER,COREY- NORSEMAN RD,3 NE 11kV PTSD 2022 Remove DL & On

0419812050(1to6) CNR GLADSTONE
ST,CHADWICK

30 BENNIER,COREY- NORSEMAN RD,5S 11kV PTSD 2019 Off

0419812050(1to6) IRENE
ST,CASTLETOWN

31 BENNIER,COREY- DEMPSTER ST SOUTH 11kV DOF ESP0011 Remove DL & On

0419812050(1to6) SIDE,CNR GLADSTONE (DOF)
ST,ESPERANC

32 BENNIER,COREY- GLADSTONE ST,4 N 11kV DOF ESP0112 Remove DL & On

0419812050(1to6) CNR WINDICH (DOF)
ST,CHADWICK

33 EHR Circuit 304 A/R Tele Set Enable

34 EHR Circuit 307 A/R Tele Set Enable

35 BENNIER,COREY- GLADSTONE ST,4 N 11kV TX ESP0112 LV LV DISO ON, Remove

0419812050(1to6) CNR WINDICH Barriers & DL
ST,CHADWICK

36 GLADSTONE ST,4 N 11kV TX ESP0112 LV Remove Backfeed

CNR WINDICH
ST,CHADWICK

37 BENNIER,COREY- NORSEMAN RD,L223, 11kV TX ESP0011 LV LV DISO ON, Remove

0419812050(1to6) A/4 DEMPSTER Barriers & DL
ST,ESPERANCE

38 BENNIER,COREY- NORSEMAN RD,L223, 11kV TX ESP0011 LV Remove Backfeed

0419812050(1to6) A/4 DEMPSTER
ST,ESPERANCE

39 BENNIER,COREY- Advise HPDC

0419812050(1to6) Restoration Complete

Figure 9-4 Sample of a PoA switching program

9-12
 Section Nine – Distribution Switching Programs

Figure 9-5 Network diagram before commencing the switching program

Figure 9-6 Network diagram showing worksite isolated

Program completed up to and including item 13.

9-13
Switching Operator's Manual One

Figure 9-7 Network diagram showing worksite

isolated, earthed and EAP issued
Program completed up to and including item 17.

9.6 Program Writing Considerations

The switching program writer must be aware of the wide range of technical,
network specific and customer related considerations discussed in this section.
This will enable the writer to determine those issues which are relevant and
required to be addressed as part of writing each switching program. In most cases
many issues may not be relevant to a particular program and can be readily
excluded from further consideration.

9.6.1 Load

Switching programs may require load to be moved or reduced in order that the job
may be done.

Where load is moved, the program writer must decide:

 where to transfer the load

 if capacity is available

 if the time is important (hour, day, season)

 if there are any other limiting factors, e.g. a section of undersized overhead
conductor or cable.

9-14
 Section Nine – Distribution Switching Programs

Where it is not possible to transfer load resulting in customer interruptions, the

program writer must:

 ensure notifications are provided for all customers who will have their supply
interrupted

 negotiate outages for commercial and industrial customers.

9.6.2 Voltage Levels

The program writer should determine whether any voltage checks are required.

If checks are needed, the program writer must decide:

 where they will be made

 when (before, during or after switching), and

 if there are to be further checks.

Typical checks include the following:

 confirm that supply has been maintained within satisfactory limits at the point
of isolation

 if necessary, repeat the checks if the load pattern is irregular, and

 take notice of possible voltage variations, where customers have voltage

sensitive equipment.

9.6.3 HV Tap Removal to Create an Isolation Point.

When selecting isolation points for a switching program it may be necessary to

remove HV taps to limit the size of an isolated area.

Due to the hazards encountered when removing taps live line, there are conditions
that apply, depending on the connection types.

Single-phase Spur

Removing a single-phase live line clamp off a single-phase network is considered

switching, similar to removing a DOF, a VA permit is therefore not required. This
operation does not require a recloser or circuit breaker to be set to manual,
although when working on steel pole networks disabling auto reclose is preferred.

9-15
Switching Operator's Manual One

A switching operator may at any time request HPCC to disable the auto reclose
should they feel it necessary due to safety concerns.

Single-Phase Tap and Three-phase Tap Removal from a Three-phase

Line.

Switching VA Required Method Auto reclose

Activity function disabled

Single Phase Tap. Yes No Link Stick Yes

Live Line Clamp
disconnection

Three Phase Tap. Yes No Link Stick Yes

Live Line Clamp
disconnection

Single Phase Tap. No Yes Glove & Yes

Parallel Groove Barrier
Clamp
disconnection

Three Phase Tap. No Yes Glove & Yes

Parallel Groove Barrier
Clamp
disconnection

Single-Phase Tap (Live Line Clamp).

The following risk mitigation measures shall apply when disconnecting a single phase live
line clamp using link sticks from a three phase overhead line for the purposes of creating an
isolation point.

The measures being:

 A Switching Job Risk Assessment (JRA) shall be carried out by the Switching
Operator.
 The length of the spur being disconnected shall be kept as short as possible to limit
capacitive charging as far as practically possible.
 Maximum unloaded spur lengths.
a). 11kV / 12.7kV rated line - 15km
b). 19.1kV /22kV rated line - 4km
c). 33kV rated line - 1.5km
 The respective upstream protective device with respect to the line tap removal i.e.
re-closer shall be disabled and reflected on the program.
 The removal of the line tap itself must be reflected as an isolation step and point in
the program.
 Removal of the line tap shall be carried out by a Competent Person. Note: The
Switching Operator and Competent Person may be the same person in some
instances.

9-16
 Section Nine – Distribution Switching Programs

 An Observer must be posted when the line tap is disconnected and reconnected.
 The removed line tap shall be tagged as an isolation point with a Do Not Operate
Tag for the later Electrical Access Permit (EAP).
 The removed tap and section of conductor must be mechanically secured to the
running earth conductor and not be left dangling.

Three-Phase Tap (Live Line Clamp).

The following risk mitigation measures shall apply when disconnecting a three phase line
tap on a three phase system by means of using link sticks for the purpose of creating an
isolation point.

These being:

 A Switching Job Risk Assessment (JRA) shall be carried out by the Switching
Operator.
 The length of the spur being disconnected shall be kept as short as possible in
order to limit any capacitive charging as far as practically possible.
 Maximum unloaded spur lengths.
a). 11kV / 12.7kV rated line - 15km
b). 19.1 kV / 22kV rated line - 4km
c). 33kV rated line - 1.5km
 The respective upstream protective device with respect to the line tap removal i.e.
re-closer shall be disabled and reflected on the program.
 A specific comprehensive Job Risk Assessment shall be carried out for the removal
and replacement of the line taps.
 Removal of the line tap shall be carried out by a Competent Person. Note: The
Switching Operator and Competent Person may be the same person in some
instances.
 The removal of the line tap itself must be reflected as an isolation step and point in
the program required for the later Electrical Access Permit (EAP).
 As a critical step in the process, an Observer must be posted when the line taps are
disconnected and reconnected.
 The removed line taps shall be tagged as isolation points with a Do Not Operate
Tag for the later issue of the EAP.
 The removed taps and sections of conductor must be mechanically secured and
not be left dangling.

Single-Phase Tap (Parallel Groove Clamp).

The following risk mitigation measures shall apply when disconnecting a parallel groove tap
by means of glove and barrier methods for the purposes of creating an isolation point.

These being:

9-17
Switching Operator's Manual One

 A Switching Job Risk Assessment (JRA) shall be carried out by the Switching
Operator.
 The length of the spur being disconnected shall be kept as short as possible in
order to limit any capacitive charging as far as practically possible.
 Maximum unloaded spur lengths.
a). 11kV / 12.7kVrated line - 15km
b). 19.1kV /22kV rated line - 4km
c). 33kV rated line - 1.5km
 The respective upstream protective device for the clamp disconnection i.e. re-closer
shall be disabled and reflected on the switching program.
 The issue and cancellation of Vicinity Access Permit (VA) for the disconnection of
the clamps shall be reflected in the switching program.
 The removed line tap shall be tagged as an isolation point with a Do Not Operate
Tag for the issue of the later Electrical Access permit (EAP).
 The removed tap and section of conductor must be mechanically secured to the
running earth conductor and not be left dangling.
 The removal of the line tap itself must be reflected as an isolation step and point in
the program required for the later EAP.
 A Vicinity Access Permit (VA) shall be used for the reconnection of the clamps once
the later EAP has been cancelled.

Three-phase Tap (Parallel Groove Clamp).

The following risk mitigation measures shall apply when disconnecting a three phase
parallel groove tap by means of glove and barrier methods for the purposes of creating an
isolation point.

These being:

 A Switching Job Risk Assessment (JRA) shall be carried out by the Switching
Operator.
 The length of the spur being disconnected shall be kept as short as possible in
order to limit any capacitive charging as far as practically possible.
 Maximum unloaded spur lengths.
a). 11kV / 12.7 kV rated line - 15km
b). 19.1 kV / 22kV rated line - 4km
c). 33kV rated line - 1.5km
 The respective upstream protective device with respect to the line tap removal i.e.
re-closer shall be disabled and reflected on the program.
 The removal of the line tap itself must be reflected as an isolation step and point in
the program required for the later EAP.
 A comprehensive Job Risk Assessment shall be carried out in conjunction with the
issue of a Vicinity Access permit (VA) for the removal of the line taps.
 Glove and Barrier methods for disconnecting the line taps shall be followed.
 As a critical step in the process, an Observer must be posted when the line taps are
disconnected and reconnected.
 The removed line taps shall be tagged as isolation points with a Do Not Operate
Tag for the later issue of the EAP.
 The removed taps and sections of conductor must be mechanically secured and
not be left dangling.

9-18
 Section Nine – Distribution Switching Programs

 A Vicinity Access Permit (VA) shall be used for the reconnection of the clamps
once the EAP has been cancelled.

9.6.4 Switching using Single-Phase Devices

Where non-ganged switches (three single-phase switches) exist in the network,

there may be situations where these switches need to be operated to interconnect
feeders or to achieve isolation. Some network configurations may be susceptible to
load imbalance due to extensive single-phase spurs or phase differences across
open points. When feeders are interconnected by non-ganged single-phase
switches, the following may occur:

 load imbalance between interconnecting feeders

 load imbalance on the power transformers on the busbar.

When interconnecting three-phase feeders with single-phase devices, the following

options should be considered:

 moving to next gang switch

 using the substation transfer bar

 short interruption for customers.

9.6.5 Constraint with Live Line Tap Removal

Maximum lengths of network apply when removing taps on unloaded overhead

distribution lines. This is due to an increase in capacitance (charging current) as the
line length increase.

Maximum line lengths for live line tap removal are:

 11kV = 15 km

 22kV = 4 km

 33kV = 1.5 km

9.6.6 Paralleling of Feeders and Transformers

The program writer must be aware the fault level (fault current) is increased at
times when supplies are paralleled (interconnected).

9-19
Switching Operator's Manual One

For HV feeder interconnection the method to minimise fault current in order of

preference is:

1. interconnect onto the same feeder (frequently this not possible due to
network configuration)

2. interconnect on adjacent feeders supplied from the same zone substation

transformer

3. interconnect on adjacent feeders supplied from different zone substation

transformers.

9.6.7 For LV interconnection, only the minimum number of transformers

required to supply the load should be interconnected. It is desirable the
interconnected transformers should be on the same HV feeder where
possible.LV Isolation and Distribution Transformer Management

Consideration needs to be given when applying LV back-feeds or running

transformers in parallel. These considerations are:

 LV isolations and back-feed text steps should be included in the HV switching

program when work involves both HV and LV networks.

 When a transformer is to be back-fed, the ‘Apply back-feed’ step must be

added prior to the transformer LV disconnectors being opened and Danger–
Do Not Operate tagged. If a transformer is to be back-fed via a generator, the
step ‘Apply generator’ must be included in the program.

9.6.8 Phasing Out

Phasing out is required when conductors are to be connected together or

interconnected for the first time without having been previously checked for correct
phasing.

The program writer should first determine whether phasing out is necessary and, if
so, where it should be done.

The program writer must check whether:

 there is a built-in facility

 special equipment is needed, available and in good condition

9-20
 Section Nine – Distribution Switching Programs

 phasing out is required at more than one point, and

 if disabling of an auto reclose device is required for HV phasing out.

If the equipment is uncommissioned, built in phasing facilities should not be used

until they are proved operational.

9.6.9 Ferroresonance

Ferroresonance is a phenomenon that may produce high voltages in a HV cable

transformer combination when the supply is either applied of disconnected via
single-phase switches or drop out fuses.

The program writer must understand how ferroresonance occurs and where it may
be encountered during a switching program.

Field Instruction Ferroresonance in the Underground Distribution System describes

methods to eliminate ferroresonance whilst switching.

9.6.10 Use of LV Fused Jumpers

When multiple distribution transformers are interconnected on the LV, but supplied
from different HV feeders, there is a risk if one feeder trips on fault the healthy
feeder will supply the tripped feeder load and fault via the interconnected LV. This
can possibly result in severe overload and permanent damage to the LV
interconnection.

To avoid the above problem, LV fused jumpers are used for interconnection where:

 overhead transformers without LV fuses are supplied by different feeders

 overhead transformers without LV fuses, are on the same feeder, but have a
recloser or sectionaliser between the LV interconnected transformers.

LV fused jumpers are not required when:

 a transformer has fused LV circuits which are used for interconnection

 HV switching has taken place to insure the interconnected transformers are

on the same feeder.

9.6.11 Switchgear Ratings

An important consideration when writing a switching program is the rating and load
breaking capacity of the electrical apparatus being switched.

9-21
Switching Operator's Manual One

Many items of electrical apparatus while able to carry significant load current have
limited ability to break load current without damage to the contacts or drawing a
substantial arc.

It is therefore important to check the ratings of each item to be switched and adjust
the program where necessary to avoid breaching their capacities.

Specific information on rating can be found in the Horizon Power Distribution

Design Rules.

9.6.12 Customer Outages

Where a customer outage occurs as an intended part of a switching program, the

following must be considered:

 impact on life support (LS) customers and general customers and the
associated notification requirements

 supply outage impact on sensitive connections, such as traffic lights and

sewerage pumps and appropriate notification and liaison with respective
authorities, and

 time restrictions applicable to supply outages above the 26th parallel.

9.6.13 Efficient Switching Program Sequence

Where possible, the switching program sequence should minimise the travelling
time and distances required by the switching operator. For example, where several
isolation points are required to be created, and there is no technical reason for this
to be performed in a particular sequence, the sequence which minimises the
travelling time and distances should be selected.

9.6.14 Preparation of System Change Documentation

Where the work performed results in a change to the network, the system change
documentation must be completed by the program writer prior to execution of the
switching program.

9.7 Running a Switching Program

All HV switching is coordinated by HPCC. In the running of a switching program the
switching operator must be aware of the following requirements.

9-22
 Section Nine – Distribution Switching Programs

9.7.1 Commencement of Switching

Switching operators must not commence switching until they are specifically
instructed by the HPCC. This is normally included as a “Contact HPCC, request
permission to commence “ step in the switching program.

9.7.2 Sequence of Instructions

Unless otherwise stated in the switching program, all switching operations will be
carried out in the consecutive sequence of step numbers in the switching program.

Where, due to unforeseen circumstances, a program sequence cannot be strictly

followed, the switching operator and the HPCC controller will determine whether
the program can be continued with minor changes or whether the program should
be discontinued.

Where the program requires minor changes, HPCC and the switching operator will
agree on the changes required to enable the program to proceed. HPCC will
amend the program and ensure that all operators at the locations involved in the
switching program are informed of and note the program changes. The amended
switching program will then proceed.

Where the switching program requires major change, a new program will be written
by the switching operator.

9.8 Backup Process. Job dispatch via phone and

using paper copy of the Switching Schedule.

The backup process:

 The backup process will make use of a paper copy of the checked
and approved switching schedule.

 A copy of the switching schedule must be in possession of the Switching

Operator before any switching is carried out, even if switching is to be
carried out using a tablet.

 HPSC and the SWOP will enter the backup process once all reasonable
steps have failed to restore switching operations via the tablet in the field.

 The backup process will be supported by phone communication between

the Switching Operator and HPSC.

 Should the backup process be initiated during the tablet switching process
for whatever reason, the Switching Operator and the HPSC shall review the
current paper copy of the switching schedule and check which steps were
last confirmed by tablet before proceeding with the next step of switching.

9-23
Switching Operator's Manual One

If this is not possible, then the Switching Operator must go back go to the
last location of the last known step and check the status of the switched
device is correct, before proceeding with any further switching actions.

Any other additional switching steps which were added when using the
tablet must also be discussed and added to the paper copy of the program
as required at this time. This can be done manually by the Switching
Operator in the field or if possible it should be reprinted.

 A mandatory stand down time of 15 minutes must be respected when the

need arises to change over from tablet switching to the backup system by
the Switching Operator. This will ensure that the Switching Operator
remains focused as a result of the change in switching process. The
Switching Operator must revisit his risk assessment before recommencing
switching by means of the paper schedule.

9.8.1 Paper Switching Schedule

Once the decision is made to use a backup paper switching schedule the following
will apply or be in place:

 Telephonic communication shall be established and checked between the

Switching Operator and HPCC.

 All communication between the SWOP and HPSC will be concise and clear.

 Instructed steps issued to the SWOP shall be “repeated back” to the HPSC
to ensure that each instruction has been understood.

 Important information received from the SWOP shall be repeated back by

HPSC to ensure that it has been understood.

 There must be a clear distinction in all telephonic discussion between what

is “instruction” and what is “other” general information being shared
between the parties.

 The word “Instruction” shall be used in context when the HPSC issues an
instruction to the Switching Operator.

 Every time a new call is made to HPCC, the Switching Operator shall state
his name, location and program number.

 When a HPSC receives a call, he shall identify himself by name and the
control centre (HPCC).

 If at any time the SWOP or the HPSC are unable to give full attention to the
operation of the schedule, the schedule should be halted until such time as
it can carry on without interruption.

 HPSC is the controlling authority on the power network. This position of

authority must be upheld during all communication and field operations.

9-24
 Section Nine – Distribution Switching Programs

9.8.2 Actions by SWOP before contacting HPSC for

Operating Instructions (initially and for multiple
switching locations).

 The SWOP has checked against the switching schedule that he is at the
correct location.

 He has confirmed the next sequential step in the switching schedule.

 He has identified the apparatus to be switched on.

 He has confirmed that the state of the apparatus is in the expected position.

 He has confirmed as far as reasonably possible that the apparatus to be

switched is fit for operation and service.

 He has noted any alarms or unusual situations that could potentially affect
safe operation of the apparatus in question.

9.8.3 Place keeping practises when using the Backup

Process.

Hatching and Cross Hatching shall be used to ensure that the SWOP does not lose
his place on the paper copy of the switching schedule.

This shall be achieved by following process:

 The Switching Operator must confirm he has the correct authorised version
of the switching schedule in his possession.

 Once an instruction has been received by the SWOP, a diagonal line ( / )

shall be drawn through that switching step in the block indicating the “Item
number” on the schedule.

 Once the instruction has been executed by the SWOP, another line must be
made through this line to form an ( X ). Steps instructed but not yet
executed will clearly be visible etc. No step must be executed without a
diagonal line ( / ) adjacent to it.

9-25
Switching Operator's Manual One

 Steps that do not require an action from the Switching Operator that have
been communicated by the HPSC as complete, for example tele steps,
must be indicated with a tick ( √ ) adjacent to that step in the program.

9.8.4 Recording of Operating Times.

Times when the switching instruction has been completed; must be recorded by the
Switching Operator adjacent to the switching step on the paper copy in the
“Confirmed Date / Time” section.

This shall be done by using standard 24 hour clock times to record when the
switching operation was completed e.g. 12h36.

9.8.5 Error Correction.

If at any time an error is made when writing information on the paper copy of the
program, for example the date / time of an operation, a single line shall be drawn
through the incorrect information and the correct information rewritten.

9-26
 SECTION TEN

Distribution Testing and

Commissioning
Table of Contents
10. Distribution Testing and Commissioning ............................................ 10-1
10.1 Introduction....................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 Documentation ................................................................................. 10-1
10.3 Testing Equipment............................................................................ 10-2
10.3.1 Voltage Testing Equipment.......................................................... 10-2
10.3.2 Insulation Test Equipment ......................................................... 10-10
10.3.3 Earth Testing ............................................................................. 10-11
10.3.4 Other Specialised Testing Equipment ........................................ 10-14
10.4 Testing and Commissioning Distribution Apparatus ........................ 10-17

i
Switching Operator's Manual One

List of Figures
Figure 10-1 Typical LV Voltmeter ..................................................................... 10-3
Figure 10-2 Amplifier type voltage tester (the Modiewark®) .............................. 10-4
Figure 10-3 The Modielive® EMF generator (right) ........................................... 10-4
Figure 10-4 Ring main unit Neon indicator ....................................................... 10-5
Figure 10-5 Capacitive bushing and neon circuit.............................................. 10-6
Figure 10-6 Phasing LV disconnectors ............................................................ 10-6
Figure 10-7 LV phasing out diagram ................................................................ 10-7
Figure 10-8 Proving de-energised and phasing out .......................................... 10-8
Figure 10-9 HV overhead wireless phasing out equipment .............................. 10-9
Figure 10-10 High voltage test sticks ............................................................... 10-9
Figure 10-11 Typical 5kV HV Megger testing unit .......................................... 10-10
Figure 10-12 Horizon Power's standard VLF tester – the HVA60 VLF Tester 10-11
Figure 10-13 Method 1: Fall of potential test .................................................. 10-12
Figure 10-14 Method 2: Stakeless hand held test .......................................... 10-13
Figure 10-15 Method 3: Stakeless test ........................................................... 10-13
Figure 10-16 Typical phase rotation meter ..................................................... 10-14
Figure 10-17 The phase to neutral voltages ................................................... 10-14
Figure 10-18 Signal injector for cable identification ........................................ 10-16
Figure 10-19 Typical HV spiking tools ............................................................ 10-17
Figure 10-20 Commissioning ring main unit ................................................... 10-20

List of Tables
Table 10-1 LV phasing out tests and readings ................................................. 10-7

ii
10. Distribution Testing and
Commissioning
10.1 Introduction
This section is designed to give the switching operator an overview of the
equipment and the procedures required for the testing and commissioning of
equipment on Horizon Power's distribution networks.

Horizon Power has detailed documentation available for distribution testing and
commissioning, note this information will not be repeated here.

10.2 Documentation
Switching operators required to carry out testing and commissioning must ensure
they are knowledgeable of the requirements specified in the related Horizon Power
documentation.

The core documentation is The Network Testing and Commissioning Standards –

CS10# 1897047 which provides procedures and further information on testing and
commissioning requirements. This is supported with the Distribution
Commissioning Test Sheets provided for each type of apparatus which describes
the testing and commissioning requirements and provide space for recording of the
related results.

Examples of additional support documentation include:

 Test Before Touch Prior to Commencement with Work

 Instruments – Testing and Calibration

 Testing and Use of High Voltage Insulated Equipment

 Commissioning of New Low Voltage UDS Cables

 Commissioning of High and Low Voltage Cables and Apparatus

 Identifying and Proving of HV Cables

 Ferroresonance in the Underground Distribution System

 Testing of High Voltage Cables – CS10# 3651308

 Guideline: Technical Maintenance for Equipment Earthing – CS10# 4064717.

10-1
Switching Operator's Manual One

The range of testing and commissioning tasks the switching operator may need to
carry out include voltage tests, phasing out tests, cable identification, insulation
resistance tests and earth resistance tests. The test equipment used to conduct
these tasks is briefly described below.

Specific instruments do vary, therefore the documentation specific to the instrument

being used must be consulted before its use.

10.3 Testing Equipment

The test equipment is required to meet detailed safety and accuracy standards and
must be treated carefully. Switching operators should ensure that all test equipment
is stored and transported so as not to damage testing equipment.

Test equipment is used in the following broad categories:

 voltage testing, including phasing out testing

 insulation testing

 earth testing, and

 other specialised testing, including cable identification

10.3.1 Voltage Testing Equipment

Voltage test equipment includes voltmeters, neon testers and amplifier type testers
(e.g. a Modiewark® device).

Voltage testing equipment performs the essential functions of :

 measuring voltages to check they are within limits

 proving de-energised before applying earths, and

 phasing out to confirm apparatus is connected in the correct phase

sequence.

Test equipment must be checked before and after the test.

! This is done by measuring a known voltage on energised

equipment or by using the test instrument's own test facility.

10-2
 Section Ten – Distribution Testing and Commissioning

Voltmeters

Voltmeters may be used on the LV system to measure voltage and phasing out
tests. A hand held voltmeter is shown in Figure 10-1.

Figure 10-1 Typical LV Voltmeter

Voltmeters are self-contained with a digital display. To make measurements, the

test probes are required to make actual contact with the circuit under test.

When using LV voltmeters on bare conductors or exposed

energised busbars, the operator must wear the correct PPE.

Amplifier Type Voltage Tester (Modiewark®)

This instrument has an electronic amplifier which is used to detect the electric field
near an energised conductor. This instrument has internal batteries.

Direct contact with the conductor under test is not required, however close
proximity is preferred for correct indication.

An amplifier type voltage tester must not be used to prove the

status of low voltage apparatus.

When testing for high voltage, this tester must not be hand
held. Approved HV insulated operating sticks must be used.

The Modiewark is Horizon Power's main device for checking de-energised HV

circuits before earthing (see Figure 10-2).

10-3
Switching Operator's Manual One

A neon light and buzzer indicate if the conductor/busbar is energised when the
Modiewark is set to its prescribed voltage setting and placed adjacent to the
conductor/busbar. The following test methods must be used to prove the
Modiewark for testing.

Head
On-Off
Voltage selection
switch

Handle
with universal
sunrise fitting

Audio (buzzer)
indicator

Visual LED
indicator

Figure 10-2 Amplifier type voltage tester (the Modiewark®)

Modiewark testing methods

Before and after testing a de-energised circuit, the preferred method of proving that
the Modiewark is operational is by testing a similar voltage on an adjacent
energised line.

Current models of Modiewarks have a self-testing feature, in that when the

Modiewark is turned on, an intermittent ‘beep’ occurs to indicate the device is
working, and when placed near a voltage source, the ‘beep’ becomes continuous.

The Modielive® EMF generator is an accessory device used with the Modiewark
voltage tester. The Modielive produces an electromagnetic field (EMF) which can
be detected by the Modiewark to prove the Modiewark is working correctly.

Figure 10-3 The Modielive® EMF generator (right)

used to test the integrity of the Modiewark’s testing function.

10-4
 Section Ten – Distribution Testing and Commissioning

Note: The Modiewark will not be damaged by placing it against a high voltage
conductor, even when selected to ‘Test/240V’.

An amplifier type voltage tester must not be used to prove the

status of cables with an earth screen, because the electric
field of the phase conductors cannot be detected through the
earthed screen.

Voltage Indicator (Neon Indicator)

Horizon Power’s high voltage switchgear such as indoor switchboards and ring
main units frequently have built-in neon indicators. (see Figure 10-4).

Neon indicator for each phase

Glowing = voltage is present

Socket to plug in voltmeter

as alternative indication

Figure 10-4 Ring main unit Neon indicator

A capacitive bushing is used on each phase to provide the neon with a reduced
voltage which is proportional to the primary conductor voltage (see Figure 10-5).

The screen develops a voltage somewhere between the primary conductor voltage
and earth (0 volts), dependent on its physical location between the primary
conductor and earth. The screen is typically located to provide voltages around
100-200V, but this can vary between bushings.

10-5
Switching Operator's Manual One

Figure 10-5 Capacitive bushing and neon circuit

LV Phasing out

Phasing out is also required as part of testing and commissioning of new LV

overhead and underground apparatus and transformers.

LV phasing out requires the use of a voltmeter as shown in Figure 10-6 below.

Figure 10-6 Phasing LV disconnectors

The phasing out process is described below.

Figure 10-7 shows two LV supplies at a normally open point. As this open point is
interconnecting the two supplies, it is necessary to ensure the two supplies phase
out. Table 10-1 shows the series of tests to be performed and the expected results
for correct phasing out. An open point which does not phase out must not be
closed.

10-6
 Section Ten – Distribution Testing and Commissioning

R R1 R2 R
LV W W1 W2 W LV
Suppy 1 B1 B2 Suppy 2
B B
N N

Phasing out
location

Figure 10-7 LV phasing out diagram

Voltmeter
Test connections Voltage reading
Volts (V)

Test supply 1 – Each phase to neutral Phase to neutral voltage Approx. 240

Test supply 2 – Each phase to neutral Phase to neutral voltage Approx. 240

R1 R2 No significant voltage Less than 30

R1 W2 Full phase to phase voltage Approx. 415

R1 B2 Full phase to phase voltage Approx. 415

W1 R2 Full phase to phase voltage Approx. 415

W1 W2 No significant voltage Less than 30

W1 B2 Full phase to phase voltage Approx. 415

B1 R2 Full phase to phase voltage Approx. 415

B1 W2 Full phase to phase voltage Approx. 415

B1 B2 No significant voltage Less than 30

Note: Because last test was ‘no significant voltage’, test the instrument is still working using any phase to phase
or phase to neutral voltage reading.

Table 10-1 LV phasing out tests and readings

10-7
Switching Operator's Manual One

LV underground switching requirements

Because of the close proximity of the switching operator to LV apparatus during

underground switching operations, the switching operator must always test for
correct phasing and supply (i.e. phase out) before installing fuses or disconnectors
in a normally open point. The process of phasing out is described in the section
above.

Proving de-energised problems

R1

R2

W1

W2

B1

B2

Figure 10-8 Proving de-energised and phasing out

When conducting voltage checks to prove a cable de-energised the following

problems may occur. Refer to Figure 10-8.

 The switching operator should measure the incoming cable voltages between
each phase and neutral (R2 to N, W2 to N and B2 to N) to check if the cable
is de-energised. If the voltage records zero, the cable is de-energised.

 Where the incoming cable is de-energised and an electronic voltmeter is

used, a voltage (approximately 240V) may be measured from R1 to R2, W1
to W2 and B1 to B2, due to the presence of kWh meter potential coils
connected between phase and neutral.

 Where the incoming cable is energised, if voltages higher than 30V are
measured from R1 to R2, W1 to W2 and B1 to B2 , the phasing out is not

10-8
 Section Ten – Distribution Testing and Commissioning

correct and interconnection cannot proceed. (This may be caused by the

phases being crossed or one phase having a much lower voltage than its
corresponding phase.)

HV Overhead Phasing out

Shown in Figure 10-9 below is the typical phasing out test equipment used on the
HV overhead.

Figure 10-9 HV overhead wireless phasing out equipment

This instrument consists of two parts; grey (transmitter) and blue (receiver). The
transmitter and receiver are connected, using insulated HV operating sticks to each
side of the apparatus to be phased out (e.g. pole top switch).

The test sequence is similar to the LV phasing out in Table 10-1, except the
transmitter unit alone is used to prove the presence of voltage on supply 1 and 2,
and then the transmitter and receiver combination is used between phases on
supply 1 and 2 to phase out. An audible signal is issued when both parts of the
instrument are connected to the same phase.

HV Indoor Switchgear Phasing out

Indoor switchgear can be phased out using specialised HV test instruments such
as shown in Figure 10-10. This instrument functions as a high voltage volt meter.

Figure 10-10 High voltage test sticks

10-9
Switching Operator's Manual One

An alternative method is to phase out with a voltmeter, using the voltage indicators
(neon indicators) sockets on the front panel of the switchgear. This requires the
neon sockets have been proven to be connected to the correct HV phases before
being used to phase out.

HV Ring Main Switchgear Phasing Out

The voltage indicators (neon indicators) sockets on the front panel of the
switchgear and a hand-held voltmeter can be used to phase out HV supplies. This
requires the neons sockets have been previously commissioned and proven to be
connected to the correct HV phases before being used to phase out.

10.3.2 Insulation Test Equipment

The main types of insulation test equipment used by Horizon Power include the
insulation resistance meter (Megger®) and the high voltage paper insulated cable
tester (hipot).

Insulation Resistance Meter (Megger®)

This device is used to measure the insulation resistance value of the apparatus by
applying a voltage (usually 1kV to 5kV) from phase to phase or phase to neutral (or
earth for HV).

Figure 10-11 Typical 5kV HV Megger testing unit

VLF Testing

Very low frequency (VLF) cable testing is a technique used for testing of high
voltage cables.

10-10
 Section Ten – Distribution Testing and Commissioning

The cable being tested must withstand a VLF AC voltage for a specified testing
time without flashover. This method yields a ‘Pass/ Fail’ result. Frequency ranges
used are within the range of 0.01 Hz to 0.1 Hz, with 0.1 Hz being the Horizon
Power standard.

Figure 10-12 Horizon Power's standard VLF tester – the HVA60 VLF Tester

Note: XLPE cables must not be tested with a High Voltage DC Cable Tester
(Hipot) because it may shorten the life of the cable.

10.3.3 Earth Testing

Principle of Operation

For safety reasons it is essential electrical apparatus is effectively earthed. This

ensures step and touch potential are limited and reliable earth fault protection
operation.

Horizon Power uses multiple techniques to test and record the resistance of its
earthing systems. As there are a range of test instruments used the specific manual
must be consulted to ensure correct test setup and measurement technique.

A range of test instruments and associated test methods are used. The most
common test methods include:

 fall of potential test

 stakeless hand-held test (single core tester), and
 stakeless hand-held test (two core tester).

Each method is briefly described below.

10-11
Switching Operator's Manual One

Method 1: Fall of potential test

Figure 10-13 shows the fall of potential test method used to measure the
effectiveness of the earth electrode under test. This method requires a known test
current to be passed between the electrode under test and the test stake (current).

The voltage is measured at the test stake (voltage) in positions 1, 2 and 3 and the
average voltage value is calculated. Using Ohm’s Law R = V/I = (average voltage
value) / (test current) is used to determine the resistance of the electrode under test
resistance.

Position Position
Position 3 2 1

Test stake Test stake

(voltage) (current)
3m 3m
Electrode
62% of D
under test
D

Earth

Figure 10-13 Method 1: Fall of potential test

Method 2: Stakeless hand-held test (single core tester)

Figure 10-14 shows the instrument applied to the electrode under test whilst it
remains connected in the earth system. The clamp-on head has two internal cores,
the first core induces a constant AC voltage into the earth rod under test and the
second core measures the induced current which flows.

Because the induced voltage is constant, the current flowing is proportional to the
electrode under test resistance. This method requires multiple earth electrodes to
provide the loop current required for measurement.

The greater the number of additional electrodes, the greater the accuracy of the
measurement. The instrument-induced voltage is at a very high frequency to
ensure the measurement is not affected by any 50Hz current which may be flowing
in the electrode under test.

10-12
 Section Ten – Distribution Testing and Commissioning

Other earthing
system electrodes

Note: Size of arrow

indicates magnitude
of current

Electrode
under test

Earth

Figure 10-14 Method 2: Stakeless hand held test

Method 3: Stakeless hand-held test (separate core tester)

This method is similar to Method 2, except the voltage inducing and current
measurement cores are separately attached to the electrode under test. See Figure
10-15.

Other earthing
system electrodes

> 10 cm

Electrode
under test Earth

Figure 10-15 Method 3: Stakeless test

10-13
Switching Operator's Manual One

10.3.4 Other Specialised Testing Equipment

Other specialised equipment includes phase rotation meters and cable location
meters.

Phase Rotation Meter

The phase rotation meter is a device used to test for correct phase rotation (see
Figure 10-16). The phase to neutral voltages in Figure 10-17 show the correct
sequence R > W > B as each phase reaches its peak value. Phase rotation
determines the direction three-phase electric motors will spin. The swapping of any
two phases will cause the motor to spin backwards.

It is most important that phase rotation meters are not used for phasing out, as
different phasing can give the same phase rotation.

Phase rotation meters may be used for checking supplies that cannot be
interconnected or for the rotation of kilowatt-hour meters.

Figure 10-16 Typical phase rotation meter

Phase-neutral Voltages
400

200

-200

-400
inst R V inst W V inst B V

Figure 10-17 The phase to neutral voltages

showing the correct sequence R > W > B the phases reach their peak value.

10-14
 Section Ten – Distribution Testing and Commissioning

Cross-phasing producing incorrect rotation can cause

extensive damage to large motors. (This occurs because
electric motors run in the reverse direction.)

Cable Locator Detectors

Generally, cable locator detectors have two different functions:

 measurement of a magnetic field, and

 signal injection.

Both functions may be available in the one instrument.

The measurement of magnetic field (due to the load current in the cable) is used to
establish whether a cable is in the vicinity (including its alignment and depth). This
knowledge is necessary, for example, when excavation is occurring near buried
cables.

Note: The cable detector uses the measurement of magnetic field to locate
cables. It will not detect an energised cable that is unloaded.

If a cable is deenergised, a signal generator/ injector will be required

because of the absence of a magnetic field.

One of the problems of the magnetic field cable detector is that it is difficult to
distinguish a specific de-energised cable from surrounding cables.

It is standard procedure to work on live LV cable. This means there is the danger of
an HV cable being worked on live, because it has been incorrectly identified as a
LV cable.

For this reason, it is necessary to use signal injection for cable detection when
several similar cables are run in the same alignment and positive identification of
only one cable is necessary.

When an LV cable is to be worked upon, it is necessary to identify all HV cables in

the work area. This must be done by signal injection, unless the LV cable may be
clearly identified by its dimensions or construction.

Where it is not possible to positively identify an LV cable, the required cable must
be made dead and spiked using a HV cable spiking gun. The width of the blade
should be across the cable to ensure contact is make with all three phases.

10-15
Switching Operator's Manual One

Note: Before removing the spike from the cable, the point of LV supply must
first be checked for blown fuses or any HV protection operation.

Approved gloves must be used when removing the spike.

To accurately identify the location of cables, a signal is injected into the cable at a
convenient point. The cable detector is then able to follow the route of the particular
cable. However, there may be difficulties in avoiding the injected signal flowing into
other cable neutrals. This makes the method unsatisfactory for the identification of
LV cables.

Signal injection is accurate for HV cables, because the signal may be isolated from
earth. This is achieved by short circuiting the cable between two phases at the
remote end and injecting a signal between the two phases at the signal point. The
signal is then picked up by the signal detection instrument current at any point
along the cable route.

A signal injector for cable identification is shown in Figure 10-18.

Figure 10-18 Signal injector for cable identification

HV Cable Spiking Tool

In general, HV apparatus must be tested and earthed at the work site, if the
program earthing points cannot be seen. Because this is impractical for HV cables,
the method of proving the cable de-energised requires a spiking tool to penetrate
all cable phases at the work site. Once this has been done, the cable can be
worked on with no visual earths.

The recommended spiking tool is a wireless remote-controlled cutter/crimper. The

existing explosive-powered chisel spiking tools are to be replaced in accordance
with existing tool replacement procedures.

For further information refer to the Field Instruction Identifying and Proving of HV
Cables.

10-16
 Section Ten – Distribution Testing and Commissioning

Figure 10-19 Typical HV spiking tools

Note: It is the switching operator’s responsibility to ensure that the

identification and spiking of a HV cable is included as a step in a
switching program.

The switching operator must also ensure that the auto reclose function
is disabled on the cable to be spiked and on all cables in the vicinity.

During the spiking action, contact must be made with HPCC to verify
that the spiking action has not affected the network by tripping other
feeders.

10.4 Testing and Commissioning Distribution

Apparatus
All new apparatus connected to Horizon Power's HV and LV network is required to
be tested and commissioned. Testing and commissioning new electrical equipment
has great potential for hazardous consequences and the need to consider safety at
each step in the process cannot be stressed too highly.

The testing and commissioning of new electrical apparatus is necessary to:

 ensure quality of workmanship

 prove condition of the new apparatus is safe, and

10-17
Switching Operator's Manual One

 ensure correct operation of the apparatus and suitability for integration into
the network.

It is most important to check that the apparatus is safe to operate. It must be

electrically sound and phased correctly.

Commissioning requires that new apparatus is initially energised from a remote

location using proven apparatus.

Testing and commissioning is technically demanding, and requires appropriately

trained staff. Commissioning of most distribution apparatus is carried out by the
switching operator who must have the appropriate level of Horizon Power's
switching operator's authority.

The requirements for testing and commissioning of specific electrical apparatus is

provided in Network Testing and Commissioning Standards – CS10# 1897047.

Distribution Commissioning Test Sheets describe the required tests and provide
space for the recording of test results for electrical apparatus.

Note: Where testing has been carried out by other competent persons, the
associated test sheets and handover sheets must be provided to the
switching operator for review before equipment energisation can occur.

Where required on the commissioning sheet, the switching operator will

add test results obtained during the energisation of the equipment.

Distribution Commissioning Test Sheets are available for the following apparatus:

Aerial and pole mounted installations

 Pole top distribution transformers

 Pole top switches and disconnectors
 HV overhead conductor
 LV overhead conductor
 LV aerial bundled conductor

Underground and ground mounted installations

 Ground mounted and padmounted distribution transformers

 HV switchgear
 HV cables
 LV switchgear
 LV cables and pillars

10-18
 Section Ten – Distribution Testing and Commissioning

Customer-owned installations

 Distribution substations
 Private parallel generators

SCADA and communications installation and commissioning

 Distribution substations
 Reclosers
 Fault indicators

Testing requirements

 LV XPLE cable testing

 LV continuity and phasing testing
 LV cable testing after repair
 HV XPLE cable testing
 HV paper insulated cable testing
 HV mixed cable testing
 HV cable testing after repair of obvious fault
 Earth testing
 LV switchgear inspection and testing
 HV extensible switchgear testing
 Substation design/installation check list

Switching example for RMU commissioning

A typical example of the process of phasing out, cable identification and

commissioning of Substation A ring main (2+2) unit is described below. This
example assumes all switchgear pre-commissioning and cable testing has been
completed.

10-19
Switching Operator's Manual One

Substation Substation
B A
SWDC SWDC SWDC SWDC FSSW FSSW
4 3 1 2 1 2
Existing LV

Live LV
board

Transformer 2
Substation
C
Feeder 1 SWDC SWDC
6 5

Existing LV

Live LV
board

Transformer 1
SWDC = RMU switch disconnector
FSSW = RMU fuse switch
= Existing installation
= New installation

Figure 10-20 Commissioning ring main unit

Phasing Out and Proving of Labels on a New 2+2 Ring Main Unit

The following steps are required to be carried out, to prove the switchgear
operation on potential, HV and LV phasing out and circuit label designations on a
new 2 + 2 ring main unit (RMU) as shown in Figure 10-20.

This is an example of the switching sequence that can be used for commissioning
Substation A RMU, however there are other switching sequence variations which
could alternatively be used to achieve satisfactory commissioning.

Initial conditions are that Substations B and C are energised via RMU SWDC 4 and
RMU SWDC 6 respectively. All other switches are OFF and all earth switches are
OFF.

1. Set the auto reclose on Feeder 1 to manual, if applicable.

2. At Substation A check that all HV switches are OFF and earth switches are
OFF.

3. Check the transformer disconnectors are OFF on the LV board at

Transformer 1.

4. Check the transformer disconnectors are OFF on the LV board at

Transformer 2.

10-20
 Section Ten – Distribution Testing and Commissioning

5. Switch RMU FSSW 1 ON at Substation A.

6. Switch RMU SWDC 1 ON at Substation A.

7. Switch RMU SWDC 3 ON at Substation B. (Steps 5, 6, and 7 allow the new

ring main unit Substation A and the Transformer 1 to be energised remotely.)

8. Check the no load voltage at the Transformer 1. If the Transformer is

energised, this proves that the correct labels are fitted to RMU SWDC 1,
RMU FSSW 1, and the Transformer 1.

9. Phase out across the transformer LV disconnectors at the Transformer 1 to

the existing LV supply. This proves if the phasing is correct from Substation
B.

10. Switch RMU SWDC 1 OFF at Substation A. This proves the operation of the
switch while energised.

11. Switch RMU SWDC 2 ON at Substation A.

12. Switch RMU SWDC 5 ON at Substation C. (Steps 11 and 12 allow RMU

SWDC 2 at Substation A to be energised remotely. If the Transformer 1 is
energised it proves that the label on switch RMU SWDC 2 is correct.)

13. Phase out again across transformer LV disconnectors at the Transformer 1 to

the known LV supply. This proves whether the phasing is correct from
Substation C.

Note: Transformer 1 has been supplied from the two HV supplies (Substation
B then Substation C) and phased out both times using the LV side of
Transformer 1 to an existing LV system – this proves both HV supplies must
phase out.

14. Switch RMU FSSW 1 OFF at Substation A. This proves the operation of RMU
FSSW 1 while energised.

15. Switch RMU SWDC 2 OFF at Substation A. This proves the operation of
RMU SWDC 2 while energised.

16. Switch RMU SWDC 5 OFF at Substation C.

17. Switch RMU FSSW 2 ON at Substation A.

18. Switch RMU SWDC 2 ON at Substation A.

19. Switch RMU SWDC 5 ON at Substation C. (Steps 17, 18 and 19 allow RMU
FSSW 2 and the Transformer 2 to be energised remotely.)

20. Check the no load volts at the Transformer 2. If the transformer is energised,
this proves that the correct labels are fitted to RMU FSSW 2 and the
Transformer 2.

21. Phase out across the transformer LV disconnectors at the Transformer 2 to

the known supply. This proves whether the phasing is correct for RMU FSSW
2 and the Transformer 2.

10-21
Switching Operator's Manual One

22. Switch RMU FSSW 2 OFF at Substation A. This proves the operation of RMU
FSSW 2 while energised.

23. Switch RMU SWDC 1 ON at Substation A. This proves that the new HV
circuits parallel successfully.

The switching may then be completed to the required final circuit arrangement and
the normal open points set to the designated positions.

All phasing out and switching operations shall be written as part of the switching
program.

Using neons to phase out HV

It would also be possible to use the voltage indicators (neon indicators) sockets
with a voltmeter to phase out the two HV supplies (from RMU SWDC 3 and RMU
SWDC 5). This requires the neons sockets have already been proven to be
connected to the correct HV phases inside the switchgear.

An example of the switching sequence required to prove the neons sockets is:

1. With RMU SWDC 3, RMU SWDC 5, RMU FSSW 1 and RMU FSSW 2
all OFF

2. RMU SWDC 1 and RMU SWDC 2 both ON

3. Switch RMU SWDC 3 ON – energises RMU SWDC 1 and RMU SWDC 2

cables

4. Phase out on the neon sockets on RMU SWDC 1 and RMU SWDC 2.

As both RMU SWDC 1 and RMU SWDC 2 cables are supplied from a single HV
source (RMU SWDC 3), the correct phasing out proves the neon sockets
connections inside the switchgear are correct.

These neon sockets can now be used to phase out the two separate HV supplies to
Substation A from RMU SWDC 3 and RMU SWDC 5.

10-22
 SECTION ELEVEN

To Be Confirmed